Home

MELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User`s Manual

1. Error C1 occurred 19 36 Error A2 occurred Y in 1 LI dl m I hid i 4 EE Programming tool v E Error history display A Time Module with error Error code H AA 19 29 ModuleA Error A1 Error history NS 19 33 CPU 1 CPU module Module error log 19 34 Module B ErorB1 Time Module with error Error code 19 36 Module A ErrorA2 19 33 Error C1 19 29 ModuleA ErrorA1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 Module A Error A2 Example of screen display Error History List Displayed Errors Errors 12 12 Error Code Notation DEC HEX No Error Code Year Month Day Time Model Name Start 110 2 a418 cd 03 0 0 0 00011 BBC2 a418 cdj03 a0 c0 0c QJ61BT11N 0020 00010 FDIC 2009 06 24 10 11 06 QJ71LP21 25 0000 00009 112 2009 06 24 10 10 46 QJ71LP21 25 0000 00008 F112 2009 06 24 10 10 02 QJ71LP21 25 0000 00007 ocic 2009 06 24 10 08 28 QO3UDCPU meer 00006 0700 2009 06 24 10 04 40 QO3UDCPU 2 Supported versions The error history collection function can be used in the CPU module and GX Works2 with the following versions Item CPU module Version Universal model QCPU whose first five
2. T y4 Prp 0 Dp JP as d p Y Ue VP z 2 Q64TCTTBWN Lm 8 LIE ge Ei o Jt 416 NEM us V Q64TCTTN RUN ERR ALM 5 Unit mm Q64TCTTBWN a a EH BE LAL d VEA V Y V o a z g N a E AAA a s LN 2 E ZN V M 5 5 2 EN Unit mm APPENDICES Appendix 6 External Dimensions Unit mm ALM HBA ALM RUN ERR RUN ERR 27 4
3. lt slolelelolelalo slolele ololalo slolelolalolalolalojolo ojojo 141 i To the next page 1 y uSuM 9 G xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy uuo xipueddy weJBoid eouenbes e Buisn sBumies e 413 From the previous page 6 Set the pre recorded data to the buffer memory Modify Value 7 To back up the data in E PROM turn off and on Device Label Buffer Memory E PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the Jutjei2s 0 peste fe SSS buffer memory data to 2 OFF Switch ON OFF Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Close Execution Result Device Label Data _ Setting Value _ 0116125 0 Bit ON Reflect to Input Column Clear 8 Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt 359 CHAPTER 8 and fix the error If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off f Hardware error flag Xn3 is off 9 Because the new module is in the default status configure the initial settings using a sequence program after restarting the control Before configuring the initial settings check that the details on t
4. rm CHLI PID auto correction status 0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 f Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF uonouny esr einjejeduie snosueynwis OZ CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 71 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter d calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 ere i tcf en er Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF 249 c When Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 is turned off and on in the setting mode and the module is shifted to the operation mode After the module is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and PID constants are changed with auto tuning Temperature process value
5. Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Dividedinto oup oup rou XAMES 4 groups y l 0100 0011 0010 0001 25 25 25 25 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Example 2 4 0 2 1 Divided into Group 1 2 Group 3 Group 4 0100 0000 0010 0001 4 groups v CHi CH3 CH2 DE 25 25 25 25 CH1 CH2 CH4 Whether the transistor output is executed or not can be selected by CH3 Unused channel setting Un G125 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 100 In case of default value applied CH3 In Example 2 the maximum number of groups is four therefore timing is divided into four timing Because no channel is set for Group 3 no channel starts transistor output at the timing for Group 3 235 uonouny uoisseJddng Juano yeed 6 b Three timing The following table shows two examples Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 1 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 3 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Not divided The following shows the relationship between groups and the values of Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Exampe1 3 2 2 1 H Divided into roup roup roup 3 groups v 0011 0010 0010 0001 33 3 33 3 33 5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1
6. 164 Point When the heating cooling control expanded mode is selected heating cooling transistor output of CH3 and CH4 are activated Also when the mix control expanded mode is selected heating cooling transistor output of CH2 is activated These areas are activated only when an expanded mode is selected When a normal mode is selected these areas are used for the system If data is written into these areas when it is used by the system a write data error occurs error code 0002 The following is an example of using an expanded mode A program in which CH3 Heating transistor output flag bO of Un G23 is assigned to Y20 of an output module The start I O number of the Q64TCN is set to 10 in the following program example U1 G23 0 it v20 4 2 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Control Output Setting at CPU Stop Error When a stop error occurs on the CPU module or when CPU s status is changed from RUN to STOP whether to hold or clear the status of transistor output can be selected using this function Configure Output Setting at CPU Stop Error on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following Page 299 Section 6 2 Processing for each status is describes in the following table Status Processing Reference Output Setting at CPU Stop Page 299 CLEAR HOLD i Error Section 6 2 Setting of PID continuation flag
7. Monitor T est Select a module to be monitored tested Monitor Test window Nod Coral Stat VO Na 0090 arent valus value Curent vale Make toni fie Stop The Module model name is displayed as shown below For the Q64TCTTp Q64TCTT For the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRT For the Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCTTBW For the Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCRTBW 382 APPENDICES 2 GX Configurator TC functions The following table shows the functions of GX Configurator TC Function Description Configure the initial settings for each channel to operate the Q64TCN Set the data for items that require an initial setting e Heater disconnection compensation function CHO input range selection CHO set value SV setting CT monitor method switching CHO proportional band P setting x 0 1 CTLI channel assignment setting CHLI integral time I setting Unit s CTLI CT selection CHLI derivative time D setting Unit s CTLI reference heater current value CHLI control output period setting Unit s upper setting limiter CHLI control response parameter CHLI lower setting limiter CHLI stop mode setting CHLI forward reverse action setting PID continuation flag CHLI setting change rate limiter x 0 196 min CHLI alert 1 mode setting sensor compensati
8. 298 Module s detailed information 372 Monitoring the scaling value 192 Mount position 298 Moving averaging process to a temperature process value PV aai mi ie vae areas aov e 191 Multiple CPU 31 New 298 Normal mode 43 Normal sensor correction one point correction function iix ien dag doth pue Vased od 159 209 Number of accesses to non volatile memory 39 Number of alert delay 206 Number of alert delay Un G165 129 Number 1 16 Number of mountable modules 29 Number of parameters 43 Number of temperature input points 38 Offset ie Lope LEISURE ERE 25 Offset remaining deviation 173 174 ON delay 222 ON delay 92 Online module change 31 377 386 401 Online module change procedure of using GX Works2 401 Online module change procedure using GX Developer Miyata a BA due d Sakis uomen tea e aao bob ud 386 Operation at sensor input disconnection 38 Operation method and formula 23 Operation mode in operation 51 Op
9. Temperature process value PV Input from temperature sensor Temperature process CHO value PV Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Manipulated Transistor output value MV ON OFF pulse PID operation Manipulated CH value MV Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 Temperature Set value SV Initial setting Set value Set value SV I SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Device to be controlled To instruction 17 2 The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN based modules which possess an additional function to detect heater disconnection using input from external current sensors Programmable controller CPU Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Buffer memory Temperature f process value PV Input from temperature sensor Temperature CH1 CHO id value PV Temperature 0 process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 71 Manipulated Transistor output value MV ON OFF pulse CH1 operation Manipulated CHO 1 value MV Manipulated value 0 i MV i Un G13 to Un G16 CH4 7 Set value SV CH1 Current Temperature Initial Set value j setting Set value SV SV setting Devise tobe To instruction UniG34 Un G66 controlled
10. 34 GX 16 31 33 381 GX 16 31 378 387 GX 2 16 31 377 402 H W LED Information 373 H W switch information 373 Hardware error flag 51 363 ABA LED Gosek dac NIE RR NE 278 Heater disconnection compensation function Heater disconnection compensation function selection Un G170 ies ete bie eee 131 Heater disconnection detection 265 Heater disconnection detection specifications 39 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 130 Heating cooling 162 Heating cooling control expanded mode 163 164 Heating cooling control normal mode 163 High response mode 136 How to check error history 272 How to execute normal sensor correction one point correction when using GX Works2 210 How to execute normal sensor correction one point correction when using the program 212 How to execute sensor two point correction when using GXWorks2 ye Ra 214 How to execute sensor two point correction when using the program god eee eg Rust 218 I O 378 I O occupied points
11. r 2 Remove the module Start the online module change using GX Developer Operation of the Q64TCN Operation of the CPU module The module is normally operating The operation of the module has stopped The RUN LED turns off XIY refresh FROM TO instructions Device test GX Configurator TC Monitor setting E parameters es x Y Click the Cisa button on x x x x x GX Developer to enable t he module to be removed Y Remove the selected module Y 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The X Y refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation After mounting the module Module READY flag Xn0 Click on GX Developer gt stays off When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation y Click the _ button on GX Developer to turn off the online mode v On Device test on GX Developer or on Monitor Test on GX O x Configurator test the operation of v the module The module operates based on the test operation Operation check is completed Y 5 Restart
12. Moving averaging process be set to a temperature process value PV With this function the fluctuation of temperature process values PV can be reduced in electrically noisy environments or in the environments where temperature process values PV fluctuate greatly The moving averaging process can be disabled to hasten the response to the change of temperature process values PV 1 Setting method Configure the settings as below 1 SetEnable 0 to Moving Averaging Process Setting in the intelligent function module switch setting to use the moving averaging process Set Disable 1 to Moving Averaging Process Setting in the intelligent function module switch setting when not using the moving averaging process For details on the setting method refer to the following Page 299 Section 6 2 2 Setthe number of moving averaging to Number of moving averaging Un G698 to Un1G701 Buffer memory Buffer memory address Setting range Reference area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 153 Number of moving 2 to 10 times Un G698 Un G699 Un G700 Un G701 Section 3 4 2 averaging Default value 2 78 Point When Disable 1 is set to Moving Averaging Process Setting in the intelligent function module switch setting the set value Number of moving averaging Un G698 to Un1G701 is ignored When Enable 0 is set to Moving Averaging Process Set
13. Switch the module to the setting mode turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 lt gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 Set CHO Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 to Monitor 1 lt gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 Set Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 to Latch request 1 lt gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 64 Set Sensor correction function selection Un G785 to Sensor two point correction 1H gt Page 159 Section 3 4 2 87 Check that CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion Un G551 Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 is Latch completed 1 3 gt Page 145 Section 3 4 2 65 Enter a correction offset value Set Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 to No request 0 lt gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 64 Set a temperature process value PV in CHO Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 c Page 142 Section 3 4 2 59 Turn on Setting change instruction YnB lt gt Page 58 Section 3 3 3 6 Set Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 to Latch request 1 lt gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 62 Check that Setting change completion flag XnB is on lt
14. Setting item Reference Temperature rise completion soak time setting Page 131 Section 3 4 2 42 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Page 132 Section 3 4 2 45 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Page 134 Section 3 4 2 48 CT monitor method switching Page 132 Section 3 4 2 46 CTLI CT input channel assignment setting Page 139 Section 3 4 2 54 CTLI CT selection Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 CTLI Reference heater current value Page 141 Section 3 4 2 56 CTLI CT Ratio setting Page 141 Section 3 4 2 57 4 When using CH2 to CH4 follow the step 3 described earlier 302 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS 6 4 Auto Refresh Buffer memory data can be transferred to specified devices using this function By using this auto refresh setting reading or writing is not required on a program For the Q64TCN number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by changing the normal mode to the setting item reduction mode 1 Setting item reduction mode In the setting item reduction mode setting items can be grouped so that the device setting is required only for the start item of the group and the number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be saved compared with the normal mode For the number of parameters of the auto refresh setting refer to the following K gt Page 44 Section 3 1 3 2 a GX Works2 version supporting this function GX Works
15. 190 4 10 Moving Averaging Process to a Temperature Process Value 191 4 11 Temperature Process Value PV Scaling Function 192 4 12 Alert FUNGON cere Pese ORE needed Le PR Le es eS eee 194 4 13 RFBLimiter Function aaaea aaaea aeaaea m n 208 4 14 Sensor Correction Function 209 4 15 Auto setting at Input Range Change 220 4 16 Input output with Another Analog Module Function 221 4 17 ON Delay Output n 222 4 18 Self tuning rn 223 4 19 Peak Current Suppression eh 233 4 20 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 238 4 21 Forward Reverse Action Selection Function l i 252 4 22 Loop Disconnection Detection Function ee 253 4 23 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function 255 4 24 Proportional Band Setting Function 257 4 25 Cooling Method Setting Function 00 0 0 ccc cette 258 4 26 Overlap Dead Band n 259 4 27 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused
16. 306 Programming 16 Proportional action 106 Proportional action 25 Proportional band 5 257 Proportional gain 25 106 QOATCN ccc eke a ele Sea eo EVE 16 Q64TCRTBWN 16 417 4 nue 16 417 Q64TCTTBWN 2 eee eee 16 416 QOATCTTN co ee ke a eee ts 16 416 QG PU ous i defecerit tien Be ital Pel ceo i atin 16 R1 25 9 hohe Bale bas Nae 276 RAMP ACON nies tex enn ate ee 16 Rating 34 Redundant CPU 16 33 387 Resol tion Awa 40 96 101 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un G181 134 Restrictions when changing modules or applying a sequence 377 Reverse 24 252 REB Limiter be es GAs 208 RUN LED ee Be 278 361 Sampling cycle 38 42 297 Selftuning 3 ee he A ER REA 223 Self tuning disable status 147 Self tuning error 2 222200 a ia a E a 148 Sensor correction 209 Sensor correction function selection UnG785 159 Sensor correction value setting 38 Sensor two point correction function
17. Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN 86 22 86 an 3 Q64TCRTN 90 nn 4 Q64TCRTBWN 417 Unit mm 50 8 55 2 22 90 q INDEX 2 od vsus dia ale cua a eee eve di 38 Adjustment after auto tuning 187 Air cooled 1220 Que dens 151 258 Alarm code 5 370 Alatim priorities sier ES 371 HEP 194 Alert dead 205 Alert dead band setting Un G164 129 Alert mode and settings 207 Alert mode and the set value SV to be referred 199 Alert with 5 200 Alert with standby second time 201 Algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete d
18. b When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode The following operation is performed The manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation is transferred to MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 For preventing a rapid change of the manipulated value MV When the shift to the MAN mode is completed bits of the corresponding channel of MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 are set to MAN mode shift completed 1 AUTO MAN mode AUTO mode ex MAN mode X AUTO mode 1 AUTO MAN mode switching E 1 pi 1 Un G5O Un G82 UniG114 Un G146 UTO 0 MAN 1 X 1 Man mode shift completion flag MAN mode shift lt A MAN mode shift MAN mode shift Un G30 uncompleted 0 completed 1 uncompleted 0 Executed by the Q64TCN Point Set the manipulated value MV in MAN mode after confirming completion of the mode shift c When performing auto tuning Set to AUTO 0 If MAN 1 is set the auto tuning is not performed d Default value The default values are set to AUTO 0 in all channels 117 Jejnq ey jo siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 118 27 MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 8 This buffer memory area is used for setting the manipulated value MV in the MAN mode a How to shift the mode Shift the mode by the following buffer memory area AUTO MAN mode shift
19. Time 2 Data collection lt Temperature Auto tuning in execution control ON Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF Ss a CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Executed a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN The time takes for auto tuning depends on the control subject 176 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning Auto tuning can be executed when the following data are set Note that other data must be preset to the values used for actual operation since actual control starts on completion of auto tuning When 0 is set to the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph auto tuning is not executed gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 P
20. _ ZP REMTO Ki H1 H26 D5 Ki M210 K1 gt 7 K3 K1 H1 H22 D6 Ki M212 K2 gt ZP REMTO J K3 K1 H1 H37 D7 Ki M214 2 2ZzPREMTO Ki Hi H38 D8 Ki M216 F Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM if the auto tuning is normally completed The auto tuning is stopped when an alert is detected LZ REMFR 1 K4 K1 H1 H5 D55 K1 M316 X21 X1010 X1013 X1011 t i a A Yi014 1 CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON X1014 1010 1014 055 8 E 1 At RST Y1014 CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF JON uo ejnpo Burst ueuw SET Mio CH1 Auto tuning completion flag ON lt 1018 E PROM backup instruction ON 1 H RST Y1018 E7PROM backup instruction OFF 4 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag OFF an T9 1014 X1014 1 RST Y1014 CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF 357 358 Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM CH1 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Requested Read E PROM s PID constants read write completion flag to D10 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Not
21. 262 4 28 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 265 4 29 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function 269 4 30 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 270 4 31 Error History FUNCION xu tor netk debebis bru 272 4 32 Module Error History Collection 274 4 33 Error Clear Function i sel pene eve RERUM E a p 275 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 276 5 1 Handling Preca ltioris eres set eere epi x s LE DR Na RU S SACO 276 5 2 Settings and the Procedure before Operation 277 5 37 Names ree dud dle EC Ein 278 5 4 Airline Deus ec Solet e el Ht etr tcs ce nf e a m hate ada onte ua 287 5 44 Wiring precautlons de m HERE rl ees eret P Ee d 287 5 4 2 External Wiring erc date TE EAR Aie RA 288 5 4 3 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three phase heater 296 5 5 Unused Channel Setting 2 297 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS 298 6 1 Addition of Mod les be S RE RE RE P imet n etae FERAE 298 6 2 SwitchiSettingss cos ex RI best x e en died x 299 11 6 3 Parameter Setting eiiis mn 300 644 Auto Refreshiz
22. 4 Internal circuit 7 ca Internal circuit Internal circuit T E Internal circuit Heating Cooling 1 A n em A Filter b CH1 b Controlled a Internal object 1 4 4 7 H2A 7 Filter m 2 H2b 1 Use the shielded cable 9 tS 293 4 Q64TCRTBWN a In the standard control 0 Q64TCRTBWN L1 Internal L2 circuit L4 Le Internal circuit Mies P Current sensor COM C x 24 A Filter b ATI chib ae CH2 Filter 9 Internal CH2 B I circuit 1 CH2 b Iot EH4A Fiter Yo 4 H4 b Connector Connector 1 cH CT1 L CT2 CT2 CT input circuit C CT8 CT8 4 Use the shielded cable Point setting Un G264 To use the heater disconnection
23. However values are output in the range of 0 to 100 For 0 or less and 100 or more refer to the following For 0 or less 096 For 10096 or more 10096 89 Jejnq ey siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 90 a Manipulated value MV and control output cycle Manipulated value MV indicates ON time of Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 in percentage 5 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Manipulated value for heating MVh indicates ON time of Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 in percentage gt Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Manipulated value for cooling MVc indicates ON time of CHO Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 in percentage gt Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Ex When 600 60 0 is stored in CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 and the value of the buffer memory is set as shown in the following CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 30s ON time of transistor output Control output cycle setting s x Manipulated value MV 96 30 x 0 6 18 s ON time of transistor output is 18s Transistor output is pulse of ON for 18s OFF for 12s 18s 6096 on T 12s 40 Transistor output OFF CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 6 CHO Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 This flag is for check
24. Restart the control End 404 APPENDICES Appendix 5 5 when parameters were configured using GX Works2 1 Stopping operation Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device Device 10 v T C Set Value Reference Program Buffer Memory Module Start EZ i Address Display format Modify Value 2 id 22 82 50 1 details Open Save Do not display com 8 Device 10 20 30 v40 50 60 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25121521578 o e oj e e o o se 817165 0 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label Data Bit x ON E Switch ON OFF Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value B Bit OFF 19 Bit OFF 18 Bit OFF Y11 Bit OFF Reflect to Input Column Delete C Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch In Device Name enter and display the name of the CPU module device to be refreshed in the Q64TCN Select the following output signals and click Modify Value Turn off the output signals in the CPU module to turn off the following output signals in the Q
25. 131 Stop Continue Stop Continue 2 Un G169 Section 3 4 2 43 Q64TCN Page 367 Section Follow the operation of when an error occurs Write data error 8 6 Q64TCN Depends on the symptom of the hardware Hardware error Error Stops the CPU Stops the operation and turns off Follows the stop operation and Stop error external output mode setting performs external output Stops the Stops the Follows the stop operation and Follows the stop operation and CPU RUN gt STOP 1 1 m i mode setting performs mode setting performs external output external output Resetting The module is incapable to operate and not performs external output 1 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 Important Fully pay attention to the setting of PID continuation flag Un G169 which controls external output By the failure of an output element or internal circuit an abnormal output may occur Construct a circuit to monitor output signals that could cause a serious accident 165 dojs Bumes 1ndino joguo 2 4 3 Control Method The following control methods can be applied by setting the proportional band P integral time and derivative time D e Two position control Page 166 Section 4 3 1 P control 7 Page 168 Section 4 3 2 Pl control Page 169 Section 4 3 3 PD control 7 gt P
26. 159 213 34 Serial number plate 279 Set value SV and the setting change rate limiter setting MPO EDT PUE EM 195 Set value SV setting 38 Setting change completion flag XnB 54 Setting change instruction YnB 58 Setting change rate limiter 299 Setting change rate limiter setting 160 190 Setting item reduction mode 43 303 Setting manipulated value MV in MAN mode 93 Setting mode after operation 51 Setting mode at 51 Setting of PID continuation flag UnG169 165 Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 54 56 Setting operation mode status Xn1 50 Settings and the procedure before operation 277 Simple two degree of freedom 22 188 Simple two degree of freedom PID control 188 Simultaneous temperature rise 238 Simultaneous temperature rise AT 242 Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status dans ed te aut A 146 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter 146 148 224 241 247 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction Statils t s eee Vet aut d eire ert 147 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status rr 148 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter s
27. amet 3 1 gt 1 3 1 CNN gt Ne t 3 2 2 rem 1 4 2 2 m 4 Q ME NR AGE TERE 4 v n E 7 m an S id fa Eam 8 F 8 8 5 Number Name Description RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the Q64TCN On Operating normally 1 The watchdog timer error has occurred Off Online module change enabled CPU stop error has occurred when all channels are set to CLEAR on Switch Setting ERR LED Indicates the error status of the Q64TCN On Hardware fault Including no connection of a cold junction temperature compensation resistor x Flashing Write data error is occurring 2 Off Operating normally ALM LED Indicates the alert status of the Q64TCN On Alert is occurring 3 Temperature process value PV came out of temperature measurement range Flashing Loop disconnection was detected Temperature sensor is not connected Off Alert is not occurring HBA LED Indicates the heater disconnection detection status or the output off time current error status of the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN Either of the following is detected 4 On Heater disconnection Output off time current error Neither of the following is detected Off Heater disconnection Output off time current error 5 Terminal block for 1 0 Used for temperature sensor input and transistor output 6 Terminal block for CT Used for current sensor CT input 7 Cold junction temperature Used
28. 364 When the temperature process value PV is abnormal costs RUN Erde doa LE td t et 366 Witing 2 R ponetur mes 287 288 Within range 198 Write data error code Un GO 86 Write error flag 2 51 363 423 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date July 2011 SH NA 080989ENG A First edition August 2014 SH NA 080989ENG B Revision due to the following changes of the setting method when using CTL 12 S36 10 or CTL 12 S56 10 as a current sensor CT addition of the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh additional function of moving averaging process to a temperature process value PV GX Works2 function to support Process CPU and Redundant CPU addition of the during AT loop disconnection detection function changes of the parameter setting window of GX Works2 Japanese manual version SH 080988 F This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 424 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Grati
29. 67 1811 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM 1 eating T 1 wri decimal current Standard 7 E trei value Write setting b Reference Ix ntr i ili hexadecimal control cooing coniro T 12 availability sensor control 4 CT Page 120 149 95 CH4 AT bias AT AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Page 121 F d F 150 96 CH4 ds poi 1 R W x Section 9 7 3 4 2 30 1300 imi Upper limit U limit TT magn Jue 00 o o setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 Page 122 RT Section L limit Lower limit L limit PaL Seen 152 98 ower imn iid imit 2000 RW o o setting limiter setting limiter 9 setting limiter 5 RT 153 99 CHA System area Heat Heater lis x Heater Page 123 i disconnection 154 9 CH4 disconnection alert disconnection 0 R W x Section alert setting 1 setting alert setting 3 4 2 32 L L Page 124 155 9Bp CH4 System area 480 R W x Section detection detection 34 2 33 judgment time judgment time DE L L PEU po m Fa UN 156 9C CH4 System area 0 R W Section detection dead detection dead 342 34 band band 2134 Unused Page 126 3 setting 9 9 3 4 2 35
30. APPENDICES 3 Click Close to close the System Monitor window 4 Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt 359 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off 1 Open the Online module change window again pe Diagnostics gt Online module change 2 When the window appears click to restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns on 3 The online module change is complete 395 Dunes eniui y JO SEM 91 soyesnByuoy X95 USUM GLP xipueddy X9 ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy Appendix 46 Whena sequence program was used for the initial setting 1 Stopping operation 1 Open the Device test window Device test r Bit device Online gt Debug gt Device test Device 1B X 2 Turn off the following output signals to stop the FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force operation of the module OAT Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Device x A E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 C Buffer memory Module start 1 0 j Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB Setting value pec xl 16 bit integer Program Label reference pr
31. Lower limit setting limiter Page 122 Section 3 4 2 31 Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 Sensor correction value setting Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 Number of moving averaging Page 151 Section 3 4 2 72 Primary delay digital filter setting Page 115 Section 3 4 2 24 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output limiter Lower limit output limiter Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Output variation limiter Page 112 Section 3 4 2 20 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Page 113 Section 3 4 2 22 Self tuning setting Page 146 Section 3 4 2 68 Temperature conversion setting Page 150 Section 3 4 2 71 Cooling method setting Page 151 Section 3 4 2 73 Cooling upper limit output limiter Cooling control output cycle setting Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Overlap dead band setting Page 152 Section 3 4 2 74 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Page 152 Section 3 4 2 76 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Process value PV scaling upper limit value Page 153 Section 3 4 2 77 Derivative action selection Page 153 Section 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Page 154 Section 3 4 2 80
32. Page 397 Appendix 4 6 2 Mount diii When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC Sd goes lt gt Page 394 Appendix 4 5 3 When initial settings are set on a sequence program L3 Page 398 Appendix 4 6 3 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC gt Page 394 Appendix 4 5 4 When initial settings are set on a sequence program L gt Page 398 Appendix 4 6 4 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC C gt Page 395 Appendix 4 5 5 When initial settings are set on a sequence program 3 Page 400 Appendix 4 6 5 Check the operation seinpeooJd p xipueddy 1edoje eq ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy xipueddy Restart the control 391 Appendix 4 5 When GX Configurator TC was used for the initial setting 1 Stopping operation Device test r Bit device X Word device buffer memory Device bad Buffer memory Module start 0 v Hey Addres Device Close Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Setting value m Program Label reference program Y Execution history Force OFF Force OFF Force OFF Force OFF DEC 16 bit integer Open the Device test window O Online gt Debug gt Device test Turn off the following output signals to stop the operation of the module Setting op
33. Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste Q CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the
34. System area System area 480 R W x Section judgment time pu M iod 92 5Cy CH2 System area System area 0 R W Section detection dead 3 4 2 34 band ii Unused Page 126 9 setting 3 4 2 35 E2PROM s PID E2PROM sPID E7PROM sPID Page 127 94 5 CH2 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction instruction 3 4 2 36 64 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal unen Standard g e value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling e A 3 availability sensor control Aut Automatic Automatic eee backup setting backup setting Page 128 95 5F 4 CH2 Wi P bins after auto after auto 0 R W x x Section i tuning of PID of PID Gonsiants tuning of PID 9 3 4 2 37 constants constants 7 Z TT Page 96 96 60 CH3 Input range 7 RT R W x O Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 103 St d Stop mode St d 97 61 CH3 PP RUE P x dd dos 1 R W x Section setting setting setting 3 42 13 Page 104 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 98 62 CH3 ies eet valle SV 0 R W Section setting setting setting 3 42 14 Heating Proportional proportional Proportional Page 105 99
35. compensation gain value stored as the address where the compensation value error occurred An alarm has occurred OOOA Refer to the alarm code list gt Page 370 Section 8 7 The set value cannot be changed Set value discrepancy error ilih The current control mode and the i 5 001E control mode backed up in the Br E Turn the EPROM backup instruction The buffer memory data reverts to Yn8 OFF ON gt OFF E PROM are different due to the M the default value for the selected change of the control mode selection control mode Values set in the intelligent function The RUN LED turns off the ERR Setthe correct values on the intelligent 000F module switch setting are those LED turns on and the module does function module switch setting outside the setting range not operate 1 The address where the error occurred is stored in DOO Buffer memory addresses are written in decimal Intelligent function module device UnXGL1 in this manual Read the stored value as a decimal value and refer to the buffer memory list 7 2 59 Section 3 4 1 2 The buffer memory areas checked are Un GO to Un G287 No error occurs for writes in the system area in or after Un G288 9 For the writable area in setting mode refer to the buffer memory list 59 Section 3 4 1 4 In the operation mode refers to one of the following states When Setting operation m
36. 2 2 AR Oo a AR O 4 W o AR 4 O 2 2 a 377 When Using GX Developer and GX Configurator TC This section describes how to configure the setting using GX Developer and GX Configurator TC 1 Applicable software version For the applicable software versions refer to the following Page 31 Section 2 1 4 Appendix 3 1 GX Developer operation Configure the setting on the following windows when using GX Developer Window name Application Reference Set the type of a module to be connected and the range of I O assignment sianal Page 378 Appendix 3 1 1 signal Intelligent function module Configure the switch setting of the intelligent function module Page 379 Appendix 3 1 2 Switch setting 1 assignment Configure the setting on I O assignment in PLC Parameter Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O assignment parameter setting PLC name Puc system Puc file PLC 5 1 PLC RAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment so Twe Modelname Points stee 4 F Switch setting 16points E Detailed setting Lsja2 afea Ls es 6 55 Assigning the 10 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not ca
37. 338 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set the method for the cooling Cooling method satin control in the heating cooling 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled i 9 control Cooling control Set the pulse cycle ON OFF 30s 05 305 305 output cycle setting cycle of the transistor output Overlap dead band Configure the overlap dead 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 setting band setting 1 Upper Limit Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert set value 1 CHO Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to 250 C 0 0 C 0 C Un G8 turns on 339 y Buiuuoued ueuM z 7 5 pyepueis e ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh 5 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh BEE Display Filter Display All m Item Fransfer fo CPU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh Transistor output Flag Heating side transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh For another analog module outpu
38. 5 Page 299 Section 6 2 b Change rate setting For batch setting and individual setting different buffer memory areas are assigned The following is the buffer memory areas for each option AXE Buffer memory address Batch individual Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Batch CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Individual Setting change rate limiter temperature dr p Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 For details on the buffer memory areas above refer to the following C gt Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 c Time unit setting Set the time unit of the setting change rate limiter in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 Page 157 Section 3 4 2 85 Ex Operation of when individual setting is selected on Switch Setting CHLI Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Temperature process _ Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 value PV Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 Set value Set value SV 3 Set value SV 1 i Time f 1 minute Default value of CHO Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 190 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 10 Moving Averaging Process to a Temperature Process Value PV
39. Auto tuning instruction ON CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH1 Auto tuning completion fl ag ON CH2 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH2 Auto tuning completion fl CH3 Auto tuning completion fl ag ON CH3 Auto tuning instruction OFF ag ON Auto tuning instruction OFF Auto tuning completion fl ag ON E PROM backup instruction ON E PROM backup instruction OFF Auto tuning completion flag OFF CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH2 Auto tuning instruction OFF J CH3 Auto tuning instruction OFF Auto tuning instruction OFF This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used gt Page 328 Section 7 2 2 6 f Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV X10 FROM Ui HO D50 MOV D50 x22 _ sET Y12 X12 MM D50 1 RST X10 X11 FROM Ut H9 D51 K1 K4Y60 Y12 Y12 Read a write data error code to D50 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F j Error reset instruction ON Error reset instruction OFF PV to D51 to D54 Read Temperature process value 331 uomnouni esu snoeuejnuuis uoisseJddns uano xeed pjepueis ZZ uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui Buis ueuM 332 c Program
40. CH2 0 CLEAR CH3 0 CLEAR CH4 D CLEAR Control Mode Selection O Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter D Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting bi Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable Moving Averaging Process Setting is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value cm Item Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable 5 Contents of the initial setting CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple K Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 250 C 300 C 350 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 0 Used
41. Resi Monitor 4 resist 14 CH CT input 7 IN4 4 CH4 A pe A liu Sd thermometer A thermometer A CT CH3 Resi Monitor 3 resist 15 cw CT input 7 IN3 B3 CH3 B y Ac oon thermometer B thermometer B CH4 Resi Monitor 4 resist 16 CT8 CT input 8 IN4 B4 CH4 B ps MT4B thermometer thermometer CT8 CH3 Resi Monitor 3 resist 17 CT8 CT input 8 IN3 b3 CH3 b MT3b oe thermometer b thermometer b CH4 Resi Monitor 4 resist 18 NC NC Unused IN4 b4 CH4 b 4 thermometer b thermometer b 285 SOWEN Wed E G Terminal block for I O Terminal Heating cooling control 9 9 Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode number Indication expanded mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 1 CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L2H CH2 Heating output L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L2C CH2 Cooling output L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 tj COM Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 A1 CH1 A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance hermometer A hermometer A thermometer A 8 IN2 A2 CH2A CH2 Resistance MT2A Monitor 2 resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance hermometer A hermometer A thermometer A 9 IN1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B
42. Set value SV Temperature rise start Group 1 Group 2 Time arrival point Setting operation OFF i mode instruction Yn1 2 CH1 Simultaneous temperature E rise status Un G734 1 and CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise status UnG750 1 t 1 1 D 1 i 1 1 t 1 i i arrival point i i 1 T 1 i 1 1 L 1 D 1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G766 1 and CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G782 1 1 They become Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 when the temperature rise starts however they become Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 before the temperature rise starts When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned on and off during simultaneous temperature rise the control is stopped In addition Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 changes from Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 An error does not occur When the simultaneous temperature rise function is executed the setting change rate limiter cannot be used gt Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 240 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise function The simultaneous temperature rise function can be executed when all the following conditions are satisfied
43. When the control is started When the set value SV is larger than the temperature process value PV When the standard control is selected on Switch Setting not executed in the heating cooling control Ls Page 299 Section 6 2 When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been determined or has been set and is not 0 the default value When the following buffer memory area setting is less than 100 reaching time may vary Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 7 s Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 3 Setting method dividing channels into groups Set the groups in the following buffer memory area Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 gt Page 154 Section 3 4 2 80 4 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is classified into the following two buffer memory values Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 81 gradient data Simultaneous temperature rise Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Page 155 Section 3 4 2 82 dead time Before executing the simultaneous temperature rise function the simultaneous temperature rise parameter needs to be automatically calculated or arbitrarily set a Automatic calculation T
44. ho NOTE mcdio Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q Main base unit of Extension base unit Q64TCRTN 64TCRTBWN remote I O station of remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G TET QJ72LP25GE P P O QJ72BR15 Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit The Basic model QCPU or C Controller module cannot configure the MELSECNET remote I O net 30 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 For multiple CPU system The function version of the first released Q64TCN is C and the Q64TCN supports multiple CPU systems When using the Q64TCN in a multiple CPU system refer to the following 1 QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters to only the control CPU of the Q64TCN 3 For online module change The function version of the first released Q64TCN is C and the Q64TCN supports online module change For details refer to the following For GX Developer gt 386 Appendix 4 e For GX Works2 Page 401 Appendix 5 4 Applicable software packages The following table lists relation between the system including the Q64TCN and software package A programming tool is required to use the Q64TCN Item Software version GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator TC Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system Multiple C
45. 296 Three position control 261 Tightening torque 276 To clear the disconnection detection status 268 To forcibly start up self tuning 232 Transistor 39 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 175 92 132 Troubleshooting 359 Troubleshooting by symptom 366 Troubleshooting 359 Two position control 105 111 112 166 PY Peyote tes ue oe ee ee ek sata 378 Type of usable temperature sensors 40 U Unused channel 53 262 Unused channel setting 297 Upper limit deviation alert 196 Upper lower limit deviation alert 197 V Vibration ST os eek ERES ESI 146 224 Watchdog 50 Water 151 258 Weight 3 2 ha oa d diee ate 39 When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode 117 When E PROM write failure flag XnA is on 364 When measured value exceeds temperature measurement 89 When measured value falls below temperature measurement 89 When the auto tuning does not complete 364 When the auto tuning does not start 363 When the self tuning does not start
46. AT simultaneous OFF i temperature rise parameter calculation flag l Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 1 OFF 1 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS d When auto tuning is started with the temperature process value PV within the stable judgment width 1 C F after the setting mode is changed to the operation mode Until the temperature process value PV goes outside the stable judgment width 1 C F the data measured after the module is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on can be used Therefore the simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be calculated with auto tuning Temperature Auto tuning waveform process value PV Maximum gradient Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start m temperature rise i i AT start ON Setting operation mode status i OFF CHO Auto tuning status 4 OFF CHLIPID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 uonouny esr einjeJeduie snosueynwis Oz CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Self tuning er
47. The following table lists the differences between auto tuning and self tuning Item PID constants calculation Auto tuning The manipulated value MV is turned on off and PID constants are calculated based on the hunting cycle and amplitude of the temperature process value PV for the set value SV Self tuning PID constants are calculated based on an oscillation occurred under situations such as after the control has been just started the set value SV has been changed and when a control response is oscillatory Execution method Control response Turning off and on CHLI Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 starts auto tuning and changes PID constants upon completion PID constants are calculated based on the control response of when the manipulated value MV is turned on off therefore the control may become unstable The Q64TCN constantly monitors the control response PID constants are calculated and changed when the control response is slow PID constants are calculated based on the control response during temperature control therefore the control is stable Calculation result The optimum PID constants are calculated by one tuning In the standard control Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 UnG 123 Un G155 is also calculated The optimum PID constants may not be obtained by one tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un
48. When the alert judgment requires the value in Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 set one of the following values Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 15 Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV 16 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV B 17 Upper lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV S 18 Within range alert using the set value SV d 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV z 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 7 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 199 3 Alert with standby Even if the temperature process value PV or deviation E is in a condition to be in an alert status when the module s status is changed from the setting mode to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 OFF gt ON the alert does not occur The alert function can be disabled until the temperature process value PV or deviation E strays out of the condition to be in an alert status Ex When the alert mode i
49. 24 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Common The temperature process values PV are smoothed and sudden changes are absorbed by using the primary delay digital filter Temperature When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature When the primary delay process digital filter is set Time The time for the temperature process value PV to change by 63 396 can be set by the primary delay digital filter setting filter setting time Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Temperature process value PV When the primary delay digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature process value PV Yo When the primary delay 5 digital filter is set ao p o 8 1 Time 9 lt i gt con 32 22 33 o 3 2 o lt a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 100 1s to 100s When 0 is set the primary delay digital filter processing is not performed b Default value The default values are set to 0 primary delay digital filter processing disabled in all channels 115 25 CHO Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 QB In the simple two degree of freedom PID control select the response speed to the change of the set value SV from the following three levels S
50. 39 Indication accuracy 38 Inputalert i Eua 194 Iriput filter 2o Maca oui 38 Input impedance 38 Inp t ranges 304 4500 de eget 96 Input 5 0 48 Inp tsighials 2 54 2 aa aE 50 Input output with another analog module 221 Insulation 39 Insulation resistance 39 Integral action 1 26 Intelligent function module switch setting 379 Internal current consumption 39 Latest address of error history Un G1279 161 Linear mess tuse Rud eds aUe 151 258 Loop disconnection detection 253 Lower limit deviation alert 197 MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 93 118 Manipulated value MV and control output cycle 90 Manual control 111 112 175 Manual reset function 166 173 MELSECNET H remote I O module 387 402 MELSECNET H remote I O station 30 Mix control expanded mode 163 164 Mix control normal 163 Modeliname 2 2 3 5 Sig cea ane 378 Module error history 274 Module fixing 276 Module READY flag 0 50 363 Module selection
51. Auto refresh setting Module information Module ype Temperature Control Module Start 170 No 0090 Setting Setting value CHT input range CH2 input range input range CHA input range Control parameter setting Control parameter setting Alert function setting Allert function setting ther setting Other setting Details Decimal input Setting range 1 143 Module model name Q64TCTT Module side wens Maas nea data eror code 1 1 gt CHT temperature process 1 1 gt CH2 temperature process value PV 1 1 gt CHS temperature process 1 1 gt CH4 temperature process value PV 1 1 gt CHT manipulated value MV 1 1 gt CH2 manipulated valuelMV 7 1 gt CH3 manipulated value MV 1 1 gt CHA maripueted 1 1 E s Make test file End setup Cancel Make text file End setup Cancel 381 uoneJedo 5 1 1 xc z xipueddy 21 10jenBiuo pue x9 ueuM xipueddy 1 Online Monitor Test Select monitor test module window Select monitor test module Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Module type 0090 Module model name Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name 0090 064
52. CH4 1 1 1 CH1 Disconnection Alarm detection CH4 Un G98 Un G130 i i 18 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Features Optimum temperature adjustment control PID control The Q64TCN performs temperature adjustment control automatically when the user simply sets PID constants necessary for PID operation proportional band P integral time 1 derivative time D and temperature set value SV No special instruction is necessary to perform PID control Using the auto tuning function or self tuning function enables the PID constants to be set automatically Complicated PID operational expressions to determine PID constants are not necessary Selection of control mode A control mode can be selected from the standard control heating or cooling heating cooling control heating and cooling or mix control combination of the standard control and heating cooling control Four loops on one module The maximum of four loops of temperature adjustment control can be performed simultaneously In addition loop control can be performed using analog modules on the base unit or the network input from an A D converter module or output to a D A converter module can be processed Simultaneous temperature rise of multiple loops Temperatures of multiple loops can be adjusted to simultaneously reach the set value of each temperatures are controlled evenly with
53. DATA ERR A write data error has occurred CHO RUN PID control is being run CHO ALM1 Alert 1 is on ALM2 Alert 2 is on CHO ALM3 0000 off Alert 3 is on CHO ALM4 000144 on Alert 4 is on CHO LBA A loop disconnection has been detected Either of the following has been detected the Q64TCTTBWN CHD HBA and Q64TCRTBWN only Heater disconnection Output off time current error H W ERR A hardware error has occurred b H W switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed Item Intelligent function module switch setting Value HOLD CLR Switch 1 Output setting at CPU stop error CTRL MODE Switch 2 Control mode selection Switch 3 Auto setting at input range change Setting change rate limiter Moving averaging process setting Refer to 7 gt Page 299 Section 6 2 SW3 513015 NOLVIO Y99490 H W Information Monitor Status Module Model Name IQ64TCTTBWN Product Information 130410000000000 C 1 Monitoring Display Format e HEX C DEC LED Information HIW SW Information Item Value Item Item Value Item value RUN 0001 HOLD CLR 0000 DATA ERR 0001 Hi ERR CTRL MODE 0003 1 RUN 0000 CH3 RUN Sw 0000 CH1 ALM1 0000 CH3 ALM1 0000 CH1 ALM2 0000 CH3 ALM2 0000 ALM3 0000 CH3 ALMS CH1 ALM4 0000 ALM4 CH1 LBA 0000 CH3 LBA CH1 HBA 0000 CH3 CH2 RUN 0000 CH4 RUN CH2 ALM1 0000 CH4 ALM1 CH2
54. ON CHO PID auto correction status 60 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 UnG67 OFF b Auto tuning is being executed Self tuning is not executed during the auto tuning no error occurs At the time of when auto tuning is completed self tuning is enabled c The lower limit output limiter value is lower than the manipulated value MV and the manipulated value MV is lower than the upper limit output limiter value when the temperature control is started and the set value SV is changed The starting ST does not start However self tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes oscillatory under the following setting CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Starting ST plus vibration ST 4 229 uonounj DuiunJles 81 d The temperature process value PV is not within the temperature measurement range Self tuning is not executed In addition Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON The value set Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 is not 0 7 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 20 Self tuning is not executed In addition Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON f CHO AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 is set to MAN 1 c gt Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 Self tuning is not execu
55. PLS MO J Flag 0 for setting value write ON E SET M1 Flag 1 for setting value write ON M X10 X13 y AF TO Ul H3D KO K J CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO Ut H5D K1 K J CH2 Unused channel setting Unused TO ul H7D K1 K J CH3 Unused channel setting Unused TO H9D K1 K J CH4 Unused channel setting Unused M2 X10 X13 _ 2 iN AME LAS TOP ui H20 K2 K CH1 Input range 2 CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Upper u1 K1 K input alert 4 CH1 Control output cycle Ul H2F K30 K 1 setting 30s l CH1 Self tuning setting Starting i ui Nose Ki K JST PID constants only 2 SET 1 J Setting change instruction ON M M2 X10 X13 Yi Y1B X1B t MF M RST YiB J Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X10 X13 X1B H TOP Ut H26 K250 K J CH1 Alert set value 1 250 C TOP Ul H22 K200 K J CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C TOP Ut H37 K400 K J CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 400 C TOP H38 K J CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 0 C RST M Flag 1 for setting value write OFF RST M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write OFF 1 Configure this setting only when the self tuning function is used uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM peas epoo 10119 pue se yons LZ 7 317 318
56. PV Setting operation mode status Xn1 CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 CHLI PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 250 Auto tuning waveform Maximum gradient Dead time Simultaneous temperature rise AT start Time 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ON i 1 1 i 1 OFF 1 ON i OFF x i ES rM M M C MM en i E 1 OFF i T 1 i 1 OFF i Self tuning flag T i Un G575 Un G607 1 i f Un G639 Un G671 i 1 i 1 1 OFF 1 i 1 i 1 OFF 1 a HH 1 I 1 ON
57. Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM if the auto tuning is normally completed The auto tuning is stopped when an alert is detected K1 Y14 Y14 M10 Y18 Y18 M10 Y14 K1 K4Y60 Y12 Y12 CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH1 Auto tuning completion flag ON E PROM backup instruction ON E PROM backup instruction OFF CH1 Auto tuning completion flag OFF CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF Read a write data error code to D50 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F Error reset instruction ON Error reset instruction OFF X10 FROM U1 H5 D55 X21 X10 X13 X11 LAS SET X14 X10 14 055 8 1 M RST SET M10 Y18 LAS SET Y18 X18 2 LRST RST D55 8 X10 Y14 X14 _ E L ERST Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used L gt Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV X10 FROM U1 HO D50 MOV D50 x22 SET Y12 X12 _ D50 HO 1 RST X10 X11 1 FROM U1 H9 D51 Program that changes the set values SV and the alert set value 1 Read CH1 Temperature process value PV to D51 This program is the same
58. Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 Open the Parameter window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter 2 Click Clear Value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 3 Setthe parameter V 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Mix Control Normal Mode Item E Basic setting Input range Set value SV setting Unused channel setting Control basic parameter setting Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation Flag i Control detail parameter setting Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop Set the temperature conversion system ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measurec Temperature Range D to Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 200 C O Used Set PID constants proportional band P integral time I derivative time D and temperature 3 0 3 0 2405 605 30s 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 Stop Set temperature me
59. Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Page 155 Section 3 4 2 83 Setting change rate limiter Unit time setting Page 157 Section 3 4 2 85 Peak current suppression control group setting Page 158 Section 3 4 2 86 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 Cold junction temperature compensation selection Page 135 Section 3 4 2 49 Alert 1 to 4 mode setting Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert set value 1 to 4 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert dead band setting Number of alert delay Page 129 Section 3 4 2 39 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 Loop disconnection detection dead band Page 125 Section 3 4 2 34 Heater disconnection alert setting Page 123 Section 3 4 2 32 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Page 129 Section 3 4 2 38 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 40 Heater disconnection compensation function selection Page 131 Section 3 4 2 44 AT Bias Page 120 Section 3 4 2 29 Auto tuning mode selection Page 136 Section 3 4 2 51 During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting Page 145 Section 3 4 2 66 Temperature rise completion range setting Page 130 Section 3 4 2 41 301 Bumes g9
60. Temperature process value PV Set value SV CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is set to 0 0 0 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 75 Manipulated value 100 Temperature process 0 value PV Set value SV lt Proportional band P 1 The actual output value is restricted within the output limiter range set Upper limit output limiter UnXG42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 2 The set value SV is in the center of the proportional band b Heating cooling control The manipulated value for heating MVh and the manipulated value for cooling MVc are both 0 in the following conditions Temperature process value PV Set value SV CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is set to 0 0 0 C gt Page 152 Section 3 4 2 75 Manipulated value Manipulated value 100 for heating MVh for cooling MVc Temperature process 0 qu value PV Set value SV 4 gt i Heating proportional Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc 1 The actual output value is restricted within the output limiter range set Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 and Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 5 110
61. Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do not run the ST 0 This flag is also set to 0 OFF when all disable conditions are released For disable conditions refer to gt 229 Section 4 18 6 This flag is set to 1 ON when the self b8 Self tuning disable status tuning cannot be performed 147 Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0 Bit Flag name ON OFF Simultaneous This flag is set to 1 ON when simultaneous b9 temperature rise temperature rise parameter cannot be parameter error status calculated by self tuning This flag is set to 1 ON when either of the following operation is performed during the self tuning 2 Set value SV setting change only during starting PID constants change Setting change rate limiter change Output limiter change Output variation limiter change This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the Control output cycle change following operation is performed Sensor correction change When the operation mode shifts to the setting Primary delay digital filter change mode by turning off from on Setting operation AUTO to MAN mode shift mode instruction Yn1 Forward reverse action shift When Unused channel setting This flag is also set to 1 ON in the following Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set cases to Unused 1 When 6000 seconds 1 hour 40 minutes When CHLI PID control forced sto
62. ZS410M X9 peunBijuoo usu G s xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy uuo xipueddy System Monitor Monitor Status From the previous page 4 Connection Channel List Stop Mentor pcm System Image p Mode System monitor Online module change Main Base Base Information List p Operation to Selected Module Main Base Man Base VO Adi 0010 0020 0030 0040 Shot pa Module Information List Main Base Base Module Base Model Name Extension Basel Extension Base2 Extension Bases Extension Based Extension Bases Extension Bases Extension Base Parameter 1 0 on lt ane 2 e Empty _ l Pont 0020 Empty l Pont 0030 l Pont 0040 Master PLC 408 Click Close to close the System Monitor window Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt 359 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off 5 Restarting control System Monitor 1 p Monitor Status Connection Channel List Se
63. manipulated value for heating MVh 0 100 uonouny pueg peeg dejie Q 9z Heating Temperature process value PV 0 Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling starts at 185 0 C Cooling 100 259 2 Dead band Dead band refers to the temperature area where neither heating control output nor cooling control output is performed When the temperature process value PV is stable within this area output is not performed for the slight change in the temperature resulting in energy saving Ex When buffer memory values are set as following CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CHO Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 2000 200 0 C CHO Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 25 2 5 200 0 C to 215 0 C is the area for dead band Full scale x Overlap setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 025 15 0 C The temperature where cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 215 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the higher temperature side of the set value SV produces a dead band area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Manipulated value ifor heating MVh 096 Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only manipulated value for cooling MVc 096 for cooling MVc 0 ma
64. 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation ee Stop 0 x Continue 1 ON Monitor 1 x Alert 2 1 For details refer to Page 50 Section 3 3 2 2 uongound ziv Even if the conditions above are satisfied when Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 alert judgment is not executed 7 5 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 6 Condition where Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off The condition where CHLI Alert occurrence flag turns off differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 L gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Stop 0 When the cause of the alert is resolved or when the system is shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on Condition where Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off Monitor 1 Alert 2 When the cause of the alert is resolved 203 7 Setting alert modes and alert set values Settings of the alert mode and alert set value are described below a Alert mode Set the alert mode Up to four modes can be set for each channel Set them in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 C
65. 02 Empty Empty Pont 0020 Empty Empty l Pomt 0030 04 Empty Empty l Pomt 0040 Legend Error Major Eror Moderate Error A Minor Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Online Module Change Operation Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Module 964 on pes Module Installation Completion Execution Installation Confirmation Module Control Restart Status Guidance he controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and utomatic refresh For the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton MELSOFT Application W Online module change completed APPENDICES Open the System Monitor window again Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Double click the changed module name 3 When the window appears click on 4 The online module change is complete restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns 415 eouenbes e Buisn jegu ay ueuM 9G xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy xipueddy Appendix 6 External Dimensions 1 Q64TCTTN
66. 26 2 Check the storage of MAN mode shift completed 1 into MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 gt Page 93 Section 3 4 2 10 3 Set the manipulated value MV in MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 1 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 27 4 The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control Standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 0 1 jenuey 175 4 6 Auto Tuning Function This function is designed for the Q64TCN to set the optimum PID constants automatically In auto tuning the PID constants are calculated according to the hunting cycle and amplitude generated by repeated overshoot and undershoot of the process value PV against the set value SV due to the on off action of control output 1 Auto tuning operation The Q64TCN operates as follows Operation of the Q64TCN 1 Starts auto tuning 2 Collects data from the point when the temperature process value PV reaches the set value SV after the first overshoot and undershoot 3 After data collection auto tuning ends when PID constants and loop disconnection detection judgment time are set Temperature process value PV The first overshoot and undershoot are ignored 3 End of auto tuning v Em Set value SV Temperature process value PV 1 Start of auto tuning b
67. 37 25 CH1 Derivative time D setting 60 R W x Section 3 4 2 17 38 26 CH1 Alert set value 1 0 R W 39 27 CH1 Alert set value 2 0 R W 108 Section 40 28 CH1 Alert set value 3 0 R W 3 4 2 18 41 29 CH1 Alert set value 4 0 R W O 61 JSI yu wu isse Jeynq NOLYT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal current Standard g Mix contro Value Write setting te Reference ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro a 5 availability sensor control e Heating upper Heating upper Upper limit de Ned 42 2A CH1 limit output 2Ap output limiter imi outpu limit output 1000 R W x 110 limiter limiter Section L limit 3 4 2 19 43 2By CH1 ower System area System area 0 R W x output limiter Page 112 44 2Cy CH1 Output variation limiter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 20 Page 113 45 20 CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 Page 113 46 2 CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 5 R W x Section 3 4 2 22 Control oumput Heating control Heating control Page 114 47 2Fy CH1 output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section cycle setting setting s
68. 6 Set Sensor Correction Value and click am T Click 57 MELSOFT Series Works2 8 Click NC NN MELSOFT Series GX Works2 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 11 Click 57 d Y To the next page 10 Click 9 Toback up the correction value in E2PROM click 211 uonounj uon2eJ0 JosueS From the previous page 4 Keyser 12 Click cose Close 13 Click MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Exit the sensor correction setting Are you sure you want to continue 14 To shift from the setting mode to the operation MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode mode click End The value set in Sensor correction value setting on the Parameter window of GX Works2 has a priority over the correction value obtained by step 8 if the initial settings are set on the Parameter window and the following operation is executed Turn off and on the power Reset the CPU module and cancel the reset To use the correction value obtained by step 8 after executing the above operation correct the value set in Sensor correction value setting on the Parameter window Before correcting the value check the operation temporarily following the contents obtained by step 8 For the setting in Parameter refer to the following gt Page 300 Section 6 3 0000000000000000000090000000000000000000000000000000000000000009 b How to execute
69. 8 3 Checks Using LEDs This section describes troubleshooting using LEDs 8 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off Check Item Action Check the power supply module Properly mount the module Is the power supply 5VDC supplied Add up the current consumption of the installed CPU module I O module Is the capacity of power supply module enough and intelligent function module to check whether power supply capacity is sufficient Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again Has a watchdog timer error occurred Replace the Q64TCN Refer to the online module change 386 Appendix 4 or Is module change enabled during an online module change 401 Appendix 5 and take corrective action Is the intelligent function module switch setting outside the Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value setting range within the setting range 8 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes 1 When turning on Check Item Action Is the intelligent function module switch setting outside the Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value setting range within the setting range Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor disconnected or loose The Q64TCTTN and Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor Q64TCTTBWN only 8 A h
70. CH2 17 CH3 22 CH4 19 The following table lists the result CHO Heater Difference between Difference between AA disconnection alert CHO Heater current Correction CHO Heater current and Disconnection setting Un G58 Un G90 and reference heater value reference heater current detected Un G122 Un G154 current value value after correction CH1 16 0 16 16 Not detected CH2 17 1 17 16 Not detected 80 16 CH3 22 6 22 16 Not detected CH4 19 3 19 16 Not detected In the table above the correction value is 16 Heater disconnection is detected based on the differences of 0 for CH1 1 for CH2 6 for CH3 and 3 for CH4 When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 none of the channels are regarded as disconnected b Restrictions When only one channel is used the heater disconnection compensation function does not work To use this function two channels or more need to be used When several channels are used with a heater on for one channel and heaters off for other channels the heater disconnection compensation function does not work Therefore disconnection may be detected even if there is no disconnection The heater disconnection alert correction value is 2096 at maximum When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 as shown in the two examples on gt 266 Section 4 2
71. CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section gradient data 3 4 2 81 Simultaneous Page 155 748 2 CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section dead time 3 4 2 82 Simult m Page 15 749 2EDy CH2 P System area System area 0 R W x Section AT mode 3 4 2 83 selection Simultaneous Page 156 750 2EE CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R x x Section status 3 4 2 84 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 157 751 2EFy CH2 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting time setting 9 3 4 2 85 Cooling Page 105 proportional 752 2F04 CH3 System area band Pc System area 30 R W x Section um 3 4 2 15 setting Cooling upper Page 110 753 2F 14 CH3 System area limit output System area 1000 R W x Section limiter 3 42 19 Cooling control Page 114 754 2F2 CH3 System area output cycle System area 30 R W x Section setting 9 3 4 2 23 Overlap dead Page 152 755 2F3y CH3 System area 6 System area 0 R W x Section band setting 3 4 2 74 Manual reset Page 152 mere oe eme fomo S seh 9 setting 3 4 2 75 Process value Process value Process value PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page 152 757 2F5y CH3 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 76 setting setting
72. CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Sees Se pS CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion 0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag ON Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un Gee9 OFF le cami ihe ete ime a eine iue 248 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS b When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculated with self tuning is effective Then PID constants are changed with auto tuning Temperature Auto tuning waveform T Maximum gradient Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start temperature rise AT start ON Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF
73. Configure the switch setting of the buit I O or inteligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 6 Set the folowing Error Time Output Mode Page 75 Section 7 1 7 panan Sunes 121 Ex shows setting operating examples LLLI shows reference manuals C shows reference pages panew Bumes ITZ Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules ex men 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment Tange of an input module is changed to 1000 to X100F gr details refer to the following ra IELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SPUNIT LAY ERR esihe intelligent function module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting 30 Section 42 2 The chapter of the current page is shown The section of the current page is shown Point Pshows notes that requires attention When an intelligent module is connected I O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window Remark shows useful information 73 1 The mouse operation example is provided below MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Uns
74. E PROM s PID E PROM sPID E2PROM s PID 127 158 9Ey CH4 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction instruction 3 4 2 36 Aona Automatic Automatic backup setting backup setting Page 128 backup setting 159 9 CH4 after autotuning after auto after auto 0 R W x x Section tuning of PID i of PID constants g ib tuning of PID 3 4 2 37 constants constants 160 A0 to System area 163 129 164 4 All CHs Alert dead band setting 5 R W x Section 3 4 2 38 Page 129 165 A54 All CHs Number of alert delay 0 R W x O Section 3 4 2 39 Heater disconnection output off time current error Page 130 166 A6 All CHs detection delay count 3 R W x Section 1 3 4 2 40 Page 130 167 7 All CHs Temperature rise completion range setting 1 R W x Section 3 4 2 41 Page 131 168 A8 All CHs Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 42 68 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal durent Standard E Mi value Write setting 7 IX contr i ili hexadecimal cooling e A 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Page 131 169 9 All CHs PID continuation flag 0 R W x Section 3 4
75. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller E C M MELSEC Q Temperature Control Module User s Manual Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN SAFETY PRECAUTIONSO Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N CAUTION and N WARNING WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for monitor
76. MV Convert manipulated value MV obtained by the PID operation to transistor output on time and output it ueis s Cid ZL 21 3 PID control simple two degree of freedom The Q64TCN operates in simple two degree of freedom In this form of PID control parameters are simplified compared to the two degree of freedom PID control In the simple two degree of freedom the module controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also the control response parameter The parameter can be set to fast normal or slow This setting enables the form of response to the change of the set value SV to change maintaining response to the disturbance in a good condition gt 188 Section 4 7 Fast Normal Set value Set value SV SV Slow Response to the change Response to the disturbance of the set value SV The following explains the difference between the one degree of freedom PID control two degree of freedom PID control and simple two degree of freedom PID control a One degree of freedom PID control and two degree of freedom PID control General PID control is called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to improve response to the change of the set value SV are set response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants to improve response to the disturbance are set res
77. OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to No simultaneous temperature rise 0 in all channels 81 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un1G747 Un G763 Un G779 Set Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data temperature rising per minute For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following 5 Page 238 Section 4 20 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to full scale b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Point This setting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically Automatic calculation is performed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise parameter is set is normally completed CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 82 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un1G748 Un G764 Un G780 Set Simultaneous temperature rise dead time time taken for the temperature to start rising after the output is turned on For details
78. ON OFF status of transistor output ON delay output for heating are stored in Un G21 to Un G24 OFF 0 ON 1 b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 bO ojojojojojojo ojojojojojojo X v J v J Bit data from b15 to Bit data from b7 to b9 are fixed to 0 b1 are fixed to 0 Transistor output flag ON delay output flag a Relationship with ON delay output flag Relationship between Transistor output flag and ON delay output flag is shown in the following ON Transistor output flag Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 ON delay output flag Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 enables setting considering delay time response scan time delay of actual transistor output gt Page 132 Section 3 4 2 45 By monitoring the ON delay output flag and external output on the program disconnection of external output can be judged For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following gt Page 222 Section 4 17 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 8 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 QB Set value SV of each time unit set in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 is stored in this buffer memory area gt Page 157 Section 3 4 2 85 The set value SV can be monitored in real time 9 Cold junction temperature proc
79. Operation r Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution 64TCTTN Installation Module Confirmation Status Changing Module Module Control Restart Status Guidance cm can be exchanged lease press the next button after installing a new module Cancel 4 Checking operation MELSO Y Online Module Change r Operation Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Installation Module 64 Confirmation Status peice Module Installation Completion Module Control Restart Status Guidance he controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and j utomatic refresh For the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton Cancel FT Application The online module change is stopped Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again the next page 1 2 APPENDICES Mount a new module in the same slot and connect the external cable After the module i s mounted click 1 and check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 Tocheckthe operation click Cancel to cancel 2 the control start Click change mode to stop the Online module 407
80. Setting range 0 When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 1 When CTL 6 P H is used 0 00 to 20 00A 2 When CT ratio setting is used 0 0A to 100 0A c Current sensor CT to be used and buffer memory setting When using a current sensor CT other than CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P H set the number of second winding turns of the current sensor CT to be connected in CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un1G295 Set the buffer memory area as follows according to the specification of the current sensor CT to be used Current sensor CT to CTO CT Selection CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 Ner ote be used Un G272 to Un G279 L gt Page 141 Section 3 4 2 57 When CTL 12 S36 8 i d CTL 12 S36 8 dons Setting not necessary 0 0A to 100 0A 0 The product is discontinued When CTL 6 P H is used though it can be used CTL 6 P Sett t 0 00A to 20 00A 1 Pung Moreen Products of When CTL 6 P H i d en 6 P H is use U R D Co CTL 6 P H Setti t ips 9 0 00A to 20 00A 1 un Edd CTL 12 836 10 When CT ratio setting is used Set 1000 which is the number of second winding m 0 0A to 100 0A 2 turns CTL 12 856 10 When CT ratio setting is used Set 1000 which is the number of second winding _ 0 0A to 100 0 2 Current sensors CT whose Other current sensors When CT ratio setting is used Set the number of winding turns depending number of second wi
81. Standard mode The standard mode is appropriate for most controlled objects This mode is especially suitable for controlled objects that have an extremely slow response speed or can be affected by noise or disturbance However PID constants of slow response low gain may be calculated from controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is only around 10s In this case PID constants of fast response can be calculated by selecting the high response mode and performing the auto tuning High response mode This mode is suitable for controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is only around 10s PID constants of fast response high gain can be calculated However the temperature process value PV may oscillates near the set value SV because of the too high gain of the PID constants calculated In this case select the normal mode and perform the auto tuning For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 176 Section 4 6 a Setting range 0 Standard mode 1 High response mode b Default value The default values are set to Standard mode 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 52 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 QB Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 QB Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un
82. Stet TI Auto tuning stop top stop Stop c s Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed 5 Result of automatic backup of PID constant ES o The time between the start and completion of auto tu nds on the object ta be controlled o es i 5 4 To the next page 179 From the previous page 4 3 Configure the auto tuning setting Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time Auto tuning mode selection MELSOFT Series GX Works2 To the next page 180 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS From the previous page 4 Auto Tuning JAuto Tuning Setting Set value 5V setting AT bias Loop disconnection detection judgment time Auto tuning made selection Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants OFT Series GX Works2 8 Click the Auto Tuning Execution tab Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Setting _ Set value SV setting AT bias Loop disconnection detection judgment time ection To the next uonounJ 9p 181 From the previous page 4 9 Click stare of the channel where auto tuning is to be executed Auto Tuning Process value PV Set value 5V Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh value viral Cooling side proportional band Pc setting __Integral time 1 setting 000 Derivat
83. Un G56 Un G88 F digit Un G128 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 0 to 1700 1 1 1700 0 0 to 3000 se 1 105 3000 0 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 38 4000 2000 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 36 4000 0 0 to 1300 C 1 1300 0 0 to 500 1 11 500 0 K 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 40 5000 0 0 to 800 C 1 12 800 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 41 8000 0 0 to 1000 F 1 100 1000 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 130 10000 0 0 to 2400 F 1 101 2400 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 37 4000 0 0 to 500 C 1 13 500 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 42 5000 0 0 to 800 1 14 800 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 43 8000 0 J 0 to 1200 C 1 3 1200 0 0 to 1000 F 1 102 1000 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 131 10000 0 0 to 1600 F 1 103 1600 0 0 to 2100 F 1 104 2100 0 97 Jang ey syieieq jueuuuBissy Aowa yng t Auto setting at input range change Celsius Input range imi imi Thermocouple c MA d Diei measurement Resolution type fangs Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 F digit Un G128 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 200 to 400 C 1 4 400 200 200 to 200 C 1 21 200 200 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 39 4000 2000 0 to 200 C 1 19 200 0 T 0 to 400 C 1 20 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 45 4000 0 300 to 400 oF 1 110 400 300 0 to 700 F 1 109 700 0 0 0
84. Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 76 enable disable setting CHLI Process value PV scaling lower Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 limit value Page 153 Section 3 4 2 77 Process value PV scaling upper We Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 limit value Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 Page 153 Section 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous temperature rise Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 80 group setting Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 Page 157 Section 3 4 2 85 i Peak current suppression control group Un G784 Page 158 Section 3 4 2 86 setting Sensor correction function selection Un G785 Page 159 Section 3 4 2 87 56 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Error reset instruction Yn2 Use this signal to turn off Write error flag Xn2 and to reset Write data error code Un GO For the method to reset an error refer to Write error flag Xn2 7 s Page 51 Section 3 3 2 3 3 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 Use this signal to start auto tuning per channel Turning this signal on from off starts auto tuning and turns on Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 After auto tuning is completed Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off Keep this instruction ON during auto tuning and turn it off from on at the completion of the auto tuni
85. Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 gt Page 153 Section 3 4 2 78 uonouny Ad enjeA sseooug eumejeduie 193 4 1 2 Alert Function When the process value PV or deviation E reaches the value set in advance the system is set in an alert status Use this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices The alert function is classified into input alerts and deviation alerts depending on the setting of the alert mode Input alert upper limit input alert lower limit input alert 7 5 194 Section 4 12 1 Deviation alert upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation alert upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert 7 gt Page 195 Section 4 12 2 1 Input alert With the upper limit input alert when the process value PV is equal to or greater than the alert set value the System is put in an alert status With the lower limit input alert when the process value PV is equal to or less than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status Upper limit input alert Lower limit input alert Temperature process value PV A Alert set value gt Time Alert status Non alert status Alert status Temperature process value PV Alert set value Alert status A gt Time Non alert status Aler
86. for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 to set this Monitoring the scaling value The temperature process value PV after scaling processing is stored into the following buffer memory area Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 gt Page 153 Section 3 4 2 78 The calculation method of a scaling value is as follows Process value PV scaling value _ Sn S x Px Puin ee Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 Biaxe Piin L Px CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 Pmax A maximum value of CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Pmin A minimum value of CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 SH A maximum scaling value of process value PV Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 St A minimum scaling value of process value PV Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS a Calculation example A calculation example to scale the temperature process value PV into percentage is shown below Set the following buffer memory areas as below CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 Temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C Process value PV scaling lower limit value UnXG726 Un1G742 Un G758 Un G774 0 CHO Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 100 Suppose that 3600 360 0 C is stored in CHO Temperatu
87. i Click Detailed Information to open the Module s Detailed Detailed Information bj Information window Model Name Check the error description and the corrective Address 0010 eels EER action to take under Error and Solution Product Information 130410000000000 C Production Number When the error description cannot be confirmed Module Information Module Access Possible 7 pu after doing the operation above proceed with the Fuse Blown Statu m Sau Uo eine sary following troubleshooting Clear Hold Setting Nose Fer Setthg E e Checks using LEDs Page 361 Section 8 3 Input mnc r Sete et aed e Checks using input signals gt Page 363 Section Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History 8 4 ms Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the Clear Error History upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid Error Clear Error Code p Display Format G Solution Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value F 3 E E E 3 3 The error history is sequentially displayed from an old error The latest error is displayed at khe bottom line Stop Monitor 360 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
88. is reset to Use 0 Channels that do not control temperature or are not connected to temperature sensors needs to be set as unused channels again after settings of other buffer memory areas and non volatile memories return to the default values Set Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 to Unused 1 again 126 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 36 CHO E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 158 CE PID constants are read from E2PROM and stored in the buffer memory by using this instruction Setting this buffer memory area to Requested 1 stores the value backed up in the E PROM in the buffer memory a Buffer memory areas to store set value of E PROM The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose set value is read Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Proportional band P setting Un 35 Un 67 Un 99 Un 131 Heating proportional band Ph Un 35 Un 67 Un 99 UnM 31 setting Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 CHLI Cooling proportional band Pc Un 720 Un 736 Un 752 Un 768 setting Integral time 1 setting Un 36 Un 68 Un 100 Un 132 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un 37 Un 69 Un 101 Un 133 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un 59 Un 91 Un 123 Un G155 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time b Setting
89. 0 Used 0 Used Control output cycle setting 20s 20s 20s 20s Simultaneous temperature 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 rise group setting 1 Peak current suppression 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 control group setting 2 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection 1 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Simultaneous Temperature Rise Simultaneous Temperature Rise Simultaneous Temperature Rise Alert 1 mode setting 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 1 Upper Limit Input Alert Alert set value 1 250 C 300 C 350 C 400 C 1 Configure this setting only when the simultaneous temperature rise function is used 2 Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X12 Write error flag X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Error code Devices wh
90. 19 sejymeej 20 9 Detection of disconnection Heater disconnection can be detected easily by the loop disconnection detection function The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN can detect the disconnection of a heater accurately 10 Easy setting by GX Works2 Sequence program can be reduced by configuring the default setting or auto refresh setting on the screen Also the setting status or operating status of the module can be checked easily CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 The PID Control System 1 PID control system The following figure shows a system of when performing the PID control Q64TCN Set value SV Set value data storage area Manipulated value MV Manipulated value data storage area Temperature process value PV PID operation Control object Temperature process value data storage area ee ee Ae re NS TU D Ep I EE Temperature sensor 2 PID control procedure The PID control is performed in the following procedure Read the temperature process value PV Import a signal from the temperature sensor and write it to the temperature process value data storage area as a temperature process value PV Perform PID operation a a a Perform PID operation using the Set value SV temperature process value PV values in the set value temperature process value data storage area Output the manipulated value
91. 270 Calculation formula for heater disconnection compensation 266 Checking the completion of auto tuning 186 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 E Metu Siac Rae s Med NU eee 113 166 167 CHO Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 240 137 418 CHO Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 241 137 CHO Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 242 137 CHO Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 243 137 CHO Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 87 Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF 55 365 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 ik REDDE RR 108 Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 WMG 135 dees REALE 108 Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 WM G136 oie ee Rate ed 108 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 UnmnG1937 iste ee Render IR a et ees 108 CHO AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 UNG TAO wale ee alex 120 CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 ete qutm Ld 145 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 57 Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G
92. 3 4 2 30 1300 imi Upper limit imi TT 119 77 mee Upper limit pp Upper limit TT RIW 5 setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 Page 122 RT Section imi Lower limit imi ST SPD 120 78 CH3 Lower Tiri limit 2000 RW setting limiter setting limiter 6 setting limiter 5 RT 121 794 CH3 System area un __ m Heat Heater hi Heater Page 123 isconnection 122 7Ay CH3 disconnection alor disconnection 0 R W x Section alert setting 1 setting alert setting 3 4 2 32 Loop Loop Page 124 di ti di ti 123 7By CH3 System area 480 R W x Section detection detection 3 4 2 33 judgment time judgment time d Loop Loop Page 125 di fi di fi 124 7Cy CH3 eet onic System area 0 R W Section detection dead detection dead 34 2 34 band band as Unused Page 126 3 setting 9 3 4 2 35 E2PROM s PID E7PROM sPID E2PROM sPID Page 127 126 7E4 CH3 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction 9 instruction 3 4 2 36 A i Automatic Automatic UE backup setting backup setting Page 128 127 7 CH3 ia d idis g after auto after auto 0 RW x x Section tuning of PID i of PID constants g tuning of PID 3 4 2 37 constants constants 2 TT Page 96 128 80 CH4 Input range 7 RT R W x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 103 St d Stop mode St d 129814 UR e 1 RW x Section setting setting set
93. 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Data read from E2PROM Follow the instructions below Turn off and on the power or reset the CPU module and cancel the reset Set E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 to Requested 1 lt gt Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 Data to be read are the PID constants and loop disconnection detection judgment time for the corresponding channel only gt Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 4 Precaution when executing the set value backup function By executing this function data are transferred to the buffer memory when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled This transferred data can be overwritten by setting parameters on GX Works2 To use the set values stored as backup data of the initial settings of the module take either of following actions Do not set parameters on GX Works2 When setting parameters on GX Works2 correct the set values of parameters to the ones stored as backup data and write the parameters to the CPU module uonounj dnyoeg eeg Lowa yng oer 271 4 31 Error History Function The error or alert occurred with the Q64TCN is stored in the buffer memory areas Un G1280 to Un G1404 as history Up to 16 error history data can be stored 1 Processing of the error history function An error code and error occurrence time are stored starting from Error history No 1 the start address is Um G1280 2 Ho
94. A D B o Page 221 analog module function conversion module or D A conversion module on the system Section 4 16 Setting with considering delay time response scan time delay of Page 222 ON delay output function actual transistor output is possible Section 4 17 The Q64TCN monitors the control status constantly If the control System oscillates due to a status soon after the control starts a Page 223 Self tuning function change of the set value SV and property fluctuation of a Section 4 18 controlled object PID constants are changed automatically Changing automatically the upper limit output limiter value of each Peak current suppression T Page 233 channel and dividing the timing of transistor output can suppress function Section 4 19 the peak current Simultaneous This function allows several loops to reach the set value SV at the Page 238 7 x temperature rise function same time Section 4 20 Forward reverse action Whether to perform PID operations in the forward action or reverse Page 252 O x selection function action can be selected Section 4 21 Loop disconnection Page 253 Errors in the control system control loop can be detected detection function Section 4 22 During AT loop Page 255 disconnection detection A loop disconnection can be detected during auto tuning Section 4 23 function Proportional band setting The
95. ALM2 0000 CH4 ALM2 CH2 ALM3 0000 CH4 ALM3 CH2 ALM4 0000 CH4 ALM4 CH2 LBA 0000 CH4 LBA CH2 0000 CH4 Stop Monitor 373 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Addition and Change of Functions Appendix 1 1 Additional function The following table shows the function added to the Q64TCN and the product information of the Q64TCN that supports the additional function Additional function Product information Applicable GX Works2 version Reference Moving averaging process to a The first five digits are 1 91V or later Page 191 Section 4 10 temperature process value PV 14062 or later During AT loop disconnection The first five digits are 1 501X or later Page 255 Section 4 23 detection function 15042 or later Appendix 1 2 Change of functions The following table shows the changed functions of the Q64TCN and the product information of the Q64TCN that supports the changed functions Changed function Product information Applicable GX Works2 version Reference Function extension bit monitor Page 374 Appendix 1 1 Un G787 The first five digits are 1 91V or later Intelligent function module switch 14062 or later setting Page 374 Appendix 1 2 1 1 Function extension bit monitor Un1G787 The following contents set in the intelligent function module switch setting are stored Auto setting at Input Range Change Setting Change Rate Limit
96. Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng ye 159 89 Function extension bit monitor Un G787 CE The following settings configured on Switch Setting are stored Auto setting at Input Range Change Setting Change Rate Limiter Moving Averaging Process Setting For details on Switch Setting refer to the following L gt Page 299 Section 6 2 The following figure and table show how the setting is stored b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO ojo o o v Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 b2 is fixed to 0 Bit Flag name Function extension bit monitor Description bO Auto setting at input range change When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data is automatically changed to prevent the values in those buffer memory areas from being out of the setting range Page 101 Section 3 4 2 12 d 0 Disable 1 Enable b1 Setting change rate limiter Select whether the setting change rate limiter to be set in a batch or individually Page 190 Section 4 9 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting 1 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Individual Setting b2 fixed to 0 Unused b3 Moving averaging process setting Select whether the moving averaging process setting is used Ls Page 191 Section 4 10 0 Enable 1 Disab
97. C F or digit unit is stored Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit 0 1 Value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value is stored Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value For applicable buffer memory areas refer to the following s Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 d When Auto setting at Input Range Change is set to 1 Enable on Switch Setting gt Page 299 Section 6 2 When the input range is changed the following buffer memory areas are set automatically according to selected temperature sensor Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 31 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 At the same time the following buffer memory areas related to the input range is initialized to the default value 0 automatically Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary Buffer memory address CHLI Loop disconnection detection dead Dod Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Page 125 Section 3 4 2 34 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 RER CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 Es CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G7
98. CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal unen Standard g e value Write setting ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling e A 3 availability sensor control 4 AT simult nosse a Page 45 573 23Dy CH1 P System area System area 0 R x x Section parameter 3 4 2 67 calculation flag Self tunin pave ter 574 23 CH1 setin id System area System area 0 R W x Section 9 3 4 2 68 Page 147 575 23F y CH1 Self tuning flag System area System area 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 69 Sensor two point correction offset value measured 142 576 2404 CH2 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected Page 132 577 241 CH2 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 59 Sensor two point correction gain value measured Page 143 578 2424 CH2 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected 143 579 243 CH2 E 0 R W Section value 3 42 61 Page 144 580 244 CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 144 581 245 CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 R x x Section Eres 3 4 2 63 AR Page 144 oS 582 246 CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch reques
99. Control output cycle d Control output cycle Transistor output The manipulated value MV represents the ON time of the control output cycle in percentage 7 gt Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 Set the control output cycle in the following buffer memory area in the range 1 to 100s Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 UnG111 Un G143 s Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 In the heating cooling control the following buffer memory areas are used for the manipulated value MV and control output cycle Buffer memory area Buffer memory address Data type Reference name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Manipulated value for Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 Manipulated heating MVh Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 value MV Manipulated value for Un G704 Un G705 Un G706 Un G707 cooling MVc Heating control output Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Control output cycle setting Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 cycle Cooling control output Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 cycle setting 42 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 3 Number of parameters to be set The total number of the parameters of the initial setting and of the auto refresh setting of the Q64TCN must be within the number of parameters which can be set in the CPU module including the number of other intelligent function module parameters For the maximum number of parameters which can be set in a CPU module maximum number of set parameter ref
100. Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc Percentage to the full scale Percentage to the full scale 100 809 A E Pee Configure the settings as follows Integral time 1 0 Derivative time D 0 Manipulated value for heating MVh Manual reset The manipulated value for heating MVh can be moved from 0 to 80 to keep the set value SV stable N Heating 0 gt 0 Cooling 0 i E Set value SV i Manipulated value for cooling MVc a Cooling 10096 100 1 i 4 gt Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 096 every 0 1 Set 1000 to 1000 7 i gt Input range 3 Setting method Set a value in the following buffer memory area Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 5 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 75 174 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 5 Manual Control Manual control is a form of control for which the user sets the manipulated value MV manually instead of obtaining it automatically by PID control The manipulated value MV is checked every 500ms and is reflected to transistor output 1 Setting method Follow the following procedure for setting 1 Shiftto the MAN manual mode Set MAN 1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 7 gt Page 117 Section 3 4 2
101. Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 4 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1308 51Cy 42 91 1309 51Dy to System area 1311 51Fy 1312 5204 Page 161 Error code error occurrence time Data d to All CHs History 5 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1316 524 42 91 1317 5254 to System area 1319 527 1320 528 Page 161 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 6 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1324 52Cy 4 2 91 1325 52Dy to System area 1327 52Fy 83 1811 jueuuufisse oww Jeynq NOLPIO Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye E PROM Address Default Read Automatic Target 1 write decimal Setting contents value Write setting M NAM Reference hexadecimal 2 3 availability 4 1328 530 Page 161 Error code error occurrence time Data 9 d to All CHs History 7 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1332 534 4 2 91 1333 5354 to System area 1335 537 1336 538 Page 161 All CHs History 8 Error code error occurrence ume DR 0 R x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 34
102. Executed by the Q64TCN Completion of the temperature rise does not set Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 As in the figure above the temperature rise is performed by the simultaneous temperature rise function to a certain point and Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is set during the performance After the point the temperature rise is performed based on the PID constants of each channel and Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is set For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following 5 Page 238 Section 4 20 156 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 85 CHLI Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un1G751 Un G767 Un G783 Set the time unit of setting change rate limiter For details on the setting change rate limiter time unit setting function refer to the following 3 Page 190 Section 4 9 a Setting range 0 Not use time unit setting 1 to 3600 1 to 3600s A setting of 0 results in the same operation with the setting of 60 corresponding to one minute b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to 0 Not use time unit setting in all channels When 0 is set the
103. Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop 2 ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Temperature Range D to Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 200 C 0c oc oc D Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused Set PID constants proportional band P integral time I derivative time D and temperature ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Temperature Range 0 to Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 3 0 9 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 240 5 605 3 0 240 5 605 240 5 605 30 5 30 5 30s 30s O Slow 1 Monitor 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 Slow 1 Monitor D Slow 1 Monitor 0 Stop Set temperature measurement ranges such as upper lower limit for temperature adjustment control 1 Reverse Action i 400 C 3 oc 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 1 Reverse Action 1300 everse Action 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set the temperature conversion system NOE Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple Set the temperature sensor K Measured K Measured K Measured K Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 13
104. G243 CR Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4 For details on the alert function refer to the following gt 194 Section 4 12 a Alert mode and alert set value Any alert set value can be set in each alert mode of alert 1 to 4 selected in this setting Set the alert set value 1 to 4 in the following buffer memory areas Alert set values 1 to 4 respectively correspond to alert modes of alert 1 to 4 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 b Setting range The following table lists set values and setting ranges which are available for alert set values set in each alert mode ww AR N Set of Alert mode Setting range of alert set value Cs value v n 0 no alert 9 3 1 Upper limit input alert Within the temperature measurement range of the set input range 32 2 Lower limit input alert Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 3 a Q 3 Upper limit deviation alert 3 full scale to full scale aa 4 Lower limit deviation alert 3 5 Upper lower limit deviation alert 0 to full scale 6 Within range alert 7 Upper limit input alert with standby Within t
105. G264 to Un G271 gt Page 139 Section 3 4 2 54 4 Monitor Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 and check the current value of when the heater is gt Page 138 Section 3 4 2 53 5 Set the value monitored in Heater current process value Un G256 to Un1G263 in CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 7 gt Page 141 Section 3 4 2 56 6 setthe judgment value to perform the heater disconnection detection and output off time current error detection at the rate of the reference heater current value in Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 gt Page 123 Section 3 4 2 32 7 Set how many times heater disconnection is detected successively to regard the heater as disconnected in Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 s Page 130 Section 3 4 2 40 4 For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to 5 Page 269 Section 4 29 4 uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq 9gz v 265 Point P The standard setting value for Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 However the current value may significantly change depending on the characteristics of a heater or how the heater is used Check that there is no problem in the actual system write data error error code LILILIA44 occurs if the
106. G670 1 gt Page 146 Section 3 4 2 68 Starting ST plus vibration ST PID constants only 4 224 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Procedure for the self tuning control The following is the flow chart for the control Self tuning start Did the temperature adjustment control start Or did the set value SV change YES CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on Starting ST NO Is the temperature process value PV changed out of the set value SV PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un1G639 Un G671 turns OFF Is the response erratic sed on the set The module is controlled ba PID constants Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on Vibration ST PID constants are calculated by self tuning pne Response failed CHLI PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns OFF PID constants are calculated and changed by self tuning The setting is changed to PID constants calculated by self tuning CHO PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns ON CHO PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns ON Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off uonounj DuiunJles 81 Temperature is controlled by the set PID constant
107. G8 turns on 1 represents the number of the channel 14 to 44 where the alarm occurred The error code is always given priority over the alarm code for being stored in Write data error code Un GO For that reason when an alarm occurs during an error the alarm code is not stored in Write data error code Un GO Further when an error occurs during an alarm the error code is written over the alarm code in Write data error code UnYGO Alarm priorities are as follows Priority High Low 01CIA4 020A 030Ay 040Ay OS0A 4 06 070 080 090 When an alarm occurs if its priority is the same as higher than that of alarms already occurred the new alarm code is written over Write data error code Un GO 151 epo 7g 371 8 8 Check the Q64TCN Status The error code and hardware status can be checked by selecting Module s Detailed Information of the Q64TCN in the system monitor of the programming tool 1 Operating the programming tool From Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Main Base select Q64TCN gt Detailed Information 2 Module s Detailed Information a Checking the function version and product information The Product Information field shows the Q64TCN function version and product information b Checking the error code The Latest Error Code field shows the error code stored in Write data error code Un GO the Q64TCN
108. Heater Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple O c to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 2 Program conditions This program is designed to perform the heating cooling control by using the temperature input of CH1 334 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example Z as Q64TCTTN RUN ALM Heater operation i EMEN input L1H Lic oun oUT2 Cooling equipment operation input ale COM OUTA gm 24vpcl NC i IN1 1 IN2 2 CH1 Input IN1 1 IN2 2 Cold junction CJ zC temperature CJ compensation CJ resistor E IN3 3 INA 4 IN3 3 INA 4 Q64TC 7 TN Buiooo Buneeu eui Buiuuoued ueuM EZZ uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui BuisN ueuM ZZ 335 336 4 Switch Setting Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch
109. Memory Address 5 Gh Transfer Word Counts 24 Device Comment Transfer word will be batch stored 24 words by each auto refresh group End Point 3 4 Click the button Click the item to be set and enter the auto refresh target device To set the device for a grouped setting items gray part set the device to the start item white part When the device is set to the start item the consecutive devices are automatically set to the grouped setting items The left side window is the example when D51 is set to Measured value Alert setting To change the mode back to the normal mode perform Edit gt Setting Item Reduction Mode again and uncheck the box to the left of Setting Item Reduction Mode By changing the mode normal mode setting item reduction mode setting item reduction mode normal mode the settings before the change are all cleared When the auto refresh settings configured in the setting item reduction mode are read with GX Configurator TC The setting contents are not displayed properly Only the device set to the start item of the group is displayed Do not edit the read out auto refresh settings using GX Configurator TC 304 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS b In the normal mode Open the Auto Refresh window 1 Start Auto Refresh on the Project window XX Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Auto Refre
110. Oo a o AR O 4 UJ o AR 4 O 2 2 a Function Q64TC Q64TCN Remarks Forward reverse action selection function Loop disconnection detection function During AT loop disconnection z detection function Proportional band setting function x O Cooling method setting function x O Overlap dead band function x O Temperature conversion function x O using unused channels Heater disconnection detection function Output off time current error detection function Buffer memory data backup function Error history function x O Module error history collection zx function Error clear function x 2 Comparison of I O signals The same I O signals can be used for the Q64TCN in the standard control and the Q64TC 3 Comparison of buffer memory The same buffer memory areas can be used for the Q64TCN in the standard control and the Q64TC Point Buffer memory addresses are written in hexadecimal in the Q64TC manual 1 while they are written in decimal Intelligent function module device UnXGL1 in this manual Although the addresses are differently written buffer memory areas with the same function have the same address 1 Temperature Control Module User s Manual 376 APPENDICES Appendix 2 1 Compatibility between the Q64TC and Q64TC
111. Q64TCN operation is the same as the case when 60 a variation per minute is set 157 Aiowaw Jejynq ay siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 86 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Set the target channels for the peak current suppression function and the gap of the control output cycle between channels b15 to bi2 bi to b8 bz to b4 b3 to bd CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following Page 233 Section 4 19 a Setting range Not divide 14 Group 1 2 Group 2 Group 44 Group 4 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to Not divide 0p Point The division number depends on this setting The upper limit output limiter value is automatically set to correspond to the specified division number The following table lists the upper limit output limiter values which are set when this setting is enabled CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 gt Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Division Number 500 50 0 3 333 33 3 4 250 25 0 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un1G139 is set to 0 1
112. SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 CHO Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 24 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 CHO bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 Cold junction temperature compensation Un G182 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 49 selection c Out of the temperature measurement range If CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 exceeds the temperature measurement range Input range upper limit 60 of Un G5 to Un G8 or Input range lower limit b1 of Un G5 to Un G8 becomes 1 ON auto tuning ends in fail 7 s Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 uonounJ Buiun
113. Section value 3 4 2 60 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected Pags 143 611 263 CH3 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 61 144 612 2644 CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 144 613 265 CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 144 614 266 CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 145 615 267 CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 616 268 to System area E 627 2734 Page 119 628 2744 CH3 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 629 2754 to System area m 636 27C AT AT simultaneous tempetaturense simultaneous Page 145 637 27Dy CH3 System area temperature 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 67 calculation flag calculation flag 7 Page 146 638 27Ey CH3 System area oe 0 R W x Section 9 9 3 4 2 68 147 639 27 CH3 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 69 Sensor two point correction offset value measured Page 142 640 280 CH4 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected Fuge 142 641 2814 CH4 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 59 Sensor two point correction gain value measured Page 143 642 28
114. Section 3 4 2 19 c Setting method Among proportional band integral time 1 and derivative time set any value to only proportional band P Set 0 to integral time I and derivative time D 168 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 PI Control PI control is a control method in which integral elements are added to P control thereby an offset remaining deviation is compensated By setting the integral time I properly the temperature process value PV matches with the set value SV a Setting method Among proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D set any value to only proportional band P and integral time I Set 0 to derivative time D 4 PD Control PD control is a control method in which the derivative time D is set in addition to PD control The control mechanism is the same as P control a Setting method Among proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D set any value to only proportional band P and derivative time D Set 0 to integral time 1 5 PID Control PID control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to PI control thereby the temperature shifts to a stable status in a short period of time even when a drastic change has occurred By setting the derivative time D properly the control subject shifts to a stable status in a short period of time a Setting method Set any value to proportional band P integral time
115. Standard Heating cooling control Mix control Channel control Normal mode Expanded mode Normal mode Expanded mode Heating cooling Heating cooling Heating cooling CH1 Standard control Heating cooling control control control control Heating cooling Heating cooling 2 CH2 Standard control Heating cooling control control control Heating cooling gt CH3 Standard control 1 Standard control Standard control control Q S Heating cooling d CH4 Standard control 21 2 Standard control Standard control control lt a 1 Only temperature measurement using a temperature input terminal can be performed gt Page 262 Section 4 27 2 Heating cooling control is performed using an output module in the system gt Page 164 Section 4 1 3 5 H c 2 2 2 163 3 Expanded mode In the heating cooling control expanded mode or the mix control expanded mode the number of loops for heating cooling control can be expanded using an output module and others in the system To use an expanded mode construct a system such as the one shown below CPU module Q64TCN 4 channels Buffer memory 4 3 Temperature l CH1 14 Input from the temperature sensor process Temperature Input from the temperature sensor value PV pro
116. Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 s 117 Section 3 4 2 26 b Setting range The setting range is different between the standard control and the heating cooling control 7 7 Page 162 Section 4 1 n standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 n heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 0 c Enablement of setting contents Make sure the corresponding bits of MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 has been set to 1 ON and write a value in the MAN output setting A value that is written when MAN mode shift completion flag is OFF will be replaced with the manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation by the system d Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 28 CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 148 CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 CCS CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 QB Set the change rate of the set value SV per a set time unit when the set value SV is changed This setting can regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV Set a time unit in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 gt gt Page 157 Section 3 4 2 85 Temperature process value PV A Set value SV 2 Setting change rate limiter full scale percentage
117. Write data error code UnYGO lt gt Page 370 Section 8 7 If an alert for the loop disconnection detection does not occur and auto tuning is normally completed the value in CHLI Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 is automatically updated to the value calculated by auto tuning Point There is a possibility of an error in the control loop if the loop disconnection alert occurs For this reason even when auto tuning is normally completed check the control loop and examine the appropriateness of the loop disconnection detection judgment time during auto tuning To clear the alert status If any of the following conditions is met CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF and CHLI Loop disconnection detection b13 of Un G5 to Un G8 turn off CHLI PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on and the mode has shifted to the setting mode Amanipulated value MV becomes greater than the lower limit output limiter value and smaller than the upper limit output limiter value Disable 0 is set to During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting Un G57 1 015 set to Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 MAN 1 is set to AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 After performing the operations above tur
118. alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert 1 s Page 194 Section 4 12 1 When a value other than 0 0 0 is set in Alert dead band setting Un G164 the system is put in the alert status when upper limit input becomes equal to or greater than the alert set value The system is put in the non alert status when the upper limit falls below the alert dead band figure on the right When 0 0 0 is set in Alert dead band setting Un G164 When a value other than 0 0 0 is set in Alert dead band setting Un G164 Temperature process value PV A Alert set value gt Time Alert status Non alert status Alert status Temperature process value PV Alert set value Alert status A Dead band gt Time L Non alert status status 205 uonounJ Haly ZLY 206 9 Setting the number of alert delay Set the number of sampling to judge alert occurrence The system is set in the alert status when the temperature process value PV that has reached the alert set value remains in the alert range until the number of sampling becomes equal to or greater than the preset number of alert delays a Setting method Set a value in Number of alert delay Un G165 gt Page 129 Section 3 4 2 39 Ex When the alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert 1 7 5 Page 194 Section 4 12 1 When 5 is set as the
119. becomes high CH1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current When the peak current suppression control function is used 20s Hr Setting the transistor outputs to different ON timings can reduce the peak current to that of one transistor output 233 uonouny uoisseJddng Juano yeed 6y p 1 The number of timing divided and upper limit output limiter Set the number of timing to be divided setting in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 off The setting is enabled by turning off on and off Setting change instruction YnB At the time when the setting is enabled the following buffer memory area is automatically set according to the number of timing divided Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un1G138 s Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 The following table lists the setting details The no of timing divided CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 2 500 50 0 3 333 33 3 4 250 25 0 The following buffer memory area is set to 0 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 s Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Point When using this function set the control output cycles for target channels to the same value Even if the following buffer memory area setting
120. changed module name When the window appears click restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns on The online module change is complete 409 ZS410M X9 peunBijuoo usu G s xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy uuo xipueddy Appendix 5 6 When the initial settings were configured using a 8 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring sequence program 1 Stopping operation 1 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device window Device Y10 v T C Set Value Reference Program pie 1090 Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Display format Modify Value 2 Se S2 asc 1 Do not display com Batch IY10 Device 2 In Device Name enter and display the name of the 4 20 Y30 CPU module device to be refreshed in the Q64TCN 40 0 60 70 ojo o o o o o m e jejelele ejele elolololololola elolololololo a elolololololo ojo e e o e o e ojo e o o e o ojo e e o e o oj o e e e e o o 410 3 Select the following output signals and click Modify Value Turn off the output signals in the CPU module to turn off the following output signals in the Q64TCN Setting operation mode in
121. chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Startup and Maintenance Precautions NCAUTION Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire
122. conditions self tuning does not complete due to errors In addition at this abnormal termination CHO Self tuning error 610 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON When 6000 seconds 1 hour 40 minutes or more have elapsed from the start of self tuning When the change rate of the process value PV during self tuning is less than 1 125 C minute When CHLI Temperature process value PV 9 to 12 is outside the temperature measurement range s Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 When the manipulated value MV does not reach the upper limit output limiter value or lower limit output limiter value before the measurement is completed and necessary measurement data is not obtained When the temperature process value PV that is supposed to rise drops by 1 C F or more after self tuning is started with the starting ST When the temperature process value PV that is supposed to drop rises by 1 C F or more after self tuning is started with the starting ST When the setting for the buffer memory areas in the following table is changed during self tuning Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 U
123. correction function refer to the following gt Page 213 Section 4 14 2 66 During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting 571 2 Set whether to enable or disable the loop disconnection detection function during auto tuning For details on the during AT loop disconnection detection function refer to the following gt Page 255 Section 4 23 b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Lo 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 1 Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 a Setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable b Default value The default values are set to Disable 0 in all channels 67 CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un1G573 Un G605 Un G637 UnG669 EED The status when simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning calculates simultaneous temperature rise jueuuuBissy yng t parameter is stored in this buffer memory area Jang ey jo Sed 0 OFF 1 ON b15 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j 0 v Bit data from b15 to b3 are fixed to 0 145 Bit Flag name Description bo AT simultaneous temperature rise This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion parameter is calculated by simultaneous temperature rise
124. current 1 fixes the current value of the heater being OFF as the current value of the heater previously being ON c Default value The default value is set to ON OFF current 0 132 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 47 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 CHOManipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G708 to Un G711 The values stored in the following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules such as a D A converter module and stored in these buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for heating Mvh Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 Un G705 Un G706 Un G707 Un G177 to Un G180 are used for heating in the heating cooling control The store range differs depending on the resolution set in the following buffer memory area 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 0 to 16000 0 to 20000 e Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un G181 1 Page 134 Section 3 4 2 48 For details refer to the following gt Page 221 Section 4 16 2 Point When the device which perfo
125. decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng pe 109 19 CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 1 2 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 Heating cooling In the standard control set upper limit value lower limit value for actual output of manipulated value MV calculated by the PID operation to an external device In the heating cooling control set upper limit value of heating cooling for actual output of manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc calculated by the PID operation to an external device Additionally Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 are used for heating in the heating cooling control During the auto tuning setting of Heating upper limit output limiter and Cooling upper limit output limiter are disabled a Setting range The following table lists setting range of each buffer memory Buffer memory Setting range Remarks Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Set the values to lower limit output limiter value lt Un G74 Un G106 Un G13
126. disconnection detection function refer to the following Page 253 Section 4 22 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 7200 s Set a value that exceeds the time in which temperature changes by 2 C F b When performing auto tuning For this setting the twice value of that of CHO Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 is automatically set gt Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 However when this setting is set to 0 s at the start of the auto tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored c Default value The default values are set to 480 s in all channels 124 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 34 CHO Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un1G124 Un G156 Gane To prevent an error alarm of loop disconnection detection set a non alert band temperature band in which the loop disconnection is not detected where the set value SV is at the center Temperature process value PV Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Set value y Non alert area Set one above the other with SV the set value SV in the center gt Time For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following Page 253 Section 4 22 a Setting range The setting range is from O to full scale When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 U
127. dup ME etd S EI 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 17 Vel F atur s iie Ah Ge im edu TM p queer MEG eg 19 1 2 The PID Control System pese eee ER ME 21 1 3 About the PID Oper tion ixi ose Ux LOL ee thule ee te E LER 23 1 3 1 Operation method and formula 23 1 3 2 The Q64TCN actions een 24 1 3 3 Proportional action 25 1 3 4 Integral action l action s me 26 1 3 5 Derivative action 27 1 3 6 PID ations ceo eei Ee oa bete eie bo Ras 28 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 29 2 1 Applicable Systems csse re oe SES ee OE ix tbt Ei ee Oa el ear ee SA 29 2 2 Using the Q64TCN with Redundant CPU 0 eee eee 33 2 3 How to Check the Function Version and Serial 34 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration 37 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 38 3 1 R rformance Specifications eke ew ae 38 3 1 1 Type of usable temperature sensors temperature measurement range resolution and effect from wiring resistance of 1 40 3 1 2 Sampling cycle and control
128. find problem causes and take corrective action 1 Procedure Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module to display pea S the System Monitor window Monitor Status Connection Channel List Monitoring SerialPort PLC Module Connecton US passons Diagnostics gt System Monitor 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 Error History Detail Base Information List Power Base Base Module Base Model Name Extension Basel Extension Baez Extension Bases Extension Based Empty 0020 Extension Bases 3 Em 16Point 0030 Extension Base6 mx B h 16Point 0040 Legend Bunoouse qnoJ e1ojeg 8 Error Stop Monitor Product Information List System Error History 2 After confirming that an error is displayed on the igi Q64TCN select the Q64TCN and click oon Detailed Information NS i Pa mm If an error LED is on a module other than the VLAAGLELESERERERESESEREEEHEAAARMBMT Main Base sir aevnttew Eo se se sane DT Q64CTN refer to the user s manual for the module RETE E honos and take corrective action 2 Moderate iver Assign Pent Product Information List System Error History Chose To the next page 359 From the previous page
129. following Page 303 Section 6 4 6 write the set parameter to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module Online gt Write to PLC 350 Press the switch for a while CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 Perform auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning D Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Tuning Monitor Status Executes auto tuning Mode Monitoring epg xm 19 Mode Change Mode 7 Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN Stop Monit M Error Code HEX Auto Tuning Execution Auto Tuning Setting l Item CH1 Process value PV oc oc Set value SV 200C Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh 5 0 5 0 Cooling side manipulated value MVc 0 0 0 0 PID constant PID constant current value Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph 3 0 3 0 Cooling side proportional band Pc setting 0 0 0 0 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 Derivative time D setting 60s 605 Loop disconnection detection judgment time 4805 4805 Auto tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start Start Start Start Start Auto tuning stop F Status Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed Result of automatic backup of PID constant The time between the
130. following gt Page 238 Section 4 20 If conditions other than above lead to 1 ON also check the following table depending on the set content in CHLI Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Set content in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 Check description 1 Starting ST PID constants only Check the control loop for wiring problems Switch Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 to 4 Starting ST plus vibration ST PID constants only to perform control 3 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameter Check the control loop for wiring problems Save the calculated simultaneous temperature rise parameter if any Then switch CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 to 4 Starting ST plus vibration ST PID constants only to perform control If no simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated check the control loop for wiring problems Point This area is enabled only for the following channels CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used 149 Jejnq ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 150 70 CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 CD Di
131. gt Write to PLC uiu or Power OFF ON 7 Program example of when using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Setting on remote I O station side 1 Createa project on GX Works2 Select QCPU mode for PLC Series and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O for PLC XW Project gt New New Project Cancel PLC Series QCPU Q mode q372LP25 Q372BR15 Remotel O 347 JON uo ueuw 348 2 Add the Q64TCTTN to the project on GX Works2 X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module m Module Selection Module Type Temperature Control Module Setting Item Reduction Mode Module Name bal Be m Mount Position Base No Mounted Slot No 1 ES Acknowledge Assignment Specify start address 0010 1 Slot Occupy 16 points Title setting Title cma d Display the Q64TCTTN Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTTN Output Setting at CPLI Stop Error Output Setting at CPLI Stop Error D CLEAR O CLEAR Control Mode Selection O Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disa
132. gt Executed by the Q64TCN 242 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise AT The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated when all the following conditions are satisfied after the procedure described on gt Page 242 Section 4 20 5 a is executed When the module is in the PID control all of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D are not 0 When the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer just before the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed When the temperature process value PV is within the temperature measurement range just before the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed If the temperature process value PV goes outside the range after the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed the auto tuning ends in fail For the operation of the Q64TCN in that situation refer to 7 5 Page 186 Section 4 6 8 b When CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 is set to 0 lt gt Page 112 Section 3 4 2 20 If all the conditions described above are not satisfied the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated Only PID constants are calculated The following shows how the Q64TCN operates when the simultaneous temperature rise AT has not been executed ON CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF a ON CHO Auto tuning statu
133. improve response to the change of the set value SV are set response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants to improve response to the disturbance are set response to the change of the set value SV degrades On the other hand in the two degree of freedom PID control response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of freedom PID control Therefore the Q64TCN operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified The level of response to the change of the set value SV can be selected from the following maintaining the PID constants that improve response to the disturbance Fast Normal Slow Temperature process value PV Fast A we 7 Normal Set value SV 2 gt Change Slow Set value SV 1 gt t gt Time Set value SV change point 1 Setting method Set a value in CHO Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 L gt Page 116 Section 3 4 2 25 188 4 8 Derivative Action Selection Function CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS An derivative action appropriate for each of fixed value action and ramp action can be selected and the action characteristic can be improved using this fun
134. is different by each channel an error does not occur Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 5 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 The module operates according to the value of Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 automatically set when this function is used Ex Timing chart of when timing is divided into four timing ON Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 OFF ON i Setting operation mode status Xn1 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Setting change instruction YnB CHO Upper output limiter 0 w 250 25 0 m Change the automatically Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 TT calculated result if needed storing Setting change completion flag XnB OFF rag Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN 234 2 Examples of dividing timing a Four timing The following table shows two examples CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 1 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Group 4 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Group 4 The following shows the relationship between groups and the values 96 of CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784
135. limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 1000 100 0 o gt CHO Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 0 0 0 SES Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 1000 100 0 5 i Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 8 111 112 20 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 C2 Set the limit of an output variation per 1s to regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 1000 0 1 s to 100 0 s When 0 is set an output variation is not regulated When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 10 1 0 s The output changes by 0 5 per 500ms because the sampling cycle is 500ms If the manipulated value MV rapidly changes by 50 the variation is regulated to 1 s Therefore it takes 50s until the output actually changes by 50 When setting CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 to 10 1 0 s Manipulated ng 100 value MV P gt i increased 77 50 80 qr E by5096 1 4 50 eres eae re 6 0 5 Y 500ms X pO A E nl of 0 h 7 gt a uc Set value SV b Two position control 7 gt 166 Sec
136. load heater disconnection an externally operable device such as a magnetic relay failure and input disconnection 1 How an error is detected From the point where the control output has reached upper limit output limiter value or lower limit output limiter value the amount of changes in the temperature process value PV is monitored every unit time set and disconnection of a heater and input is detected 2 Examples of the errors detected The following are the examples of the errors detected a When control output is being performed The Q64TCN detects an error because the temperature does not rise even when control output is being performed under the following conditions When a heater is disconnected When input is disconnected or short circuited When the contact point of an externally operable device does not turn on After the control output has reached upper limit output limiter value if the temperature does not rise by 2 F or more within the loop disconnection detection judgment time set an alert is output The operation is reversed for forward action 7 gt Page 252 Section 4 21 b When control output is not being performed The Q64TCN detects an error because the temperature rises even when control output is not being performed under the following conditions When input is disconnected When the contact point of an externally operable device was bonded After the control output has reached lower limit
137. module on the master station Program that changes the setting operation mode Change to the setting mode or X23 Y101B 1 Program that stops the auto tuning when an alert is detected W1155 8 X1010 Y1014 X1014 RST Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM X24 Xi010 Y101B 1018 MF AF MOVP ki SET M300 ZP REMTO Ki Hi H3E D9 Ki M310 M311 F SET M301 M302 M303 M304 At AF AF SET M302 M303 Z REMFR J1 K2 Ki H1 HIF D10 K1 SET M312 M313 AF RST RST D100 SET M304 t MOV Ko SET M305 t ZP REMTO d K3 Ki H1 H3E D11 Ki Program that reads an error code X1010 MOV W1150 x22 t SET Yi012 X1012 Wi150 HO 1 RST 1011 d the operation mode Y1014 fon Auto tuning instruction OFF D9 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read Requested Requested M300 M310 M301 M302 M312 Read E PROM s PID constants read write completion flag to D10 M302 M303 M304 D11 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Not requested M305 M314 4 Output a write data error code to K4Y60 4 Y60 to Y6F 1012 Error reset instruction ON vi012 Error reset instruction OFF END 352 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 8 Program example of when not using the parameter of an
138. on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following gt Page 238 Section 4 20 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 s b Default value The default values are set to 0 s in all channels Point This setting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically Automatic calculation is performed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise parameter is set is normally completed 83 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un G749 Un G765 UnG781 2 Select mode of the auto tuning For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following gt Page 176 Section 4 6 For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following s Page 238 Section 4 20 a Setting range 0 Select normal auto tuning 1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT jueuuuBissy yng t b Default value The default values are set to Select normal auto tuning 0 in all channels Jejnq ay siiejeq Point This setting can be used with the setting of Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G187 7 5 Page 136 Section 3 4 2 51 If this setting is changed during the auto tuning it is enabled in the next auto tuning 155 84 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un
139. output cycle 42 3 1 3 Number of parameters to be set 43 32 Function anes aha ipM 45 3 3 I O Signals Transferred to from the CPU 48 3 3 1 l O signal lists aie eR AC atid Pan wate ee ed En e 48 3 3 2 Details f input signals ss Lenaig thun Reve ghee ed eG be i eG ewe ed bed 50 3 33 Details of output signals orasan eect eee eee 56 3 4 Buffer Memory Assignment 0 00000 eee 59 3 4 4 Q64TCN buffer memory assignment list 59 3 4 2 Details of the buffer memory n s a s uasna nrnna eee eee eee eee 86 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 162 4 1 Control Mode Selection Function 00 00 ccc ccc s 162 4 2 Control Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 165 43 Control Method exc npe ee Cp eh e 166 10 44 Manual Reset e res 173 4 5 Manual Cortirol cad Ie ee ee FEE 175 4 6 Auto Tuning 176 4 7 Simple Two degree of freedom 188 4 8 Derivative Action Selection Function 189 4 9 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function
140. output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section y 9 setting setting 3 42 23 Page 115 80 50 CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 Control Control Control Page 116 81 51 CH2 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 7 3 4 2 25 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTOMAN i 82 524 CH2 mode shift 0 R W x Section mode shift mode shift 7 3 4 2 26 118 i 83 53 CH2 MAN output MAN Output 0 RW x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page 119 84 544 CH2 limiter temperature rise 0 R W x Section 0 3 4 2 28 Page 120 85 554 CH2 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse Page 121 86 56 CH2 System area System area 1 R W x Section action setting 3 4 2 30 1300 2 TT Upper limit 8767 aume setingimter seting mie 99 RW 9 9 setting limiter RT Page 122 5 Section O TT 3 4 2 31 imi imi L limit 88 58 CH2 Lower limit Lower Lu ad i 2000 RAN T setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 7 RT 5 89 59 CH2 System area Heat Heater Heater j 123 disconnection 90 5Ap CH2 disconnection disconnection alert 0 R W x Section lert setting lert setting T 3 4 2 32 alert setting alert setting seting 32 L ce cath Page 124 91 5Bp CH2
141. output cycle setting 20s CH3 Control output cycle setting 20s 1 CH4 Control output cycle setting 20s CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Upper limit input alert CH2 Alert 1 mode setting Upper limit input alert CH3 Alert 1 mode setting Upper limit input alert CH4 Alert 1 mode setting Upper limit input alert CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Group 1 CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Group 1 CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Group 2 CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Group 2 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise J AT mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise J AT mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT Setting change instruction ON Setting change instruction OFF J Flag 2 for setting value write ON yp oe T TO Ui TO U1 TO u1 TO U1 To u1 TO Ut H26 H46 H66 H86 H22 H42 H62 H82 K250 K300 K350 K400 K200 K250 K300 K350 RST Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in RST K1 M2 1 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING CH1 Alert set value 1 250 C CH2 Alert set value 1 30
142. output limiter value if the temperature does not drop by 2 C F or more within the loop disconnection detection judgment time set an alert is output The operation is reversed for forward action 7 Page 252 Section 4 21 253 uonouny uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq doo ZZY 254 3 Setting method Two settings are available for the loop disconnection detection function a Setting for the unit time to monitor the amount of changes in the temperature process value PV Set the unit time in the following buffer memory area Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 gt Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 Point When not using this function set Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 to 0 b Setting for the dead band To prevent an error alert for the loop disconnection detection set a non alert band temperature band in which the loop disconnection is not detected with the set value SV being its center If the temperature process value PV is within the loop disconnection detection dead band an alert is not output even though the alert conditions of loop disconnection are met Set the dead band in the following buffer memory area Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 s Page 125 Section 3 4 2 34 Point If this function is not necessary set 0 to Loop disc
143. output variation limiter x 0 1 adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 0 196 AT bias unused channel setting Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 10ms MAN mode shift completion flag CHO AUTO MAN mode switching MAN output setting x 0 1 Auto tuning 385 uoneJedo 5 1 1 xc z xipueddy 1 pue X9 Burs ueuM xipueddy Appendix 4 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer This appendix describes the online module change procedure using GX Developer Before performing an online module change carefully read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 4 1 Precautions on online module change 386 Precautions on an online module change are listed below When an online module change is performed not all set values are inherited by the module after the change After the online module change write the set values in the changed module again When an online module change is performed properly follow the procedure lt gt Page 391 Appendix 4 4 Not doing so may cause malfunction and failure Before performing an online module change check that the system outside of the programmable controller does not malfunction Prepare methods such as a switch that disconnect individually the external power
144. program gt Executed by the Q64TCN For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 176 Section 4 6 b Self tuning This signal turns on when self tuning starts This signal automatically turns off at the completion of the self tuning Set a self tuning option in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 s Page 146 Section 3 4 2 68 Self tuning can be executed only in the standard control For details on the self tuning function refer to the following lt gt Page 223 Section 4 18 52 6 7 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS E PROM write completion flag Xn8 Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the E PROM After the data writing is completed this flag turns on Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 off from on also turns off this flag ON E PROM backup instruction opp Yn8 Execution status of Before write to During write to Completion of write to E PROM write E PROM E PROM E PROM E PROM write completion flag Xn8 Executed in a sequence program sass gt Executed by the Q64TCN For details on the data writing to the E PROM refer to the following gt Page 270 Section 4 30 Default value write completion flag Xn9 Turning Default setting registration instruction Yn9 on from off starts the writing of the default
145. proportional band P can be individually set for heating or x 257 function cooling Section 4 24 When the auto tuning is executed an auto tuning formula is Cooling method setting Page 258 automatically selected according to the selected cooling method x function Section 4 25 and the operation starts By changing the temperature where the cooling transistor output is Overlap dead band VN DINE 259 started whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is x O function un Section 4 26 prioritized can be selected Temperature conversion In heating cooling control normal mode and mix control normal 262 function using unused mode only temperature measurement is allowed by using unused x 4 um i channels temperature input terminals Heater disconnection The current which flows in the heater main circuit can be measured 265 detection function and disconnections can be detected Section 4 28 46 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Enable or disable S Heating Item Description Standard cooling control control Output off time current 269 An error of when the transistor output is off can be detected O O error detection function Section 4 29 A set value in a buffer memory area can be backed up to the Buffer memory data E PROM Because the backed up value is restored at the
146. range 0 Not requested 1 Requested c Default value The default values are set to Not requested 0 in all channels d Precautions When Requested 1 is set do not perform the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the E PROM Change of the set value of the buffer memory read from the E2PROM by this instruction gt Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 a E2PROM back up s Page 270 Section 4 30 Default setting registration gt Page 58 Section 3 3 3 5 Auto tuning lt Page 176 Section 4 6 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t Point When the initial setting by a programming tool is already configured PID constants should be backed up to an E2PROM after the auto tuning Turning on this instruction at the next start up can omits the auto tuning This instruction is enabled in the setting mode or operation mode lt 3 Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 However it is disabled when Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to is ON Page 176 Section 4 6 127 37 CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 CD The set value to be stored in the buffer memory areas is automatically backed up to the E PROM by using this function By reading the set value that is backed up when the power is turned on from off or the CPU module is released from the reset status another auto tuning can be o
147. rise completion range 1 in Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 a Setting range When the temperature unit of the input range is 1 to 10 When the temperature unit of the input range is F 1 to 10 F Other than above 1 to 10 96 of the full scale b Default value The default value is set to 1 130 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 42 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 168 Set the time for Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 s 91 Section 3 4 2 6 to be set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 after the completion of temperature rise a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 min b Default value The default value is set to O min 43 PID continuation flag Un G169 C Set the operation status at the time when the mode has shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 ON OFF For details on the relationship between this flag and the control status refer to the following PID control 7 gt Page 170 Section 4 3 6 Temperature judgment 7 87 Section 3 4 2 3 Alert judgment gt Page 203 Section 4 12 5 a Setting range 0 Stop 1 Continue b Default value The default value is set to Stop 0 44 Heater disconnection compensation function selection Un G170 C Set whether to use the heater disconnection compen
148. s Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 b Setting manipulated value MV in MAN mode Set the manipulated value MV in the following buffer memory area MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 s Page 118 Section 3 4 2 27 Set the manipulated value MV after confirming MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 has become MAN mode shift completed 1 93 Jejnq ey siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 11 E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag Un G31 Gap This flag indicates whether an operation to the E PROM by the settings in the following buffer memory areas is completed or failed E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 gt Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 lt Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 a Correspondence between each bit and flag The following table lists flags that correspond to bits of this buffer memory area Bit AER Bit Mn Flag description ET Flag description bO CH1 Read completion flag b8 CH1 Read failure flag b1 CH2 Read completion flag b9 CH2 Read failure flag b2 CH3 Read completion flag b10 CH3 Read failure flag b3 CH4 Read completion flag b11 CH4 Read failure flag b4 CH1 Write completion flag b12 CH1 Write failure flag b5 CH2 Write completion flag b13 CH2 Write f
149. start and completion of auto tuning depends on the object to be controlled After auto tuning starts this window can be closed b Devices used by a user Device Description X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F R X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X1010 Module READY flag 2 Q64TCTTN X1010 to X101F X1012 Write error flag a Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F F Y1011 Setting operation mode instruction Y1012 Error reset instruction S Q64TCTTN Y1010 to Y101F o Y1018 E PROM backup instruction 3 2 Y101B Setting change instruction 2 D9 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for E2PROM s PID constants read 8 o D10 Read data storage device using Z P instruction for E7PROM s PID constants read 5 D11 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for E7PROM s PID constants read 2 M300 to M305 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read flag M310 M311 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M312 M313 Z P instruction completion result device M314 M315 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device W1150 Write data error code Devices where data is written by W1151 CH1 Temperature process value PV auto refresh W1155 CH1 Alert definition 351 Write the program to the CPU
150. supply for the module to be changed online and the power supply for external devices to prevent electric shock and malfunction of the module during transportation Record the content to save data of the writable buffer memory 387 Appendix 4 2 5 beforehand because the buffer memory data may not be saved normally in the event that the module malfunctions Even if pre recorded data are set to the buffer memory in the module that was changed online and control is restarted the following areas are cleared when control is stopped Therefore control cannot be restarted in the same control status Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 CHLI Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un1G707 Even if an alert occurs before performing an online module change the same alert does not necessarily occur when the control is restarted For example if an upper limit alert with standby is set and the alert occurs before performing an online module change the module goes into the standby status and the alert does not occur when the control is restarted after performing the online module change To check the following items it is recommended to perform the online module change on the actual system and verify that the operation of modules not to be changed is not affected The method and configuration to disconnect the connection with external devi
151. system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 2 Programming condition This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple K type 0 to 1300 C connected to CH1 An error code can be read and reset 344 3 Wiring example CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING The wiring is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 gt Page 308 Section 7 2 1 3 4 Switch Setting Configure settings on the remote I O station side 3 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module Page 347 Section 7 3 7 a 3 When not using the parameter of an intelligent function module Page 353 Section 7 3 8 a 5 Contents of the initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused Upper limit setting limiter 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Lower limit setting limiter 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Alert 1 mode setting 1 Upper Limit Input Aler
152. the change After the online module change write the set values in the changed module again When an online module change is performed properly follow the instructions Not doing so may cause malfunction and failure Before performing an online module change check that the system outside of the programmable controller does not malfunction Prepare methods such as a switch that disconnect individually the external power supply for the module to be changed online and the power supply for external devices to prevent electric shock and malfunction of the module during transportation Record the content to save data of the writable buffer memory 7 s Page 59 Section 3 4 beforehand because the buffer memory data may not be saved normally in the event that the module malfunctions Even if pre recorded data are set to the buffer memory in the module that was changed online and control is restarted the following areas are cleared when control is stopped Therefore control cannot be restarted in the same control status Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 CHLI Manipulated value for heating MVh UnG13 to Un1G16 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un G707 Even if an alert occurs before performing an online module change the same alert does not necessarily occur when the control is restarted For example if an upper limit alert with standby is set and an alert occurs before performing an onlin
153. the control i Module ready flag Xn0 turns on Restart the online module change using GX Developer Click the The module operates based on Execution button to restart the control the initial setting sequence program started when Module READY flag Xn0 is started 1 2 390 An access to Intelligent function module device is included The intelligent function module operates according to the previous setting when the user does not perform any operation APPENDICES Appendix Online module change procedures This section describes two online module change procedures configuring the initial settings using GX Configurator TC and configuring the initial settings using a sequence program 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the online module change procedure Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F 16 empty points 2 Procedure The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start y EB oves When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC Stop the operation lt gt Page 392 Appendix 4 5 1 When initial settings are set on a sequence program Y L3 Page 396 Appendix 4 6 1 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC pemove Me modules e Page 393 Appendix 4 5 2 When initial settings are set on a sequence program
154. the following conditions CHO Lower limit setting limiter lt Upper limit setting limiter If the above conditions are not met a write data error error code LILIL15 occurs CHO Lower limit setting limiter CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Input lower limit V 4 Input upper limit Set value SV setting range b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CHO Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit e One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value A default value differs depending on modules to be used Default value Buffer memory Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 1300 6000 Un G151 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 0 2000 Un G152 122 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 32 CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 Common Set the set value in heater disconnection detection and off time current error detection in percentage of the reference heater current value For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following s Page 265 Section 4 28 For details on the output off tim
155. thermometers that can be used with the Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN and temperature measurement range F Platinum resistance Temperature Temperature thermometer type P Resolution P Resolution measurement range measurement range 200 0 to 600 0 300 to 1100 1 Pt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 200 0 to 500 0 300 to 900 1 JPt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 41 JO e2uejsise4 pue uonnjosei eBueJ eJnyeJeduue sJosues eunjeJjeduie ejqesn Jo ed eoueuuoLeg 3 1 2 Sampling cycle and control output cycle This section describes the sampling cycle and control output cycle of the Q64TCN 1 Sampling cycle The Q64TCN performs PID operations in the order of CH1 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH2 The time from when PID operation is started on the current channel CHn until PID operation is restarted on the current channel CHn is called a sampling cycle The sampling cycle is 500ms The number of used channels and the settings of unused channels do not affect the sampling cycle CH1 PID CH2 PID CH3 PID CH4 PID CH1 PID CH2 PID operation operation operation operation operation operation 500ms sampling cycle 4 500ms sampling cycle 2 Control output cycle The control output cycle is the ON OFF cycle of transistor output ON ON OFF be
156. time D 0 to 3600s set 0 for P control and PI control Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set in the used thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer to be used Dead band setting range 0 1 to 10 0 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Specifications ben Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Transistor output Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of accesses to non volatile memory Max 1012 times Insulation method Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20 or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MO or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications Input accuracy Number of alert delay Page 32 Section 2 1 6 Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 o
157. to 700 0 F 0 1 132 7000 0 0 to 1700 C 1 15 1700 0 0 to 3000 1 106 3000 0 0 to 1800 C 1 16 1800 0 j 0 to 3000 1 107 3000 0 0 to 400 C 1 17 400 0 0 0 to 700 0 C 0 1 44 7000 0 0 to 1000 C 1 18 1000 0 0 to 1800 1 108 1800 0 0 to 1300 C 1 22 1300 0 0 to 2300 1 111 2300 0 200 to 200 C 1 26 200 200 0 to 400 C 1 25 400 0 U 0 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 46 6000 0 300 to 400 1 115 400 300 0 to 700 oF 1 114 700 0 0 to 400 C 1 27 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 47 4000 0 0 to 900 C 1 28 900 0 L 0 0 to 900 0 C 0 1 48 9000 0 0 to 800 1 116 800 0 0 to 1600 1 117 1600 0 0 to 1200 C 1 23 1200 0 PLII 0 to 2300 1 112 2300 0 0 to 2300 C 1 24 2300 0 no 0 to 3000 1 113 3000 0 Input from other analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 0 to 4000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 0 to 12000 2 98 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Auto setting at input range change Celsius CHO Input range imi imi Thermocouple e VUES s ure cum measurement Resolution type Inge Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 F digit Un G128 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 Input from other analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 0 to 16000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 0 to 20000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 0
158. turn off and on Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 b Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise AT function After the procedure described on gt 242 Section 4 20 5 a is executed the Q64TCN operates as following Operation of the 64 CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on Then normal auto tuning is performed and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is normally calculated In addition AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un1G637 Un G669 is turned 1 ON After auto tuning is completed Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off and the module is shifted to the PID control ON CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to OFF f al ON CHO Auto tuning status ssl OFF Ad Xn4 to Xn7 2 A i Control status pip control Auto tuning X PID control Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data D Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 n and os Calculated CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 i ON CHLIAT simultaneous temperature rise parameter OFF ie calculation completion bO of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Executed in a sequence program aire
159. turning off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 is enabled is indicated in this column For details refer to Page 270 Section 4 30 jueuuuBissy Aowa yng t 1811 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre 85 3 4 2 Details of the buffer memory This chapter describes details on the buffer memory of the Q64TCN Point P For buffer memory areas indicated with the icon the following terms are used unless otherwise specified Proportional band P includes heating proportional band Ph and cooling proportional band Pc Manipulated value MV includes manipulated value for heating MVh and manipulated value for cooling MVc Transistor output includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output Control output cycle includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle 1 Write data error code Un G0 C An error code or alarm code is stored in this buffer memory area For error codes and alarm codes refer to the following Page 367 Section 8 6 Page 370 Section 8 7 2 Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 CR According to the setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un1G 128 the decimal point position applicable in the following buffer memory areas is stored in this buffer memory area Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Temperature process value
160. ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy uuo xipueddy Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 22 i Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 24 Control response parameters Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 Page 116 Section 3 4 2 25 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 CHO MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting gt Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 change rate limiter temperature rise CHO AT bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 29 CHO Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 31 CHLI Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 Page 123 Sect
161. using the set value SV c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF When the set value is out of the range a write data error error code O00044 occurs and the Q64TCN operates with the previous set value Turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF after the error occurrence and setting a value within the range operate the Q64TCN with the new set value d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 53 CTO Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 C2 The heater current value which Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN detects is stored in this buffer memory area Values to be stored vary depending on the setting of CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 gt Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 Setting of CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 Store range When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 0 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0A When CTL 6 P H is used 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 2100 0 00 to 21 00A When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0A Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Point To perform the measurement of the heater current the following buffer memory areas need to be set CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 L gt Page 139 Section 3 4 2 54 Reference heater c
162. 0 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 8 2000 2000 300 to 1100 1 141 1100 300 300 0 to 300 0 oF 0 1 143 3000 3000 200 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 5 5000 2000 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 6 2000 2000 JPt100 300 to 900 1 140 900 300 300 0 to 300 0 oF 0 1 142 3000 3000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 0 to 4000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 0 to 12000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 0 to 16000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 0 to 20000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 0 to 32000 2 1 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas initialized automatically and return to the default value 0 gt Page 101 Section 3 4 2 12 d 2 as the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN For the following control mode and channel Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 cannot be set to 201 to 205 If these values are set a write data error error code LILILI44 occurs CH3 and CH4 in heating cooling control normal mode CH2 in mix control normal mode 100 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c Resolution The resolution is applied to the stored values and the set values of particular buffer memory areas as described in the following table Resolution Stored value Set value 1 Value in 1
163. 0 C CH3 Alert set value 1 350 C Alert set value 1 400 C CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C CH2 Set value SV setting 250 C CH3 Set value SV setting 300 C CH4 Set value SV setting 350 C Flag 1 for setting value write OFF Flag 2 for setting value write OFF E PROM if the auto tuning is normally completed The auto tuning is stopped when an alert is detected This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used gt Page 330 Section 7 2 2 7 b Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used L gt Page 328 Section 7 2 2 6 f Program that reads an error code This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used gt gt Page 330 Section 7 2 2 7 b 333 uoneunBijuo 5 e ejnpoyy eui Buis ueuM uomnouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuej nuuis uonounj uoisseJddns uano xeed piepuejs ZZ 7 2 3 When performing the heating cooling control This section describes the program example to perform the heating cooling control 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example to perform the heating cooling control QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F Cooling equipment
164. 0 to 100 Set value SV 1 gt Time CHO Setting change rate limit unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 a Batch individual setting of temperature rise and temperature drop Setting change rate limiter for the temperature rise and the temperature drop can be set in a batch or individually Select it on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following s Page 299 Section 6 2 When setting change rate limiter is set individually Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 is for the temperature rise The following table lists the buffer memory areas to be referred to Ajowaw Jayng ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t Batch Indivi Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name dual CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Batch Setting change rate limiter Un 52 Un 84 Un 116 Un 148 Setting change rate limiter Un 52 Un 84 Un 116 Un 148 temperature rise Individual Setting change rate limiter Un 564 Un 596 Un 628 Un 660 temperature drop For details on the function refer to the following s Page 190 Section 4 9 b Setting range Set 0 or the value within the range 1 to 1000 0 1 to 100 0 toward the full scale of the set input range When 0 is set the setting is disabled c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 119 29 AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 C The point set
165. 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 1 to 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows the proportional band P is 60 CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 100 10 0 Full scale x Proportional band P setting 400 0 C 200 0 x 0 1 60 C b Two position control Set the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph to 0 For details on control methods refer to the following Page 166 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 30 3 0 in all channels 105 Aiowaw Jejynq ay syieleq jueuuuBissy yng t Point If the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph is set to 0 0 0 the auto tuning cannot be performed To perform the auto tuning set proportional band P heating proportional band Ph to other than 0 For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following gt Page 176 Section 4 6 The proportional band P is the variation width of deviation E necessary for manipulated value MV to vary 0 to 100 The following formula shows the relationship between deviation E and manipulated value MV in proportional action MV Kp Kp is proportional gain The following formula shows proport
166. 00 C 1300 C 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature uu vidis Para 200 orc orc orc setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused channel temperature control is not 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle setting Heatin Set the pulse cycle ON OFF en pulse 30s 30s 30s 30s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output setting 311 peas epoo 10119 pue se yons pjepuels LZ uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e e npoyy eui BuisN ueuM ZZ Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the set iE 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C limiter value SV Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the set ro 0 0 C 0 C 0 C limiter value SV 1 Starting ST Self tuning setting Set the operation of the self tuning PID Constant Only 0 Do Not Run the ST 0 Do Not Run the ST 0 Do Not Run the ST 1 Upper Limit 7 Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert set value 1 CHO Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to 250 C Un G8 turns on 4 This setting is necessary only when the self tuning funct
167. 1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 IN2 2 MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ CJ Cold j nction temperature CJ Cold juncyton temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 280 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2 For the Q64TCTTBWN Terminal block for CT Terminal block for I O Terminal Common to the all Heating cooling control number Indication control modes Indication Standard control normal mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 NC NC Unused OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 CT1 CT input 1 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 pn CT1 CT input 1 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 CT2 CT input 2 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 ora CT2 CT input 2 COM Output common COM Output common 6 CT3 CT input 3 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 mm CT3 CT input 3 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 CT4 CT input 4 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Th
168. 1 Un G103 Un G135 m S Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 a CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 i CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 29 c S o oa 22 33 Oo 3 3 o lt Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 58 measured value CHO Sensor two point correction offset value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 59 corrected value CHO Sensor two point correction gain value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 Page 143 Section 3 4 2 60 measured value CHO Sensor two point correction gain value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 Page 143 Section 3 4 2 61 corrected value CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient dala Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 81 CHLI Simultaneous temperature rise dead Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Page 155 Section 3 4 2 82 time These 19 buffer memory areas are set automatically when the input range is changed and Setting change instruction YnB is turned OFF ON OFF during setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF 101 e When Auto setting at Input Range Change is set to 0 Disable on Switch Setting 299 Section 6 2 Set values in the buffer memory s Page 101 Section 3 4 2 12 d can be out of the setting range When the se
169. 100 Ki i as buffer memory read write interlock If the watchdog timer error is detected this flag turns off The Q64TCN stops controlling the temperature and the transistor output turns off The RUN LED turns off and ERR LED turns on 2 Setting operation mode status Xn1 This signal turns on at the operation mode off at the setting mode ON Setting operation mode OFF m bs instruction Yn1 PN Setting operation mode OFF Em status Xn1 Setting mode at Operation mode Setting mode Mode transition poweren during operation after operation During mode shift processing During mode shift processing Q seme gt Executed by the Q64TCN a Precautions during the mode shifting The mode shifting means the following timings From Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 OFF ON to Setting operation mode status Xn1 ON above figure Q From Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 ON OFF to Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF above figure During the mode shifting do not change the set values If the set values are changed during the mode shifting the module operation cannot be guaranteed Use Setting operation mode status Xn1 as an interlock condition for Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 when changing the setting 50 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point The conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgm
170. 138 Section 3 4 2 53 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is within the heater current range of the current sensor selected in CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 140 Section 3 4 2 55 Setting of CT selection Un G272 to Un1G279 Setting range When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 0 When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 When CTL 6 P H is used 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 2000 0 00 to 20 00A 0 to 1000 0 0 to 100 0A c Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0A for all terminals 57 CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 QHO Set the number of second winding turning number of the current sensor CT to be connected This buffer memory area is available only when CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 1s Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng ye b Setting range The setting range is 600 to 9999 c Default value The default values are set to 800 for all terminals 141 58 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 CD The measured value of temperature corresponding to the offset value of the sensor two point correction is stored in this buffer memory a
171. 14 CH1 Auto tuning status X18 E PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Error code D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV D55 CH1 Alert definition MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING b Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20 PLS MO Flag 0 for setting value write ON MO SET M J Flag 1 for setting value write ON M X10 X13 AF LTO U H3D J CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO U H7D K1 K J CH3 Unused channel setting Unused TO U H9D
172. 146 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 113 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion UnG551 UnG583 UnG615 UnG647 145 Sensor two point correction gain latch request UnG550 UnG582 UnG614 UnG646 144 CHLI Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value UnG547 UnG579 UnG611 UnG643 143 CHLI Sensor two point correction gain value measured value UnG546 UnG578 UnG610 UnG642 143 CHLI Sensor two point correction offset latch completion UnG549 UnG581 UnG613 UnG645 144 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch request UnG548 UnG580 UnG612 UnG644 144 CHLI Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value UnG545 UnG577 UnG609 UnG641 142 CHLI Sensor two point correction offset value measured value UnG544 UnG576 UnG608 UnG640 142 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 93 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 ziehe Re ER RE 104 195 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 119 Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 Un G84 UnG116 Un G148 119 Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 148 119 Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G76
173. 152 741 2 5 CH2 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 76 setting setting setting 9 78 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating 1 writ decimal unen Standard E e value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal UOI cooling e A 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 742 2E6 CH2 ii ae _ PV Mn 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value value 79 Page 153 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 4 2 77 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 743 2 7 CH2 PV ee 5 PV Me PV ee 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value value 79 Process value Process value Process value Page 153 744 2 8 CH2 PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling 0 R x x Section value value value 7 3 4 2 78 mo Derivative Derivative Page 153 Derivative action i 745 2 9 CH2 49 action action 0 R W x Section HORUM selection selection 9 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Page 154 746 2 CH2 temperaturerise System area System area 0 R W x Section group setting 3 4 2 80 Simultaneous Page 154 747 2EBy
174. 187 cereo nS Sade 136 155 Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 52 363 364 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 146 117 118 CHLI Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 Sites eae aes eee ues a ioe aa a ce 95 128 CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 143 114 CHO Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 6145 116 CHO Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 114 CHO Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 105 Cooling transistor output flag Un G712 to UMG715 edd ee EX wee es 92 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 110 Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 86 Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 777 153 CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 133 107 CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 94 127 CHLI Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 150 121 CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 154 123 CH
175. 2 gt Input temperature 213 4 JOSUSS pL a How to execute sensor two point correction when using GX Works2 Set this function on the Sensor Correction Function window XZ Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Sensor Correction Function 1 Select the module where sensor correction is executed and click 2 Click MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Change the operation mode For the Following module to the setting mode Are you sure you want to continue 0010 Q64TCTTN Caution Control function will be stopped during setting mode System that has to keep the temperature will stop and may exposed to unexpected temperature Please check whether the system is not affected by the stop and then execute the sensor correction 3 Click 4 Select the channel where sensor correction is Sensor Correction executed under Target Channel Execute sensor correction Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN 1 Target Channel CH1 2 Module Current Stalak Monitoring Status CH2 Input Range ple K Measured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Meaciire 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection 5 Select Sensor Two point Correction under Select the target ch and a Normal Sensor Correction Shel c lel Sensor Correction Function Selection One point Corre
176. 2 CH4 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 74 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal unen Standard E e value Write setting ix contr ilabili hexadecimal UOI cooling e A 3 availability sensor control id CT Sensor two point correction gain value corrected 143 643 2834 CH4 9 0 R W Section value 3 42 61 Page 144 644 2844 CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 144 645 285 CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 144 646 286 CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 145 647 2874 CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 648 288 to System area 659 293 Page 119 660 2944 CH4 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W Section 3 4 2 28 661 295 to System area 668 29 AT simultaneous i temperature risa simultaneous Page 145 669 29Du CH4 P System area temperature 0 R x x Section parameter 3 4 2 67 calculation flag calculation flag Page 146 Self tuni Self tuni 670 29Ey CH4 System area He
177. 2 43 Heater disconnection compensation function 131 170 All CHs Nu 0 R W x Section selection 3 4 2 44 171 ABy to System area 174 AEQ Page 132 175 All CHs Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 45 Page 132 176 All CHs CT monitor method switching 11 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 46 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated value MV for value of value of heating MVh heating MVh 177 1 CH1 output with eating Mt heating Mvh 0 R x x for output with for output with another analog another analog another analog module module module Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated P value of value of value MV for heati MVh heating MVh 178 B2 CH2 output with eating MVh 0 R x x for output with for output with another analog medals anotheranalog another analog module module 7 Page 133 Section anipulate Manipulated P Manipulated 3 4 2 47 value of value MV for heating MVh value Mv for B3y CH3 output with for output with output with 0 R x x another analog another analog another analog module 6 module module Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated lue MV f rei lue MV f NR value for heating MVh value for B4y CH4 output with for output with output with 0 R x x another analog another analog another analog module 6 module module P 134 181 B5 NGHE is media value for ou
178. 2 91 1340 53 42 91 1341 53Dy to System area 1343 53F yy 1344 540 161 i All CHs History 9 Error code error occurrence time Data 0 R x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1348 544 4 2 91 1349 545 to System area 1351 547 1352 5484 History Error code error occurrence time Data Page 161 to All CHs 0 R x x Section 10 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1356 54 4 2 91 1357 54 to System area 1359 54F 14 1360 550 161 History Error code error occurrence time Data 299 to All CHs 0 R x x Section 11 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1364 554 42 91 1365 5554 to System area 1367 557 1368 5584 P 161 History Error code error occurrence time Data bis to All CHs 0 R x x Section 12 structure is the same as that of History 1 3 4 2 91 1372 55 42 91 1373 55Dy to System area 1375 55 1376 560 Page 161 History Error code error occurrence time Data 3 i to All CHs 0 R x x Section 13 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1380 564 42 91 1381 565 to System area e 1383 567 1384 568 Page 161 History Error code error occurrence time Data g i to All CHs 0 R x x Section 14 structure is the same as that of Histo
179. 2 Alert set value 1 300 C TO Ut H66 K350 K J CH3 Alert set value 1 350 C TO H86 K400 K J Alert set value 1 400 C TO Ut H22 K200 K 1 CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C TO Ui H42 K250 K 1 CH2 Set value SV setting 250 C TO Ut H62 K300 K 1 CH3 Set value SV setting 300 C TO Ut H82 K350 K 1 CH4 Set value SV setting 350 C RST 1 1 Flag 1 for setting value write OFF RST M2 1 Flag 2 for setting value write OFF 330 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM if the auto tuning is normally completed The auto tuning is stopped when an alert is detected 10 FROM U1 H5 D55 X21 X10 X13 X11 AF 1 H SET SET SET SET X14 X10 Yi4 D558 V 1 MF RST SET X15 X10 Y15 056 8 1 RST SET X16 X10 Y16 057 8 _ lt sET X17 X10 Yi 058 8 WW 1 MF RST SET M10 M11 M12 M13 Y18 SET Y18 X18 RST MOV H0 D55 8 X10 14 X14 1 RST D56 8 X10 Y15 X15 RST D57 8 X10 Y16 X16 1 4 PO rT 058 8 X10 Yi7 X17 1 RST Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM K4 Y15 M12 Y17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON CH2 Auto tuning instruction ON CH3 Auto tuning instruction ON
180. 2 with version 1 73B or later supports this function 2 Setting method a In the setting item reduction mode Configure settings from Auto Refresh window The mode change to the setting item reduction mode can be performed from New Module window as well gt Page 298 Section 6 1 1 Open Auto Refresh window 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Fiter Display All z X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Auto Refresh a Chae D The data of the buffer memory is trans usejew ony t9 The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device d 2 Change from the normal mode to the setting item Edit Find Replace Compile M undo Ctrl z reduction mode fal Redo Suns If the setting item reduction mode is already set the ag cs d following operation is not required Ctrl e gt Peste ail Edit gt Setting Item Reduction Mode Auto Device Assignment Setting Item Reduction Mode If the mode is changed to the setting item reduction mode the box to the left of Setting Item Reduction Mode is checked Auto Device Assignment 4 Setting Item Reduction i To the next page 303 From the previous page 4 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Auto refresh for 0010 Q64TCTTN will be changed from Normal Mode to Setting Item Reduction M
181. 215 UONOUNY JOSUSS From the previous page MELSOFT Series GX Works2 X G MELSOFT Series GX Works2 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 To the next page 216 13 Click eres 14 Click Fixthe value 15 Click Cis 16 Click E 17 To back up the correction value in E PROM click 18 Click Cis From the previous page 4 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 x YD Correction value registration completed 4 Close MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Exit the sensor correction setting Are you sure you want to continue MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 19 Click 20 Click cose 21 Click 22 To shift from the setting mode to the operation mode click 1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 217 4 JOSUSS b How to execute sensor two point correction when using the program Follow the instructions below Setting start Set a temperature process value PV in Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 lt gt Page 143 Section 3 4 2 61
182. 4 to System area 207 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 208 D0 CH2 4 0 R W setting setting 9 setting 9 209 D14 Gus Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode P RNN 9794 setting 9 setting 9 setting T9 o Page 137 Section Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 3 4 2 52 210 D24 CH2 ag 0 R W 7 Ae be setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 211 D3 CH2 e eed 0 RW x setting setting setting 212 04 to System area 223 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 224 E04 CH3 ee PS din 0 R W x setting setting setting 225 E1 M Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 H x setting 9 setting 69 setting 9 9 Page 137 Alert 3 mod Alert 3 mod EO Alert 3 mode ert 3 mode ert 3 mode 226 E24 CH3 a Rr Ee 0 R W x 3 4 2 52 setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 227 E3y CH3 ARM en 0 R W x setting setting setting 228 4 to System area 239 70 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating 1 writ decimal unen Standard ii E Wi cc value Write setting n
183. 4 2 When Write error flag 2 is 363 8 43 When Hardware error flag Xn3 iS 363 8 44 When the auto tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not E dares der eterne t decades are 363 8 4 5 When the auto tuning does not complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 stays on and does not turn off lesse lee 364 8 4 0 When the self tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not scum RN EN EMEN Gh dade GN 364 8 4 7 When E PROM write failure flag XNA is 364 8 4 8 When CHD Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF is 365 8 5 Troubleshooting by Symptom 1 2 0 cece men 366 8 5 1 When the temperature process value PV is abnormal 366 8 6 Error Code Listi deeds em eU eb bol cue ds ac ce c ute pA ba 367 8 7 Alarmi Code Eis seno os e eeu a beide dr ge oui a dE Ao 370 8 8 Q64TCN Status ii RIAL VP es whee Id rus 372 APPENDICES 374 Appendix 1 Addition and Change of Functions 374 Appendix 1 1 Additional function 374 Appendix 1 2 Change 5 374 Appendix 2
184. 58 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 87 Sensor correction function selection Un G785 C9 Select the method of the sensor correction for each channel b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following C gt Page 209 Section 4 14 a Setting range Normal sensor correction one point correction 14 Sensor two point correction b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value Default value is set to Normal sensor correction one point correction 88 Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 9 This flag checks whether the temperature conversion has started properly for each channel The following values are stored in this buffer memory area During conversion or unused CH 1 First temperature conversion completed This flag becomes During conversion or unused CH during temperature conversion or for unused channels When the first temperature conversion is completed and the temperature process value PV is stored in the buffer memory First temperature conversion completed 14 is set The following figure shows the channel assignment of this area b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
185. 6 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 s Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF 7 s Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 Point P The following table lists the conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment Q Executed x Not executed Setting opera PID control Stop mode setting tion mode PID continuation forced stop Temperature Un G33 Un G65 instruction flag 169 instruction YnC to judgment Un G97 Un G129 Yn1 YnF Stop 0 x Setting mode at Stop 0 Continue OFF ON Monitor 1 power ON 1 Alert 2 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode Stop 0 Continue Stop 0 in operation 1 ON Monitor 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 x Stop 0 OFF ON Monitor 1 Alert 2 moa Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation p 0 itor 1 2 Stop 0 x Continue 1 ON Monitor 1 Alert 2 1 Refer to lt Page 50 Section 3 3 2 2 for each timing If CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Disable 1 temperature judgment is not executed even though the condition above is satisfied gt Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 88 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 4 Te
186. 6 analog module module 693 2B5 System area 694 2B6 System area Temperature 695 2B7 CH2 System area System area conversion 0 R W x setting 4 Temperature 150 696 2B8 CH3 System area versn System area 0 R W x H y setting y Section 13 3 4 2 71 Temperature 697 2B9 CH4 System area Mee st System area 0 R W x setting 698 2 CH1 Number of moving averaging 2 R W x 699 2BBy CH2 Number of moving averaging 2 R W x 151 Section 700 2BCj CH3 Number of moving averaging 2 R W O 3 4 2 72 701 2BDy CH4 Number of moving averaging 2 R W x 702 2BEy pa System area EX 703 2BFy System area Manipulated Manipulated 704 2C0 CH1 System area value for value for 0 R x x cooling MVc cooling MVc Manipulated Manipulated value for 705 2C 1 4 CH2 System area value for 0 R x x cooling cooling MVc 7 MVc Page 89 Manipulated Section value for 3 4 2 5 706 2C24 CH3 System area System area 0 R x x cooling MVc 9 Manipulated value for 707 2C34 CH4 System area System area 0 R x x cooling MVc 9 76 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal unen Standard ii E Wi cc value Write setting
187. 63 CH3 band P settin band Ph band P 30 R W x Section 9 ips setting 3 42 15 setting 107 Int It i 100 64 CH3 Integral time 1 n Integral time 1 240 R W o Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 107 ivative ti Derivative time ivative ti i 101 654 CH3 Derivative time Derivative time 60 RW x Section D setting D setting D setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value Alert set 102 66 CH3 Alert set value 1 g i 0 R W Alert set value Alert set value 103 67 CH3 Alert set value 2 2 2 0 R W 108 Section Alert set value 104 68 CH3 Alertset value 3 g set value 0 R W 3 4 2 18 Alert set value Alert set 105 69 CH3 Alert set value 4 s 4 She eee Neue 0 R W Heating upper imi pper limi pper limi 106 6Ay CH3 limit output 1000 R W output limiter D Ma output limiter x 110 limiter Section me imi 3 4 2 19 107 6 CH3 Lower lites Wo 0 R W x output limiter output limiter Output variation Output Output Page 11 108 6C CH3 variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section limiter setting 6 setting setting 3 4 2 20 Page 113 109 6Dy CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 Adjustment Adjust t Adjustment 1 ns 113 ah sensitivity sensitivity i 110 6E4 CH3 sensitivity dead 5 R W x Section dead band dead ban
188. 64TCN Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB This operation stops the operation of the Q64TCN Point If PID continuation flag UnXG169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off 405 ZS410M X9 peunBijuoo ueuM G S xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy xipueddy 2 Removing a module System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Mentor cma Mode System monitor Online module change Main Base Main Base 0000001 1030 0040 Base Information List Operation to Selected Module Man Base Module Information List Main Base Power Base spy Instaled Base m Base Model Name Base siots Supply Legend Parameter Network No Type Base PEE rers Dc Pont Address Station No Sot 2 Power 0000 Master Online Module Change Operation Module Change Execution I
189. 7 Un G783 93 157 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un G749 Un G765 Un G781 155 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 155 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 154 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 154 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 156 CHO Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 idc deeem a Ae A 103 CHO Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to UnG697 veo RIEN RA A RR 150 CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 ides Dare i ated nd techn Aa 89 CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un1G692 150 CHO Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to UniG20 Di EO ERR 91 CHO Transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 92 CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 126 CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 138 110 158 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 122 Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 364 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 195 Cold junction temperat
190. 73 111 CT2 CT selection 11 274 1124 CT3 CT selection 11 275 113 CT4 CT selection Page 140 0 R W x Section 276 114 CT5 CT selection 3 4 2 55 277 1154 CT6 CT selection 278 116 CT7 CT selection 279 117 CT8 CT selection 280 118 CT1 Reference heater current value 281 119 CT2 Reference heater current value 1 282 11 CT3 Reference heater current value 1 283 11By CT4 Reference heater current value Page 141 0 R W x Section 284 11Cy CT5 Reference heater current value 3 4 2 56 285 11Dy CT6 Reference heater current value 286 11 Reference heater current value 287 11 CT8 Reference heater current value 71 JSI yu wu isse oww NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM eating wri decimal CUNT Standard 7 9 E iol value Write setting te Reference ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT 288 120 CT1 CT ratio setting 1 289 1214 CT2 CT ratio setting 1 290 1224 CT3 CT ratio setting 1 291 123 CT ratio setting Bod 800 R W x Section 292 124 5 CT ratio setting 1 3 4 2 57 293 1254 CT6 CT ratio setting 1 294 1264 CT7 CT ratio set
191. 8 3 a the conditions for disconnection detection are satisfied even if correction is performed by 2096 with a voltage drop by 4096 or more Consequently disconnection is detected c Setting method Set Heater disconnection compensation function selection Un G170 to Use the heater disconnection compensation function 1 lt s Page 131 Section 3 4 2 44 267 4 uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq 9gz v 4 To clear the disconnection detection status Disconnection detection is disabled by restoring the disconnection status and turning Heater disconnection detection 612 of Un G5 to Un G8 from 1 ON to 0 OFF lt gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 The timing when a heater turns on differs depending on the setting for the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 268 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 29 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function Transistor output errors can be detected using this function The current sensor CT for heater disconnection detection is used to check for errors of when transistor output is off A heater current process value and heate
192. 8 upper limit output limiter value When lower limit output limiter value gt upper limit output limiter value write data error error code LILIL15 occurs In addition if the setting is out of 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 the setting value a write data error error code CHO Lower limit output limiter Un G43 00044 occurs When the error occurs the Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 following situations occur Write error flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO CHLI Heating upper limit output limiter If the setting is out of the setting value a write data Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 UnG138 error error code 00044 occurs When the error occurs the following situations occur Cooling upper limit output limiter 0 to 1050 0 076 to 105 076 Un G721 UnG737 UniG753 Write error flag Xn2 turns on E Pie DRE The error code is stored in Write data error code rin Un GO Point inthe standard control Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 is invalid even it is set In the heating cooling control lower limit value is not used When Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un1G139 is set to other than 0 a write data error error code OOO2 occurs 110 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS b Two position control gt gt Page 166 Section 4 3 1 The following table lists Enable D
193. 9 setting 79 181 juauubisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM eating 2 wri decimal CUNT Standard 7 value Write setting b Reference T ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 758 2F6 CH3 PV scaling Px sealing PN scaling 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value 9 value Page 153 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 4 2 77 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 759 2F74 CH3 scaling scaling aH 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value 99 value Process value iran Mond Process value Page 153 760 2 8 CH3 PV scaling scaling pv scaling 0 R x x Section value E pe value 3 4 2 78 Derivative Derivative Page 153 Derivative action 761 2 9 CH3 action action 0 R W x Section ti age EL selection 9 selection 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 154 temperature d 762 2 CH3 temperature rise System area 0 R W x Section ing R 3 4 2 80 group setting setting 80 Simultaneous 154 763 2FBy CH3 temperature ris
194. 9 Un G111 Un G143 are used for heating in the heating cooling control Manipulated value MV ON x F OFF Transistor output Control output cycle l The ON time of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated value MV 1 calculated by PID operation If the manipulated value Mv is constant a pulse of the same cycle is output repeatedly 1 For the heating control output cycle the manipulated value for heating MVh is used For the cooling control output cycle manipulated value for cooling MVc is used Ex When 700 70 is stored in CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 and the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 100 100s 100s x 0 7 7096 70s The ON time is 70s The transistor output turns on for 70s and off for 30s per 100s Control output cycle Control output cycle Control output cycle 100s 100s i 100s i i gt gt gt ON Manipulated value Manipulated value Manipulated value MV 70 MV 70 MV 70 70s 70s 70s Transistor OFF output a Setting range The setting range is 1 to 100 1s to 100s b Two position control gt gt 166 Section 4 3 1 The setting is invalid c Default value The default values are set to 30 30s in all channels 114 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS
195. APTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q64TCN 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes applicable systems 1 Applicable CPU modules and base units and number of mountable modules The following table lists CPU modules and base units applicable to the Q64TCN and the number of mountable Q64TCN Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Applicable CPU module Number of modules Applicable base unit Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Main base Extension Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN unit base unit Q00JCPU Up to 16 Up to 8 Basic model QO0CPU o QCPU Up to 24 Up to 12 Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Up to 64 Up to 32 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Process CPU GiZPHOPU Up to 64 Up to 32 O O Q25PHCPU Programmable Q12PRHCPU controller CPU Redundant CPU Up to 53 Up to 26 x Q25PRHCPU Q00UJCPU Up to 16 Up to 8 QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Up to 36 Up to 18 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Up to 64 Up to 32 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU CPU type CPU model High Performance model QCPU suieis g ajqeolddy 2 Up to 24 Up to 12 Unive
196. AT This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise AT simultaneous temperature rise b1 parameter cannot be calculated by simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status AT b2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise disable status AT cannot be performed b3 to b15 fixed to 0 Unused 4 Indicates the values of Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Point This area is enabled only for the following channels CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following Page 238 Section 4 20 68 Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 Perform operation setting of self tuning with this buffer memory area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following Page 223 Section 4 18 a Setting range 0 Do not run the ST 1 Starting ST PID constants only 2 Starting ST Simultaneous temperature rise parameter only 3 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameter 4 Starting ST plus vibration ST PID constants only Th
197. C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused Heating control output cycle 30s 05 305 305 setting Cooling method setting 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled Cooling control output cycle 30s 05 305 305 setting Overlap dead band setting 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Upper Limit Input 2 Alert 1 mode setting Aert 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Alert set value 1 250 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X12 Write error flag X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Error code Devices where data is written D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV by auto refresh D55 CHE Alert definition M20 to M23 Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag 337 Buiooo Buneeu eui Burwood ueuM EZZ 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojg eui Buis ueuM b Parameter setting
198. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position name control control control control control CHO Control output cycle Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 setting Heating The setting Page 114 control output Un G47 UmG79 Un G111 Un G143 1 to 100 1s to 100s Section cycle setting isiignored 3 4 2 23 CHLI Cooling control output Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 UnG770 cycle setting CHLI Configure the setting in the range from 100 to 100 Page 152 Overlap dead Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 10 0 to 10 0 toward the full scale of the set input Section band setting range 3 4 2 74 Configure the setting in the range CHO Manual The setting from 1000 to 1000 The setting is Page 152 reset amount Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 _ a 100 0 to 100 0 a Section setting IS Ignored toward the full scale 3 4 2 75 of the set input range 1 Point 172 When outside the setting range a write data error error code 00044 occurs The Q64TCN automatically sets optimum PID constants if the following functions are used Auto tuning function Page 176 Section 4 6 Self tuning function 5 Page 223 Section 4 18 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 4 Manual Reset Function The position of the stable condition in P control or PD control can be shifted manually using this function By shifting the proportional band P an offset remaining deviation is manually reset The offset is reset b
199. CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance hermometer B hermometer B thermometer B 40 IN2 B2 CH2B CH2 Resistance MT2B Monitor 2 resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance hermometer B hermometer B thermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 42 IN2 b2 CH2b CH2 Resistance MT2 b Monitor 2 resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 43 IN3 A3 CH3A CH3 Resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 44 INA A4 CH4A CH4 Resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 45 IN3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 46 IN4 B4 CHA B CH4 Resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 17 IN3 b3 CH3b CH3 Resistance CH3b CH3 Resistance CH3b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 48 INA b4 CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 286 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 Wiring This section describes the wiring precautions and module connection examples 5 4 1 Wiring precautions External wiring that is less likely to be affected by noise is one of the conditions for a highly reliable system that fully utilizes the Q64TCN This sect
200. CH2 CH3 CH4 Exampe2 0 3 2 1 H edP T Sroup2 Group3 3 groups 0000 0011 0010 0001 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 33 3 33 3 33 3 f CH1 CH2 CH3 Whether the transistor output is executed or not can be selected by CH4 Unused channel setting Un G157 x Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 236 100 In case of default value applied CH4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Two timing The following table shows two examples Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 1 Example 1 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 2 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Not divided The following shows the relationship between groups and the values 96 of CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 RCM PS adele Divided into 209 eee 1906 2 groups k l 0010 0010 0001 0001 50 50 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Exampe2 0 0 2 1 H Divided into Group 1 oe 0000 0000 0010 0001 7 v 2 gt o CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 5 i CH1 CH2 la 100 In case of default value applied Whether the transistor output is executed or CH3 not can be selected by CH3 Unused channel setting Un G125 or Unused channel 100 In case of default value applied setting Un G157 CHA Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 3
201. CN differs depending on the following settings Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 s Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 e Setting operation mode instruction 1 gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 s Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF gt Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 e Output Setting at CPU Stop Error Switch Setting 299 Section 6 2 For details refer to the following PID 5 Page 170 Section 4 3 6 Temperature judgment gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 Alert judgment gt Page 203 Section 4 12 5 b Default value The default values are set to Monitor 1 in all channels Point Default values are set to Monitor 1 Therefore channels which temperature sensors are not connected to detect sensor input disconnection and the ALM LED blinks When Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 control of the corresponding channel is not performed For channels which temperature sensors are not connected to Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 must be set to Unused 1 103 Aiowaw Jejnq ay jo Sed 3 jueuuuBissy yng t 104 14 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Q Set the target temperature value of PID control a Setting range
202. Cold junction temperature x Un G182 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 49 compensation selection Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 Un G185 Un G186 Un G187 Page 136 Section 3 4 2 51 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 CHO Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 set for each current sensor CT Page 139 Section 3 4 2 54 388 APPENDICES Buffer memory area name Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Reference CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 set for each current sensor CT Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 set for each current sensor CT Page 141 Section 3 4 2 56 389 suuo 104 SUOIIIPUOD xipueddy 1edoje eq ueuM eunpeooug xipueddy Appendix 4 3 The following table shows the operations of the Q64TCN when an online module change is performed O Executed x Not executed Operations when performing an online module User operation 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y signals turned on by the sequence program
203. Comparison of the Q64TCN with the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and QOATCRTBW e e ud ce eed 375 Appendix 2 1 Compatibility between the Q64TC and 64 377 Appendix When Using GX Developer and GX 378 Appendix3 1 GX Developer operation 378 Appendix 3 2 GX Configurator TC operation 381 Appendix 4 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer 386 Appendix 4 1 Precautions on online module change 386 Appendix 4 2 Conditions for online module 387 Appendix 4 3 Operations when performing an online module 390 Appendix 4 4 Online module change procedures 391 Appendix 4 5 When GX Configurator TC was used for the initial setting 392 Appendix 4 6 When sequence program was used for the initial setting 396 Appendix 5 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX 2 401 Appendix 5 1 Precautions on online module change 401 Appendix 5 2 Online module change 5 402 Appendix 5 3 Operations of when performing an online module change 403 Appendix 5 4 Online modu
204. Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 143 Jeynq ay siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 62 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 8 This request is for storing temperature process value PV as sensor two point correction offset value to the following buffer memory area CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 58 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Setting range 0 No request 1 Latch request b Default value The default values are set to No request 0 in all channels 63 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch completion Un G549 Un1G581 Un G613 Un G645 Gag When sensor two point correction offset value is stored 1 is stored in this buffer memory area which is Latch completed 1 When Sensor two point co
205. FF gt ON 94 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c ON OFF timing for Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 gt Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 The following figure shows ON OFF timing of this flag for Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 For CH1 ON CH1 Auto tuning status Xn4 OFF J CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 CH1 Write completion flag OFF gt b4 of Un G31 ony Z CH1 Write failure flag OFF b12 of Un G31 Auto tuning completion Auto tuning completion Write failure Write failure Executed in a sequence program ecu Executed by the Q64TCN When the data writing to E PROM is completed normally Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 turns on CHO Write completion flag b4 to b7 of UnXG31 turns off when Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 is set to Disable 0 from Enable 1 When the data writing to E PROM fails Write failure flag b12 to b15 of Un G31 of the corresponding channel turns on and the Q64TCN operates with PID constants calculated in the previous auto tuning The LED status remains CHO Write failure flag b12 to b15 of Un G31 turns off when the data writing of the corresponding channel is completed n
206. G 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
207. G123 Un G155 is not calculated PID constants setting when the characteristics of a controlled object fluctuate Users perform auto tuning again to change PID constants The Q64TCN automatically changes PID constants Available control mode The standard control and heating cooling control The standard control only 223 uonounJ DuiunJles 81 2 Starting ST and vibration ST Two types of self tuning ST are available depending on the state of the control system starting ST and vibration ST Starting ST Self tuning is performed immediately after the control is started or when the set value SV is changed Vibration ST Self tuning is performed when the control system in a stable state has become oscillatory due to reasons such as disturbance Temperature process value PV A Starting ST Mibration ST 4 a How to set starting ST Select one of the following four setting values in CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 The default is Do not run the ST 0 lt gt Page 146 Section 3 4 2 68 Starting ST PID constants only 1 Starting ST Simultaneous temperature rise parameter only 2 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameter 3 Starting ST plus vibration ST PID constants only 4 b How to set vibration ST Set the following in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un
208. G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Executed in a sequence program posee gt Executed by the Q64TCN 244 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 The simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The control response at the time of temperature rise is constantly monitored during self tuning and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated based on the characteristics of a controlled object For details on the self tuning function refer to the following 7 Page 223 Section 4 18 a Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The Q64TCN operates as following Operation of the 64 When self tuning is normally started up Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is normally calculated Then Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un1G671 is turned 1 ON Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off and the module is shifted to the PID control ON CHLIAuto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 OFF zm Control status pip control x Self tuning PID control CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise de
209. G750 Un G766 Un G782 The execution state of the simultaneous temperature rise is monitored 0 Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 1 Simultaneous temperature rise in process During control by the simultaneous temperature rise function Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is stored in this buffer memory area The following figure shows the timing when the value is set to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 In the following CH1 and CH2 are set to group 1 s Page 154 Section 3 4 2 80 Temperature is raised based on the i Temperature is raised 1 i Simultaneous 1 1 1 1 1 based on the PID The temperature rise constants of each completion times match i temperature rise a hannel for this interval T t function for this interval emperature process value PV cee CH1 Set value SV CH2 Set value SV Temperature rise start Group 1 Time ON Setting operation mode OFF x instruction Yn1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status 734 and 0 gt 4 1 4 0 CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G750 CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 and 0 1 CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G18 1 i 1 i i 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 t i 1 1 i i T arrival point i 1 1 1 1 i T ji 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 i 1 f i 1 U 1 1 gt
210. GX Configurator TC GX Configurator TC cannot be used when the redundant CPU accessed via an intelligent function module on an extension base unit from GX Developer Consider a communication path which does not go through the intelligent function modules on the extension base unit Connect a personal computer with a redundant CPU using a communication path shown below Main base unit Sele ortam Saia Eol eere Extension base unit 4 GX Configurator TI cannot be used e Direct connection to use the CPU Connection through an intelligent function module on the main base unit Through Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module 1uepunpes NOLP9O eui Bus z z 33 2 3 How to Check the Function Version and Serial Number The function version and serial number of the Q64TCN can be checked on the rating plate front part of a module or system monitor of a programming tool 1 Checking on rating plate The rating plate is on the side of the Q64TCN a For the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN MITSUBISHI Serial number first six digits Function version SERIAL 1402120000000000 Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial number first six digits Function version Relevant regulation standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN 34 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Check
211. H4 CHLI Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 CHO Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 CHO Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 Each alert mode for alert 1 to 4 corresponds to alert set value 1 to 4 b Alert set value Set the value where Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to Un G8 to Alert 4 b11 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on according to the set alert mode Up to four values can be set for each channel Set them in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory area name Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 Reference Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert set value 1 to 4 corresponds to each alert mode for alert 1 to 4 204 8 Setting the alert dead band CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS When the temperature process value PV or deviation E is close to the alert set value alert status and non alert status may alternates repeatedly due to inconsistent input Such case can be prevented by setting an alert dead band a Setting method Set a value in Alert dead band setting Un G164 s Page 129 Section 3 4 2 38 Ex When the
212. Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SH 080483ENG 13JR73 Specifications of the hardware CPU modules power supply modules base units extension cables and memory cards system maintenance and inspection troubleshooting and error codes QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080807ENG 13JZ27 gt Qn H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080808ENG 13JZ28 gt Functions methods and devices for programming 2 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging 5 SARET PRECAUMON S 1 5 ek ee lec EE 6 COMPLIANCE WITH AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 7 RELREVANMMANUA E E E TL Hc PUE 8 MANUATEPAG E O RGANIZATION et 14 SERS t A D E rre EAA m NORTE 16 PAGKING3li TEE ter onere E E E A EE
213. I and derivative time D 169 pours jonuo 6 Condition to perform PID control The condition to be able to perform PID control depends on the settings of the followings e Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 s Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF lt s Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 s Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 The following table shows the relationship between the status of PID control 1 and each of the settings above O Performed x Not performed Setting operation mode instruction PID continuation CHO PID control forced stop Stop mode setting Un1G33 Un G65 Control status of 7 flag Un G169 instruction 1 Yn1 g Un G97 Un G129 PID control YnC to YnF Setting mode at Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x power ON Operation mode OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Continue 1 operating ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x Stop 0 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x poting modo OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation Continue 1 P ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x 1 Here this is the generic term for two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control 2 For the timin
214. IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ CJ Cold J nctioni temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold juriction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple Mix control Mix control Indication normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 ex p COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 IN2 2 MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH
215. K1 K CH4 Unused channel setting Unused M1 M2 X10 X13 Yi Hi E LAS TO u H20 K2 Ki J CH1 Input range 2 TO HOF K30 K 1 CH1 Heating control output cycle setting 30s TO ii fone K30 CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting 30s TO H2D3 K 3 K CH1 Overlap dead band setting 0 3 TO 0 k Cooling method setting Air cooling cooling capacity low TO u HOCO Ki K 1 CH1 to CH4 Alert 1 mode setting Upper limit input alert SET 1 1 Setting change instruction ON M M2 X10 X13 Yi Y1B X1B ki AF MF M RST Y1B Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 1 Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X10 X13 X1B S TF TO Ut H26 K250 Ki CH1 Alert set value 1 250 C 2 TO Ul H22 K200 Ki 1 CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C o 5c RST M1 Flag 1 for setting value write OFF g 2 42 RST M2 Flag 2 for setting value write OFF 3 2 lt o PED ze Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM if the auto tuning is gt T a normally completed The auto tuning is stopped when an alert is detected 25 2 This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self js e gt tuning and error code read 7 gt Page 317 Section 7 2 1 7 b a Program that reads PID constants from E7PROM gL ze A 34 This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standa
216. N 1 Restrictions when setting parameters on GX Works2 When the module added to a project on GX Works2 and the mounted module are different the following restrictions apply Module added to a eR Mounted module Restriction project Q64TC Q64TCN The sequence program cannot be executed The sequence program can be executed Q64TCN Q64TC However only functions supported by the Q64TC can be used 2 Restrictions when online module change is performed When the online module change is performed between the Q64TC and Q64TCN the following restrictions apply Details of online Ar Restriction module change Online module change can be performed Q64TC Q64TCN However only functions supported by the Q64TC can be used Q64TCN gt Q64TC Online module change cannot be performed 3 Restrictions when changing modules or applying a sequence program When modules are changed between the Q64TC and Q64TCN and a sequence program is applied the following restrictions apply O Possible x Not possible How to change modules and how to Restriction apply a sequence program Module change Applying a sequence program Q64TC gt Q64TCN o o Q64TCN Q64TC x x 1 Only functions supported by the Q64TC be used M amp alHOolv90 1 9 pue 91790 uee eq Ayiqnedwog xipueddy gt o Ee 2 2 x N o o 3 O a o o 2 o S A
217. O Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 143 114 CHO Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 131 105 CHO Heating transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 Morea aoe EU LAM nt es due A a 92 CHO Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 138 110 CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 MMC PU Gotta idler RM 96 CHO Integral time l setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 132 107 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 156 125 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 124 CHO Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 139 110 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 152 122 MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 ise 118 Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 bank ed wa p qued ir oe d Re E RU e a ol a 89 CHLI Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 133 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to 89 Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to WANG 16 si n dnce e RI tha nhe REOR 89 CHLI Manipulated value of cooling MVc for o
218. OH Un G0 Error reset instruction Yn2 OFF Sauce gt Executed by the Q64TCN 4 Hardware error flag Xn3 This flag turns on when hardware error occurs in the Q64TCN 51 sjeubis ndut jo sjiejeq BINPOW eui peuejsue1 sjeubis 5 Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 This signal turns on when auto tuning of each channel is set by the user or when the Q64TCN performs self tuning Auto tuning status Heating Channel Standard ae status cooling Mix control control control CH1 Xn4 Xn4 Xn4 ON The auto tuning self tuning is being CH2 Xn5 Xn5 Xn5 performed CH3 Xn6 Xn6 Xn6 OFF The auto tuning self tuning is not being CH4 Xn7 Xn7 t Xn7 performed or is completed 1 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to gt Page 164 Section 4 1 3 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to 5 Page 164 Section 4 1 3 2 a Performing auto tuning To perform auto tuning turn Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 on from off While auto tuning is in process this signal is on and turns off at the completion of the auto tuning Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF Auto tuning status During auto tuning Xn4 to Xn7 Executed in a sequence
219. ON CHO Auto tuning status d Xn4 to Xn7 or 2 Control status pip control Self tuning X PID control CHLI Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data i Un1G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time i Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status OFF b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected gt Executed by the Q64TCN Point To restore Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 to 0 OFF set the following Set Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 to Do not run the ST 0 To calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter execute self tuning again after the temperature has dropped 246 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS d Stopping of calculation for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter Some characteristics of a controlled object do not lead to the optimum simultaneous temperature rise parameter In addition an abnormal termination of self tuning causes the temperature control module to stop the calculation processing For the conditions of an abnormal termination of self tuning refer to the following s Page 231 Section 4 18 8 e How to set the simultaneous temperature rise parameter using self tuning Select one of
220. OP ul HSE Ki K J instruction Requested TOP u1 HJE Ki K CH3 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Requested r CH4 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP ul HOE Ki Ki instruction Requested a _ Read bit data from b7 to b0 of EPPROM s LFROM U1 HIF K2M20 K J PID constants read write completion flag to M20 to M27 M20 X10 2 r CH1 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP instruction Not requested M21 X10 2 r CH2 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP ul HSE Ki instruction Not requested M22 X10 2j 0 r CH3 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP ul K instruction Not requested M23 X10 2 r CH4 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP ul HOE K instruction Not requested MOV D50 Kayso 1 Output a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F x22 as AAA ser Yi2 J Error reset instruction ON Yi2 X12 H D50 HO 1 RST Yi2 J Error reset instruction OFF END 328 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X14 to X17 CHO Auto tuning status X18 E PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto
221. PID control the response speed responding to Simple two degree of Page 188 the change of the set value SV can be selected from three levels freedom Section 4 7 The simple two degree of freedom PID control can be realized Derivative action Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable 189 selection function derivative action for the fixed value action and the ramp action Section 4 8 Change rate setting of the set value SV per set time unit when Setting change rate i Page 190 aoe this value is changed The batch setting or individual setting can be O O limiter setting function Section 4 9 selected for the temperature rise and drop Moving averaging process can be set to a temperature process value PV With this function the fluctuation of temperature Moving averaging process values PV can be reduced in electrically noisy 191 process to a temperature environments or in the environments where temperature process O O ae 4 P 0 i process value PV values PV fluctuate greatly The moving averaging process can be disabled to hasten the response to the change of temperature process values PV Temperature process The temperature process value PV can be converted to the set Page 192 value PV scaling O O width and this value be imported into the buffer memory Section 4 11 function The modules goes to the alert status when the temperature P
222. PU system Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Version 1 62Q or later Version 7 or later Version 8 or later Version 1 10L or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Version 4 or later Version 6 or later SWOD5C QTCU or later Single CPU system Version 1 87R or later Version 8 68W or later Version 7 10L or later Version 1 13P or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Version 8 45X or later Version 1 14Q or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Q02PH Q06PHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q12PH Q25PHCPU Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Single CPU system Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU lt Z iple CPU system Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDHCP U Single CPU system z Z iple CPU system Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Single CPU system iple CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Single CPU system iple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q13 Single CPU system UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU lt iple CPU system If installed in a MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 1 62Q or later Version 8 76E or later Version 8 484 or later Version 8 76E or late
223. PV Un G9 Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 4 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 CHLI Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 14 CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G711 Un G103 Un G135 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 18 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 29 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 31 Loop disconnection detection dead Page 125 Section 3 4 2 Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 band 34 Sensor two point correction offset Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 value measured value 58 CHO Sensor two point correction offset Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 value corrected value 59 Sensor two point correction gain value Page 143 Section 3 4 2 Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 measured value 60 Sensor two point correction gain value Page 143 Section 3 4 2 Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 corrected value 61 Simultaneous temperature rise Page 154 Section 3 4 2 Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 gradient data 81 86 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Stored values differ depending on the setting in Input range Un G32
224. Press Update Error History to display the content shown under Latest Error Code as No 1 Module s Detailed Information Monitor Status Module Monitoring Model Name Q64TCTTN Address 0010 Mount Position Main Base 1 Slot A Product Information 13o 1000000000 Function version Production Number Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Product information Fuse Blown Status p Status of I O Address Verify Agree Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type m Remote Password Setting Status Error Information Latest Error Code Update Error History 02 5 Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid Error Clear 1 Error Code 02 5 0392 Error and Solution Display Format HEX 0285 Solution Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value DEC The error history is sequentially displayed From old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 372 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Hardware information On the Module s Detailed Information window click H w Information a H W LED information The following information is displayed Item Value Condition that results in 00014 RUN Operating normally same as the RUN LED
225. Reference 7 IX contr i ili hexadecimal cooling e A 3 availability sensor control te CT Manipulated Manipulated value of value of 708 2CA CH1 System area cooling cooling 0 R for output with for output with anotheranalog another analog module module Manipulated Manipulated value of value of i cooling MVc 709 2C5 CH2 System area cooling g MNC 0 R x x for output with for output with anotheranalog another analog module module 7 Page 133 MOS Section anipulate 3 42 47 value of 710 2 6 cooling MVc 2 CH3 System area for output with System area 0 R x x another analog module Manipulated value of 711 2C7 CH4 S cooling MVE S 0 R x H ystem area for output with ystem area x another analog module 9 Cooling Cooling 712 2 8 CH1 System area transistor transistor 0 R x x output flag output flag Cooling Cooling 713 2C9 CH2 System area transistor transistor 0 R x x output flag output flag Page 92 p Section Muni 34 2 7 714 2 CH3 System area transistor System area 0 R x x outpu flag 8 Cooling 715 2CBy CH4 System area transistor System area 0 R x x outpu flag 9 716 2CCy to e System area 718 2 Cooling Cooling Page 151 719 2CFy AllCHs System area method setting method setting 0 R W x Section 9 9 3 4 2 73 Cooli Cooli Grid D 105 720 2D0 CH1 System area is PE 30 R W x O Section band Pc band P
226. SPECIFICATIONS 49 Cold junction temperature compensation selection Un G182 QB Select whether to perform the cold junction temperature compensation using a standard terminal block or not to perform the cold junction temperature compensation a Supported modules e Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN b Setting range 0 Use Standard Terminal Block 1 This setting cannot be used 2 Not used the cold junction temperature compensation c Default value The default value is set to Use Standard Terminal Block 0 50 Control switching monitor Un G183 8 The setting contents of the control mode selection set on Switch Setting are stored in this buffer memory area The control mode in operation can be confirmed The stored values and the contents are shown as below 0 Standard control 1 Heating cooling control normal mode 2 Heating cooling control expanded mode 3 Mix control normal mode 4 Mix control expanded mode Select the control mode on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following s Page 299 Section 6 2 For details on the control mode refer to the following c Page 162 Section 4 1 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t 135 136 51 CHO Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G187 C Select the auto tuning mode from the following two modes according to the controlled object to be used Auto tuning mode Description
227. Self tuning in execution lt T gt ON CHO Auto tuning status ae Xn4 to Xn7 OFF ON CHLI PID auto correction status i bO of Un G575 Un G607 OFF Only when PID constants were changed p gt Executed by the Q64TCN 226 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS a Conditions for starting ST Starting ST is executed under the following conditions When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on the first time after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode the second time or later after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled only when the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer before the mode is shifted When the set value SV is changed only when the temperature process value PV before the set value SV change has been stable for two minutes or longer Point If the starting ST is started when the temperature process value PV is not stable incorrect PID constants may be determined Execute the starting ST after the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer 221 uonounJ DuiunJles 81 5 Operation with vibration ST This section explains the operation of when a control response is oscillatory vibratio
228. Setting 0010 Q64TCTTN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error CH Output Setting at CPU Stop Error CH1 CH2 0 CLEAR CH3 O CLEAR CH4 O CLEAR Control Made Selection 3 Mix Control Normal Mode Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disable x Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting r Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable Moving Averaging Process Setting is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Item Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 3 Mix Control Normal Mode Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable 5 Contents of the initial setting CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300
229. Setting method Set the timing in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 For the setting refer to the following s Page 158 Section 3 4 2 86 uonouny uoisseJddng Juang yeed 6 237 4 20 simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Standard This function allows several loops to reach the set value SV at the same time Simultaneous temperature rise can be performed on up to two groups separately by setting a group of the channels where temperature rises at the same time This function is effective for controlled objects where the temperature rise should complete at the same time Aligning the time for temperature rise completion enables an even control of temperature without partial burning or partial heat expansion In addition the channel reaching the set value SV first does not need to be kept warm at the set value SV until the last channel reaches leading to energy saving Ex The simultaneous temperature rise function used and not used in CH1 Temperature process value PV A CH1 Set value SV Useless energy CH2 Set value SV CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV jas eee X V Arrival point Arrival point Time No simultaneous Simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise Nosimultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise 238 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 1 Operation of the simultaneous temperatu
230. TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Control output Transistor output Number of temperature input points 4 channels module Type of usable temperature sensors the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from gt Page 40 Section 3 1 1 wiring resistance of 10 Ambient temperature Full scale x 0 3 Indication 25 5 Ambient temperature 0 to Full scale x 0 7 55 Cold junction Temperature process Accuracy temperature value PV 100 C or Within 1 0 C Within 1 0 C compensation More accuracy Temperature process us Within 2 0 C Within 2 0 C ambient value PV 150 to 100 C temperature Temperature process a gt 0 to 55 C Within 3 0 Within 3 0 value PV 200 to 150 Sampling cycle 500ms 4 channels constant independently of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 1005 Input filter OFF Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF pulse or two position control PID constants range PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band P 0 0 to 1000 0 0 Two position control Integral time 1 0 to 3600s set 0 for P control and PD control Derivative
231. The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range s Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 When a value which is out of the setting range is set a write data error error code O00044 and the following situations occur Write error flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit e One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 15 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 7 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 1 1 2 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 Set proportional band P heating proportional band Ph cooling proportional band Pc to perform PID control In the heating cooling control set heating proportional band Ph to Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 a Setting range Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Proportional band P setting 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Heating proportional band Ph setting
232. Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Stored value Setting contents Resolution is 1 0 Nothing after decimal point Resolution is 0 1 1 First decimal place 3 Alert definition Un G5 to 8 Bits corresponding to alerts detected in each channel become 1 b15 614 613 612 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 to b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Bit data b15 are fixed to 0 x Bit data from b7 to b2 are fixed to O Target bit number Flag name Alert definition Temperature process value PV has exceeded the temperature bO CHO Input range upper limit measurement range of the set input range Temperature process value PV has fallen below the temperature b1 CHLI Input range lower limit measurement range of the set input range b2 to b7 fixed to 0 Unused b8 CHO Alert 1 Alert 1 has occurred gt gt Page 194 Section 4 12 b9 Alert 2 Alert 2 has occurred 7 Page 194 Section 4 12 b10 Alert 3 Alert 3 has occurred 7 gt Page 194 Section 4 12 b11 Alert 4 Alert 4 has occurred gt 194 Section 4 12 CHLI Heater disconnection b12 i Heater disconnection has been detected gt Page 265 Section 4 28 detection Loop disconnection b13 Loop disconnection has been detect
233. When the setting item reduction mode is set consecutive devices are automatically set to the grouped setting items For details on the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh refer to the following 3 Page 303 Section 6 4 uoneunBijuo wass puepue js e ui ejnpoyy y Buis ueuM ZZ pees epoo 10118 pue BuiunJjes Buun oyne se uons joujuoo piepuels 313 314 d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online gt Write to PLC or Power OFF ON e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning X Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt LC Auto Tuning PID control operation status Process value PV _ Set value 5 m EM Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh PID constant current value Integral time setting Derivative time D setting ion detection judgment time Auto tuning stop Status Result of automatic backup of PID constant CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING f Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode X23 YIB Change to the setting mode or u CY11 i the operation mode Program tha
234. a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal Standard E e value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal UOI cooling e A 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Process value Process value Process value PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page 152 773 305 CH4 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 76 setting setting 9 setting Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 774 306 CH4 Pv PV NE id TE 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value 6 value Page 153 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 4 2 77 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 775 307 4 CH4 ie M 3 ev WE 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value 6 value Process value Process value Process value Page 153 776 308 CH4 PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling 0 R x x Section value value value 3 4 2 78 Derivative Derivative Page 153 Derivative action 777 309 CH4 action action 0 R W x Section ti 6 Seen selection 9 9 selection 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 154 i temperature i 778 30Ay CH4 temperature rise System area PM 0 R W x Section tting 3 4 2 80 group setting setting 80 Simult Simultaneous 154 779 30By CH4 temperature r
235. ad time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 p T i value CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status OFF b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected gt Executed by the Q64TCN uonouny esr einjejeduie snosueynwis OZ 245 b Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The condition is the same as that for the starting ST gt Page 227 Section 4 18 4 a When the self tuning cannot be started up the Q64TCN operates as following with the PID control continued CHO Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un1G671 is turned 1 ON The following shows how the Q64TCN operates when self tuning is not executed CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Control status ID control ON CHU Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected c When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions When the maximum gradient is not determined When the saturation time for output is short The Q64TCN turns Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 to 1 ON
236. ade All registered devices will be cleared Unable to restore the cleared data Are you sure you want to continue Unable to read date correctly by Following versions if you write data to PLC under Setting Item Reduction Mode GX Configurator TC GX Works2 versions older than version 1 73B No 0010 Q64TCTIN Auto_Refresh Display Filter Display All Item E Transfer to CPU Write data error code E Measured value Alert setting Alert definition Temperature process value Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Temperature rise judgment flag Transistor flag Heating side transistor output flag Set value 5V monitor Manipulated value M Heating side The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Fiter Display Al F Item I CH2 CH3 Transfer to CPU The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Write data error code E Measured value Alert setting D51 Alert definition 051 053 Temperature process value D55 057 Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated D59 D61 value Temperature rise judgment flag 063 D65 Transistor output flag Heating side transistor D67 D69 output flag Set value SV monitor 1071 073 Manipulated value M Heating side Transfer Direction Intelligent Function Module gt PLC Buffer
237. ads 194 Alert function process value PV or deviation E meets the condition set in O ad anta Section 4 12 v i 45 1511 uonoun4 Z Enable or disable ME Heating Item Description Standard d g Reference cooling control control When the deviation E continues for a long time the PID operation T result manipulated value MV by the integral action can be Page 208 RFB limiter function O O prevented from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated Section 4 13 value MV If a difference between a temperature process value PV and an actual temperature occurs due to the measurement status the error can be corrected Select a correction method from the following two types Sensor correction Normal sensor correction one point correction function The 209 function percentage of the full scale of the set input range can be Section 4 14 corrected as an error corrected value Sensor two point correction function An error is corrected by setting any two points corrected offset value and corrected gain value When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data Auto setting at input Page 220 is changed automatically so that errors outside the setting range range change Section 4 15 does not occur Input output with another Data can be input output using another analog module
238. ag CHLI alert 2 mode setting X01 Operation mode status CHLI alert set value 2 X02 Write error flag CHLI alert 3 mode setting X03 Hardware error flag CHLI alert set value 3 X04 CH1 auto tuning status CHLI alert 4 mode setting X05 CH2 auto tuning status CHLI alert set value 4 X06 CH3 auto tuning status Alert dead band setting x 0 196 X07 CH4 auto tuning status Alert delay count 2 CHLI loop disconnection detection judgment time X08 EPROM write completion flag Unit s X09 Default value write completion flag CHLI loop disconnection detection dead band E2PROM write failure flag heater disconnection alert setting Heater disconnection output off time current error XOB Setting change completion flag 1 Heater disconnection compensation function XOC CH1 alert flag selection XOD CH2 alert flag CT monitor method switching XOE CH3 alert flag CTLI heater current process value XOF CH4 alert flag CTLI channel assignment setting Y01 Operation mode command CTLI CT selection YO2 Error reset command CTLI reference heater current value 384 APPENDICES Function Description Monitor test Y04 CH1 auto tuning start command Y05 CH2 auto tuning start command Y06 CH3 auto tuning start command Y07 CH4 auto tuning start command Y08 2 backup start command YO9 Default
239. age 39 Differences between auto tuning and self tuning 223 Discontinuation of self tuning 230 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function PTT 255 During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting Un G571 145 During the mode shifting 50 420 G H E PROM backup instruction 8 57 E PROM write completion flag Xn8 53 E2PROM write failure flag 54 E PROM s PID constants read write completion flag 31 94 Effect from wiring resistance of 1ohm 40 ERREMEDi tie qw 278 361 Error clear oi 275 ErrOriGOd oe 24 Drs dup deberet baa AME 372 Erorcodelist llle 367 Error code 369 Error history issu afud Ren es 272 Error history 1 to 16 Un G1280 to Un G1407 161 Error reset instruction 2 57 Expanded mode 164 External dimensions 416 External input 16 External output 16 Fixed value 16 Forward action 24 252 usse ca Gad ees ede weds 16 Function extension bit monitor Un G787 160 Function list 3 Gus aia wal reddas 45 Function version
240. age 107 Section 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time 1 A value twice greater than the one in CHLI Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 is automatically set However if this setting is O s when auto tuning is in process the loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored 177 4 Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto tuning 178 By setting the following buffer memory area to Enable 1 at the start of auto tuning the calculated value Ls Page 177 Section 4 6 3 is automatically backed up into E PROM on completion of auto tuning CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 s Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 To read the calculated value lt gt Page 177 Section 4 6 3 from E PROM to the buffer memory set the following buffer memory area to Requested 1 E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 gt Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 Point To use the PID constants stored in the buffer memory also after the power is turned off follow the methods below Use the initial setting of GX Works2 gt 300 Section 6 3 Keep the PID constants in E PROM and transfer them when the power is turned on from off or when the CPU module is released from the reset stat
241. age 112 Section 3 4 2 20 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 CHO Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 CHO Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 24 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 CHO AT bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 Un G185 Un G186 Un G187 Page 136 Section 3 4 2 51 A 3 Storing the calculated value after auto tuning 2 After auto tuning is completed the calculated values are stored into the following buffer memory areas a a Buffer memory address a Buffer memory area name Reference 3 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 E CHLI Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 7 CHO Heating proportional band Ph Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 setting Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 CHLI Cooling proportional band Pc Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 setting Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 P
242. age 169 Section 4 3 4 PID control 7 Page 169 Section 4 3 5 For P control and PD control the manual reset function is activated 77 gt Page 173 Section 4 4 1 Two position control Two position control is a control method that uses 0 manipulated value MV and 100 manipulated value MV Turning on and off the manipulated value MV repeatedly the temperature process value comes close to the set value SV then is kept constant Point By the setting in Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 the chattering of transistor output under two position control can be prevented Set a dead band toward the set value SV in CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 113 Section 3 4 2 22 a Standard control The module operates as follows outside the range of CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 Condition Transistor output status The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band ON The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band OFF Temperature process value PV A X Adjustment sensitivity dead band Set value SV gt Time Transistor output OFF 166 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS b Heating cooling
243. ailure flag b6 CH3 Write completion flag b14 CH3 Write failure flag b7 CH4 Write completion flag b15 CH4 Write failure flag b ON OFF timing for CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 gt Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 The following figure shows the ON OFF timing of this flag for CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 For CH1 CH1 E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 CH1 Read completion flag bO of Un G31 CH1 Read failure flag b8 of Un G31 Read completion Read failure Read completion Pre gt Executed by the Q64TCN When the data reading from E PROM is completed normally Read completion flag bO to b3 of Un G31 of the corresponding channel turns on Read completion flag bO to b3 of Un G31 turns off when CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 is turned off from on When the data reading from E PROM fails Read failure flag b8 to b11 of Un G31 of the corresponding channel turns on and the Q64TCN operates with PID constants before the data reading The LED status remains CHO Read failure flag b8 to b11 of Un G31 turns off when the data reading of the corresponding channel is completed normally When the data reading fails try it again by turning CHO E PROWM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 ON gt O
244. alert using the set value SV Page 197 Section 4 12 2 d Within range alert gt 198 _ u Section 4 12 2 e Within range alert using the set value SV gt Page 198 Section 4 12 2 e 207 uogound ueiv ziv 4 13 RFB Limiter Function 208 The RFB reset feed back function operates when deviation E continues for a long period of time In such occasion this function limits the PID operation result manipulated value MV from an integral action so that it does not exceed the valid range of the manipulated value MV This function operates automatically on execution of PID control therefore a setting by the user is unnecessary When the PID operation result exceeds the upper limit output limiter value the Q64TCN operates as follows The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the upper limit output limiter value by feeding back the exceeded value to the integral value When the PID operation result is below the lower limit output limiter value the Q64TCN operates as follows The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the lower limit output limiter value by feeding back the lacking value to the integral value CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1 4 Sensor Correction Function Common When a difference occurs between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature due to reasons such as a measuring condi
245. alue write ON M1 X10 X13 If TO Ut H3D K 1 CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO Ul H5D KO Ki 1 CH2 Unused channel setting Used tO Ut H7D K 1 CH3 Unused channel setting Used TO u1 H9D 4 1 CH4 Unused channel setting Used M1 M2 X10 X13 Y d A i 1 f M TO H20 2 K1 CH1 Input range 2 TO 01 H40 K2 K J CH2 Input range 2 TO u1 H60 K2 K J CH3 Input range 2 TO Ui H80 K2 Ki F CH4 Input range 2 TO Ut H2F K20 K 1 CH1 Control output cycle setting 20s TO Ut 20 K 1 CH2 Control output cycle setting 20s TO Ut H6F K20 K F CH3 Control output cycle setting 20s To Ut H8F K20 K 1 CH4 Control output cycle setting 20s CH1 Alert 1 mode setting TO u1 K1 K Upper limit input alert CH2 Alert 1 mode setting TO Ui Ki Ki 1 EA Upper limit input alert E CH3 Alert 1 mode setting u1 Ki K CHA Upper limit input alert Alert 1 mode setting TO u1 HOFO Ki K T dir Upper limit input alert Mi M2 X10 X13 Y11 Peak current suppression control l T 1 H310 H4321 Ki F group setting t TT i i T 4 s 3 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Group 4 SET Y1B 1 Setting change instruction ON M1 M2 X10 X13 Y Y1B X1B A H 1 H p RST Y1B 1 Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X10 x13 X1B RS xe XT0 Ul H26 K250 K J CH1 Alert set value 1 250 C TO Ul H46 K300 K J CH
246. annels 75 Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 QD Set the amount of the proportional band P to be moved For details on the manual reset function refer to the following Page 173 Section 4 4 a Setting range Set the value within the range of 1000 to 1000 100 0 to 100 0 for the full scale of the set input range Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 The setting range is the same between the standard control and heating cooling control b Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0 in all channels The default value is the same between the standard control and the heating cooling control 76 CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 D Set enable disable of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following Page 192 Section 4 11 a Setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to Disable 0 in all channels 152 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 77 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un1G742 Un G758 Un G774 QED CHO Process value PV scaling upper limit
247. ardware failure occurred in Q64TCN Others Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 2 When flashing suuni JO Seusey Q3 1 NNY ueuM LES Check Item Action Check the error code list gt Page 367 Section 8 6 and take actions described Has a write data error occurred 361 8 3 3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes 1 When turning on Check Item Action Is CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF ON Check CHLI Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate corrective action Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 2 When flashing Check Item Action Has the temperature process value PV exceeded the temperature measurement range set as the input range Change the setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 to a setting in the temperature measurement range to be used gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Is there a channel where no temperature sensor is connected Set the channel where no temperature sensor is connected to unused in CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 gt Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 Has a loop disconnection been detected Check for a load disconnection externally operable device failure and sensor disconnection 362 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 4 Checks Using Input Signals This section describes troubleshooting using input si
248. are not met 2 Setting method Set the function as shown below 1 Set CHO Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 gt Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 4 It takes time before the temperature starts rising due to the dead time of the controlled object Consider the dead time of each object and set the value 2 Set Enable 1 to the bit of During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting Un G571 for the channel where the loop disconnection detection is to be performed gt Page 145 Section 3 4 2 66 3 Turn on from off Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 Setting example for the control to rise the temperature by 200 C for 40 minutes It takes approx 24 seconds to rise the temperature by 2 C Also the dead time of the controlled object must be added as the time required before the temperature starts rising Therefore when assuming the dead time of the controlled object is 6 seconds set 30 24 seconds dead time of the controlled object to Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 uoljoun4 uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq Ly Bung ez v 255 256 3 When an alert occurs or does not occur 4 If an alert for the loop disconnection detection occurs Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF and Loop disconnection detection 613 of Un G5 to Un G8 turn on and Alarm code 030 is stored in
249. as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used 5 Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 2 2 Standard control peak current suppression function simultaneous temperature rise function This section describes the program example where the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F Heater CH1 Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 to 1300 C Heater CH4 Object to be controlled EA Type K thermocouple 0 C to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 319 uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM ZZ uomnouni esu snoeuejnuuis uonounj uoisseJddns Juano xeed piepuejs ZZ 2 Programming condition 320 Program example where the peak current suppr
250. as the set value SV in the auto tuning can be rearranged by using this buffer memory area The auto tuning function determines each PID constant by performing the two position control toward the set value SV and making a temperature process value PV hunting Set CHD AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 when an overshoot caused by the hunting is improper The auto tuning is performed with having the AT point the point rearranged by the setting as its center When the auto tuning is completed AT bias is not added and a control is performed toward the set value SV For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following gt Page 176 Section 4 6 Ex When AT bias is set to minus value reverse action Temperature process value PV A Set value SV P AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 AT point gt Time a Setting range The setting range is from full scale to full scale The setting range depends on the input range setting L gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un1G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C resolution 0 1 The setting range is 6000 to 6000 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CHO Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 57 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Se
251. as the setting window are different from those on GX Works2 1 Window display method The following table lists the window display method on GX Configurator TC Window name Application Initial setting Parameters such as the input range and set value SV can be set Auto refresh setting Buffer memory data can be transferred to specified devices Monitor test Monitor test can be performed on buffer memory and I O signals GX Developer screen projectisanple project LD Edit mode MAII Merge data ls Check parameter Window for intelligent function module parameter setting module selection Intelligent function module utility C Program FilesWE Inteligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Tools Intelligent function Select a target religant fncton module utility Start ume Module type Temperature Control Module Start ladder logic test lodule model name Qe4TCTT Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh 0S0 G64T CTT Initial setting Auto refresh rtelllig utility Utility list Change display color Initial setting Initial setting window Initial setting Module information Module Temperature Control Module Statl ONo 0090 Module model gt 1 Auto refresh Auto refresh setting window
252. ase Parameter I O Network No Master Base Module Base Model Name Supply Type Status Senes Model Name Point Type Point Address Station No PLC m mE RE _ ey een mo Legend Error Major Error Moderate Error Minor Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Print Prodi mation Li System Error History Close Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 8 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring window Device C Device 10 x ce Prograi G Buffer Memory ModuleStat 0010 T HEX addre D Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Display format Modify Value Il 2 9 32 32 ast g 16 Details Save Address o e e ele e e e elelele e o o o o oje e ele e e e ole e o o o o o o olololololololololololalololololo gt ofololololo Display and select the pre recorded device and click Modify value B 125 0 126 0 127 0 i28 0 129 0 130 0 131 0 132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ojojoj 5 o o olo o o o elofololololo oj oe o jelo e e e o o 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 EB Ss s o ojejo slelelo e o
253. asurement ranges such as upper lower limit for temperature adjustment control D Forward Action 1300 C loc 0 0 0 0 1300 oc O Used 0 0 0 0 05 0 Slow 0 Stop 0 Forward Action c c 0 0 0 0 1300 oc 1 Unused 3 0 0 0 240 5 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 0 0 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C oc 1 Unused 3 0 0 0 2405 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 0 0 hermocoupleK Measured Temperature Range D to E Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple Set the temperature sensor K Measured K Measured K Measured K Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature ey 200 0 0 0 C setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the d ch t t trol i t 0 Used 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle setting Heatin Set the pulse cycle ON OFF i Mi ied pulse 30s 0s 30s 30s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output setting
254. ater current for each channel is corrected using a correction value When the corrected value is larger than the heater disconnection alert setting value heater disconnection is found Ex When CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 and the differences between CHO Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values CH1 2 CH2 5 CH3 1 CH4 17 The following table lists the result CHO Heater Difference between Difference between TA disconnection alert Heater current Correction CHO Heater current and Disconnection setting Un G58 Un G90 and reference heater value reference heater current detected Un G122 Un G154 current value value after correction CH1 2 7 2 5 Not detected CH2 5 0 5 5 Not detected 80 5 CH3 1 6 1 5 Not detected CH4 17 22 17 5 Detected 266 In the table above the correction value is 5 Heater disconnection is detected based on the differences of 7 for CH1 0 for CH2 6 for CH3 and 22 for CH4 When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 disconnection is detected only for CH4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Ex When CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 and the differences between CHO Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values CH1 16
255. ature process value PV goes outside the range that is judged as stable b Precautions If vibration ST is executed on the following objects incorrect PID constants may be determined Controlled objects where a disturbance periodically occurs Controlled objects with strong mutual interference 228 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 Conditions where self tuning is not executed This section explains the conditions where self tuning is not executed a The control method is not the PID control method When the control method is one of the four methods other than the PID control two position control P control PI control PD control self tuning is not executed In addition Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON When all PID constants of target channels turn to a value other than 0 self tuning is enabled Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Oscillation detected Time Self tuning disabled Self tuning in execution gt CHO Proportional band P setting x Setting 0 Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Setting 0 g Integral time I setting X Setting 0 Un G36 UniG68 Un G100 Un G132 _ Setting ids CHO Derivative time D setting Setting 0 Pg Setti 0 Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 UnG133 ON Self tuning disable status OFF b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671
256. ble Setting Change Rate Limiter O Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable Moving Averaging Process Setting is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Set value Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setti t Input uto setting at Input Range 0 Disable Change Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving A ing oving veraging Process 0 Enable Setting CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 4 Display the Q64TCTTN initial setting window click Clear Value For Gray Cells and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter V 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Item O Basic setting Input range Set value SV setting Unused channel setting E Control basic parameter setting ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 200 C O Used Proportional band setting Heating control 3 0 proportional band s
257. ble cooling characteristic of a device For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following s Page 176 Section 4 6 1 Setting method Set the characteristic in Cooling method setting Un G719 s Page 151 Section 3 4 2 73 Point An auto tuning calculation formula to find PID constants is determined based on this setting therefore configure this setting before executing auto tuning Air Cooled and Water Cooled roughly indicate the level of the cooling ability When a device is too cooled even if it is set to air cooled set the module to Water cooled 1 4 When a device is not very cooled even if it is set to water cooled set the module to Air cooled In general the ability of water cooling is higher than that of air cooling and cooling may be too strong if the same PID constants as air cooling are used Some time is required until the control becomes stable upon the initial start up disturbance or setting change Therefore in auto tuning PID constants for when the module is set to Water cooled 14 become larger than those for when the module is set to Air cooled 258 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 26 Overlap Dead Band Function In heating cooling control the temperature process value PV significantly changes due to slight heating or cooling control output when the heat produced by a controlled object and natural cooling are being balanced Consequently excessive temperature o
258. ble lists the buffer memory areas that can be used with this function the terminals used correspond to the buffer memory areas in the table CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Buffer memory area name Buffer memory Reference MT2 Monitor CH2 MT3 Monitor CH3 MT4 Monitor CH4 Write data error code Un GO Page 86 Section 3 4 2 1 CHLI Decimal point position Un G2 Un G3 Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 Alert definition Un G6 Un G7 Un G8 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 Temperature process value PV Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 4 Cold junction temperature Un G29 Page 93 Section 3 4 2 9 process value CHO Input range Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Sensor correction value Page 113 Section 3 4 2 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 setting 21 CHO Primary delay digital filter Page 115 Section 3 4 2 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 setting 24 Cold junction temperature Page 135 Section 3 4 2 3 Un G182 compensation selection 49 me Page 135 Section 3 4 2 Control switching monitor Un G183 50 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 offset value measured value 58 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 offset value corrected value 59 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 143 Section 3 4 2 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 gain value measur
259. c 3 4 2 15 setting setting Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 110 721 2D1 CH1 System area limit output limit output 1000 R W x Section limiter limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Cooling control Page 114 722 2D24 CH1 System area output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section setting setting 3 4 2 23 Page 152 Overlap dead Overlap dead 723 2D3 CH1 System area gle heat 0 R W x o Section band setting band setting 3 4 2 74 JSI yu wu isse Jeynq NOLYT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM eating wri decimal CUNT Standard T ei value Write setting b Reference T ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro A 5 availability sensor control 152 724 204 CH1 Manual reset amount setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 75 Process value PV scaling function enable disable Page 152 725 2D5y CH1 uM 0 R W x Section setting 3 4 2 76 726 2D64 CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value 0 R W x 153 Section 727 2D7 y CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value 0 R W x 3 42 77 Page 153 728 2D8 CH1 Process value PV scaling value 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 78 Page 153 729 2D9 CH1 Derivative action select
260. c setting 3 E2PROM write availability 4 Reference CT 788 3144 to 1278 4 IL System area 1279 4FFy to 4095 FFF Buffer memory for error history C Page 83 Section 3 4 1 2 4096 1000 to 53247 CFFF System area 2 4 5 6 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 82 This value is stored when Default setting registration instruction Yn9 is turned on The default value varies depending on the mode For details on the default values refer to the following 3 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs R Reading enabled W Writing enabled This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is changed Enable disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting For details refer to gt 220 Section 4 15 Whether writing to the E2PROM by turning off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 is enabled is indicated in this column For details refer to gt Page 270 Section 4 30 TT indicates the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN RT indicates the Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN Available only when the heating cooling control expanded mode is set on Switch Setting With other models thi
261. cal overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 425 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation The SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 426 SH NA 080989ENG B SH NA 080989ENG B 1408 MEE MODEL Q64TCTTN RTN U E MODEL CODE 13JZ60 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDIN
262. case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANT Y TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restricti
263. ccupied points 2 32 points 2 slots I O assignment Vacancy for 16 points 16 intelligent points 16 points slot I O assignment 16 intelligent points Connection terminal 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks Applicable wire size 0 3mm to 0 75mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 Crimping terminal with sleeve is unavailable Internal current consumption 0 29A 0 33A Weight 0 20kg 0 30kg Outline dimensions 27 4 W mm x 98 H mm x 112 D mm 55 2 W mm x 98 H mm x 112 D mm 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy suoneouioeds eoueuuoLeg Le Ex Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 C 5 2 C 2 When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used the device numbers of the I O signals increase by 16 points depending on how many free points the left hand side slots have Hence as I O signals are given as indicated below in this manual read them according to the module used Ex When 0 is set as the start I O number Yn1 is assigned as follows When the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCRTN is used Y1 When
264. ced stop of PID control is released After the release PID operation starts from the beginning 170 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 7 Buffer memory areas related to control method The following table shows the buffer memory areas related to control method Buffer memory address Setting range Buffer Two memory area a P PD Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position name control control control control control Thermocouple 1 to 4 11 to 28 36 to 48 100 to 117 130 Page 96 to 132 201 to 205 Input range UnG32 Un G64 UnG96 UnG128 Section Platinum resistance thermometer 5 to 8 53 54 140 to 3 4 2 12 143 201 to 205 TP Page 104 CHLI Set value Set a value within the temperature measurement range of Un G34 Un G66 UmnG98 Un G130 Section SV setting the set input range 3 4 2 14 CHO Proportional Un G35 Un G67 Un G99_ Un G131 Configure the setting in the range from 0 to band P setting Fix the 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 toward the full CHO Heating setting to 0 Page 105 scale of the set input range proportional Un G35 Un G67 Un G99_ Un G131 Section band Ph setting 3 4 2 15 CHO Cooling The setting Configure the setting in the range from 1 to proportional Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 4 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 toward the full is ignored band setting scale of the set input ra
265. ces are correct Turning off on and off the switch has no influence After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction APPENDICES Appendix 4 2 Conditions for online module change To perform an online module change a CPU module a MELSECNET H remote I O module the Q64TCN GX Developer and a base unit as listed below are required 1 2 3 4 5 The Q64TCN with the function version C supports the online module change since it was first released CPU module A Process CPU or Redundant CPU is required For the precautions on the multiple CPU system configuration refer to the following 11 QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System For the precautions on the redundant system configuration refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System MELSECNET H remote I O module A module with function version D or later is required GX Developer GX Developer version 7 10L or later is required To perform an online change on a remote I O station GX Developer version 8 17T or later is required Base unit When a slim type main base unit 5 is used an online module change cannot be performed When an extension base unit Q5L1B that does not require the power supply module is used an online
266. cess value PV CH2 Un G9 Un G10 4 cH Un G11 Un G12 4 34 Heating Cooling Heating Cooling pee Shae 4 control control control control PID heating Manipulated Mvh y value for heating MVh p L2H Object to be Heating Object to be Un G13 Un G14 Heating controlled transistor output controlled Un G15 Un G16 Manipulate value transistor gt Manipulated for cooling MVc output value for pl Lic QH cooling CHO Manipulated MVc p value for cooling MVc gt L2c q ooling transistor outpu ooling transistor outpu Un G704 Un G705 Cooling ist put Cooling t ist put Set value Un G706 Un G707 gt SV amp Initial setting S S Output module TO instruction Setting i 2 aus UniG34 Unices pictus oda et value Unc98 Un G130 SV in the same network as the Q64TCN b0 of CHO Heating Heating DRE ae UE transistor output flag transistor output Output signals Un G21 Un G22 OUT instruction I Y20 TB1 L3H Un G23 Un G24 Manipulated value 1 I r 21 for heating MVh TB2 L4H ra v2 Manipulated value TB3 L3C of Coolin Cooling transistor output transistor output rr Y23 for cooling TB4 L4C Un G712 Un G713 OUT instruction Un G714 Un G715
267. change Online module change Operation r Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 5 NES Module name Q64TCTTN Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please tur off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 When the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 394 Appendix 4 5 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on Dunes y JO pesn SEM 91 soyesnByuoy XD USUM GLP xipueddy 14edoje eq ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy uuo xipueddy 393 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mounta new module in the same slot and connect Online module change the external cabl
268. control The module operates as follows outside the range of CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 UnG142 5 Heating transistor Cooling transistor Condition output status output status The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of ON OFF the adjustment sensitivity dead band The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of OFF ON the adjustment sensitivity dead band Temperature process value PV A xX Adjustment sensitivity x dead band Set value SV gt Time ON Heating output L1H v OFF Cooling output 4 on L1C OFF c Three position control Three position control can also be performed by setting a dead band For more details refer to the following Page 261 Section 4 26 3 d Setting method Set 0 in the following buffer memory areas Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 K gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 1 s Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 167 jonuo 2 P control is a control method in which the manipulated value MV is determined proportional to the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and set value SV a Standard control The manipulated value is 5096 in the following conditions
269. ction Module Selection Sensor Correction Function E Module Selection Start XY Address Q64TCTTN MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Change the operation mode for the Following module to the setting mode Are you sure you want to continue 0010 Q64TCTTN Caution Control function will be stopped during setting mode System that has to keep the temperature will stop and may exposed to unexpected temperature Please check whether the system is not affected by the stop and then execute the sensor correction MELSOFT Series GX Works2 W Switched to setting mode Sensor Correction Execute sensor correction Monitoring Status 0010 Q64TCTTN 1 Target Channel CH1 2 Module Current Sta ee SESE 4 Target Module 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection Select the target channel a Bor ion One point Correction C Sensor Two point Correction Normal Sensor Correction Sensor Two point Correctic Only Normal Sensor Corr Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW i To the next page 210 1 Select the module where sensor correction is executed and click 2 Click 3 Click 4 Select the channel where sensor correction is executed under Target Channel 5 Select Normal Sensor Correction One point Correction under Sensor Correction Function Selection From the previous page CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS
270. ction 1 Action Each type of derivative action operates as shown below CHO Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 Measured value derivation 0 Fixed value action Disturbance Y Action Ramp action Set value SV This setting effectively prevents the temperature from being affected by disturbance though the performance Deviation derivation 1 ot Temperature to follow the set value Pad process value cun below SN PV Fixed value action Ramp action Disturbance Set value SV y Temperature process value PV This setting allows the temperature to follow the set value well though the disturbance effect is great 2 Setting method Set a value in Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 UONOUNY uonoejes uonoy eAneAueq gY For details on the setting refer to the following s Page 153 Section 3 4 2 79 189 4 9 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function When the set value SV is changed the change rate in the specified time unit can be set on Setting Change Rate Limiter The user can select whether to set this rate for temperature rise and temperature drop individually or at once 1 Setting method a Batch individual setting for temperature rise and temperature drop Select the value on Switch Setting For details on the setting refer to the following
271. ction Normal Sensor Correction Sensor Two point Correction Sensor Two point Correction Ex Only Normal Sensor Correctior Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TC 4 Normal Sensor Correction One point Correction i To the next page 214 From the previous page 4 Measure Temperature 30C Value PV 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection 4 4 Sensor Two point Correction Correction Offset Value 40 H Correction Gain Value Gain Setting MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Execute the Offset Setting Please press Yes after setting the appropriate correction offset value to the target channel Measure Temperature 70C Value PV 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection 4 Correction Gain Yalue 55 Settable temperature range MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Execute the Gain Setting Please press Yes after setting the appropriate correction gain value to the target channel To the next page CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 Monitor Measure Temperature Value PV and enter the corrected offset value 1 7 Setthe temperature process value PV to be input under Correction Offset Value Then click Offset Settin 9 Click 10 Monitor Measure Temperature Value PV and enter the corrected gain value 11 Set the temperature process value PV to be input under Correction Gain Value Then click Gain Setting 12 Click
272. current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnection reference heater current value x Heater disconnection alert setting is within 0 1A under one of the following situations CTLI CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CTL 12 S36 8 0 0A to 100 0A is used 0 CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CT ratio setting is used 0 0A to 100 04 2 In addition when CTL 6 P H used 0 00A to 20 00A 1 has been set and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnection reference heater current value Heater disconnection alert setting is within 0 01A Write data error error code 00044 occurs 3 Heater disconnection compensation function When heater voltage is dropped heater current is reduced The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN detect heater disconnection by measuring heater current therefore an accidental alert may occur due to a voltage change caused by a reduced heater voltage The heater disconnection compensation function offsets the amount of heater current reduced heater disconnection compensation preventing disconnection from being detected a Calculation formula for heater disconnection compensation Calculate Heater current reference heater current value The largest positive value is the correction value When there is no positive value the value with the smallest gap is the correction value The he
273. d band setting 2 3 4 2 22 setting 9 setting Heating control Page 114 111 6Fp CH3 output cycle 30 RW x Section d 9 setting 3 4 2 23 Page 115 112 70 CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 65 1811 jueuuuBisse oww NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal current Standard 7 un trei value Write setting b Reference Ix ntr i ili hexadecimal control cooing coniro T 12 availability sensor control 4 CT Control Control Control Page 116 113 71 CH3 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 3 4 2 25 Page 117 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN 114 724 CH3 28 0 R W x Section mode shift mode shift mode shift 3 4 2 26 Page 118 MAN output MAN output 115 73 cH3 MEM MAN output 0 R W x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page 119 116 74 CH3 limiter temperature rise 0 R W x Section iG 3 4 2 28 Page 120 117 75y CH3 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 RW Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse F rward Page 121 118 764 CH3 i System area reverse action 1 R W x Section action setting setting
274. d Time until the temperature process value PV reaches the set value SV for the first time or a half the hunting cycle of the temperature process value PV If the time below exceeds two hours auto tuning ends in fail Time from the start of auto tuning until Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 reaches the set value SV for the first time A half the hunting cycle of Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 185 e Calculated values of PID constants after auto tuning If a calculated value of PID constants after auto tuning exceeds one of the following ranges auto tuning ends in fail CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 1 to 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 CHO Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 1 to 3600 1s to 3600s CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un1G101 Un G133 0 to 3600 Os to 3600s Point If auto tuning ends in fail due to the calculated value of PID constants as described above the system configuration needs to be reconsidered such as selecting proper heater capacity f Change of the upper limit setting limiter or lower limit setting limiter and the set value SV If the set value SV goes out of the setting range due to the change in one of the following buffer memory areas auto tuning ends in fail CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 CHO Lower limit setting limite
275. d only by the deviation E from Set value SV setting the set value SV In this case how well the temperature process value PV is following Un G34 Un G66 UnG98 the changing set value SV does not matter Even if the value in Set value SV Un G130 monitor Un G25 to Un G28 is changing an alert can occur depending on the deviation E from the set value SV a Set value SV and the setting change rate limiter setting The following figures show the relationships of two types of set value SV depending on whether the setting change rate limiter is specified or not When the setting change rate limiter is not specified The two types of set value SV are the same value Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 and Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 Temperature process value PV A uonounJ Haly ZLY Set value SV 2 P pec ll eee eee eee ee change Set value SV 1 Pr 0 Time 195 When the setting change rate limiter is specified The value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 follows the set value SV of after the setting is reflected Temperature process value PV Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Set value SV 2 5 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 Setting change rate limiter or se
276. d selection function x Manual reset function x Manual control O O Auto tuning function O Simple two degree of freedom O O Derivative action selection function x O The temperature rise temperature drop batch setting or individual setting Setting change rate limiter setting function be selected on Switch Setting with the Q64TCN 5 Page 190 Section 4 9 Temperature process value PV scaling function Moving averaging process to a temperature process value PV The reference set value SV for the deviation alert can be selected from among the following buffer memory areas with the Q64TCN Page Alert function 194 Section 4 12 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 RFB limiter function O Errors can be corrected by setting any two points corrected offset value Sensor correction function A and corrected gain value with the Q64TCN Page 213 Section 4 14 2 Auto setting at input range change x Input output with another analog x O module function ON delay output function O O Self tuning function x O Peak current suppression function x O Simultaneous temperature rise x function 375 M amp alHolv9O0 gt o Ee 2 2 x N o a o o 2 o S A 2 2 gt AR
277. detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment 294 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION b In the heating cooling control Q64TCRTBWN s Li L1H Internal circuit L1C I Internal circuit 1 C i 1 L2H Int i Circuit 54 EY N 1 L2C Internal circuit Current sensor 24VDC CT Cooling 1 a f B 31 fi CHIA Filter CH1 B Heating b CENE i Controlled eo neme object 4 EY or l HZA Filter 1 CH2 B CH2 b E Connector Connector 1 B CT1 l CT1 an AA 25 5 CT2 oa CT2 CT input circuit i i CT8 8 1 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assign
278. difference of actions depending on the value of Ti integral time Condition Integral action Ti is a small value The integral effect gets large and time to eliminate the offset gets short Though the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value Ti is a large value The integral effect gets small and time to eliminate the offset gets long The following figure shows an integral action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E Time M Manipulated value of the Proportional action Integral action Manipulated value of the Integral action Manipulated KP E Manipulated value of the Proportional action value MV Y An integral action is used as a PI action in combination with a proportional action or PID action in combination with a proportional and derivative actions An integral action cannot be used by itself CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 5 Derivative action D action A derivative action adds the manipulated value MV proportional to the rate of change to eliminate the deviation E when it occurs A derivative action can prevent the control target from changing significantly due to disturbance In a derivative action the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value MV of the derivative action becomes equals to that of the proportional action is ca
279. digits of serial number is 11043 or later GX Works2 Version 1 09K or later Point For details on the module error history collection function refer to the following 1 QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 274 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 33 Error Clear Function When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system monitor Clicking the _ Error Sear button on the system monitor clears the error code stored in Write data error code Un GO and turns off the ERR LED The operation is the same as when an error is cleared using Error reset instruction Yn2 However the error history is not cleared For how to clear an error using Error reset instruction Yn2 refer to the following Error reset instruction Yn2 7 s Page 57 Section 3 3 3 2 XW Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt The module where an error occurred Module s Detailed Information r Module Monitoring Model Name Q64TCTTN Address bo10 Mount Position Main Base 1 Slot A Product Information 130410000000000 C Production Number Monitor Status r Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify gree I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting E Input fe Remote Password Setting Status m Error Infor
280. ding on the value of Kp proportional gain Condition Proportional action Kp is a small value The control action slows down The control action speeds up though the temperature process value PV tends to Kp is a large value fluctuate around the set value The following figure shows a proportional action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E t pi y Time mm x DS i Os sz i ao Manipulated S value MV t _ 28 gt Time 2 5 58 2 Offset S 2 The certain amount of difference generates between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is called an offset remaining deviation In an proportional action an offset remaining deviation generates Set value t Offset Set value Offset SV K SV R 1 Temperature process value PV emperature process value PV gt Time Time 25 1 3 4 26 Integral action l action An integral action is an action which continuously changes the manipulated value MV to eliminate the deviation E when there is any The offset caused by a proportional action can be eliminated In an integral action the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value MV of the integral action becomes equals to that of the proportional action is called integral time and is indicated as The following table describes the
281. e 2 When the module is mounted click and check that the RUN LED is Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 Tocheck the operation click Cancel to cancel the control start Online module change 2 Click to stop the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer i To the next page 394 From the previous page w System Monitor Installed status 213 Base Module MasterPLC gt Powe Unmoj Unmo unti pp ng ns Q06PHCPU Parameter status Mode Address 20 30 40 System monitor 3 4 Online module change Powe None None rsu QOBPHCPU ppl 16pt H6pt Status Bl Module system error E Module error Module warning B Module change 5 Restarting control Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution VO address 3 n Module name UB4TCTTN Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel MELSOFT series GX Developer W Online module change completed
282. e System area PARA PA 0 R W Section gradient data g 3 4 2 81 data Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 155 764 2FCy CH3 temperaturerise System area temperature 0 R W Section dead time rise dead time 3 4 2 82 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 155 765 2FDp e eee iai TP 0 R W x Section AT mode rise AT mode 3 4 2 83 selection selection E Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 156 766 2 CH3 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R x x Section status rise status 3 4 2 84 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 157 767 2FFy CH3 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting 9 time setting 3 4 2 85 eels Page 105 proportional g 768 3004 CH4 System area band Pc System area 30 R W x Section 3 4 2 15 setting 15 Cooling upper Page 110 769 3014 CH4 System area limit output System area 1000 R W x Section limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Page 114 770 3024 CHA System area output cycle System area 30 R W x Section setting 9 3 4 2 23 Overlap dead 132 771 3034 CH4 System area NP System area 0 R W x Section band setting 3 4 2 74 T Manual reset i Page 152 i ce M orci S a O setting 9 q 3 4 2 75 80 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address
283. e CH4 b CH4 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 283 SOWEN Hed E G Terminal Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Indication number Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 y COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 A1 CH1A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A 8 IN2 A2 MT2A Monitor 2 resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A 9 IN1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B 40 IN2 B2 MT2B Monitor 2 resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 42 IN2 b2 MT2 b Monitor 2 resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 13 IN3 A3 CH3A CH3 Resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A 44 INA A4 CHA A CH4 Resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance hermometer A thermometer A 45 IN3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B 46 IN4 B4 CH4B CH4 Resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance hermometer B thermometer B 17 IN3 b3 CH3b CH3 Resistance CH3b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 48 INA b4 CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Re
284. e OFF Y18 Force OFF vti Force OFF 6 Before restarting the control check the following items of the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING s Page 359 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off 7 Because the new module is in the default status configure the initial settings using a sequence program after restarting the control Before configuring the initial settings check that the details on the initial setting program are correct In a standard system configuration When Module READY flag Xn0 in the Q64TCN turns on use a sequence program where the initial settings are configured When the control is restarted Module READY flag Xn0 turns on and the initial settings are configured In a sequence program where the initial settings are configured only for a single scan after RUN the initial settings are not configured When using the remote I O network Install a user device initial setting request signal where the initial settings are configured at any timing jeniui au JO pesn sem urejBoud eouenbes e ueuM 9p xipueddy 1edoje eq Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy xipueddy in the sequence program After the control is restarted turn on the initial setting request signal and configure the initial settings In a sequence program w
285. e an error was 5 data to the system area detected is stored Follow the instructions below for error reset 1 Change the mode to the setting mode The data written is retained 99 iin and tum otf s When data is written to multiple DIOE IMPLIES Data is being written in the operation i i instruction YnB 4 System areas the address with the OOO3 1 mode the area where data can be 3 Turn off on and off Error reset is smallest number of the buffer written only the setting mode memory area where an error was instruction Yn2 5 If switching from the operation mode detected to the setting mode check that PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Stop 0 and turn on and off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 The data written is retained If temperature time or percentage settings exceed upper limit value lower limit value change the M4 Data outside the settable range is data within those values ee 00044 Set data within the range being written When data is written to multiple system areas the address with the smallest number of the buffer memory area where an error was detected is stored 9 367 Error code hexadecimal Cause Operation at error occurrence Action The data written is retained Change the setting to an allowable value for the upper lower limit The setting of the uppe
286. e current error detection function refer to the following 3 269 Section 4 29 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is 0 to 100 Ex To generate Heater disconnection alert with the following conditions CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 100 10 0A When Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 is 80 8 0A or less set Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 to 80 96 Heater Reference heater _ Heater current current value process value 100 80 disconnection 100 100 100 x 100 80 alert setting Reference heater current value 100 When 0 is set heater disconnection detection and off time current error detection are not performed c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 123 Aiowaw Jejynq ay syieleq jueuuuBissy yng t 33 CHO Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Errors such as disconnection of resistors malfunction of an external controller and errors of the control system due to troubles such as disconnection of the sensor can be detected by the loop disconnection detection function If temperature does not change by 2 C F or more in the Loop disconnection detection judgment time a loop disconnection is detected For details on the loop
287. e module change the module goes into the standby status and an alert does not occur when the control is restarted after performing the online module change To check the following items it is recommended to perform the online module change on the actual system and verify that the operation of modules not to be changed is not affected The method and configuration to disconnect the connection with external devices are correct Turning off on and off the switch has no influence After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction 401 eujuo uo suonneoaugd xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy xipueddy Appendix 5 2 Online module change conditions 402 To perform an online module change a CPU module a MELSECNET H remote I O module the Q64TCN GX Works2 and a base unit as listed below are required 1 2 3 4 The Q64TCN with the function version C supports the online module change since it was first released CPU module A Process CPU or Redundant CPU is required For the precautions on the multiple CPU system configuration refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System For the precautions on the redundant syste
288. e simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be calculated during the self tuning setting depending on the setting 1 Indicates the values of Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 to be used in the simultaneous temperature rise function For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following s Page 238 Section 4 20 b Default value The default values are set to Do not run the ST 0 in all channels Point This area is enabled only for the following channels CH1 to when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used 146 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 69 Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 8 The execution status of self tuning can be monitored in this buffer memory area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following C gt Page 223 Section 4 18 b15 to b10 b9 b8 b7 to b2 b1 bO olololo o olololololo Rg yY Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 The following contents are stored in each bit 0 OFF 1 ON Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0 Bit Flag name 9 ON OFF This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the following operation i
289. e specific PID constants Configure the PID constants using Create a sequence program to GX Works2 configure the PID constants v v Execute the auto tuning 1 Execute the auto tuning Back up the PID constants in E7PROM Back up the PID constants in E7PROM Use E2PROM s PID constants read instruction to create a sequence program to read the PID constants from E2PROM v Operation 1 In the standard control the self tuning be selected if necessary 306 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 2 When Using the Module a Standard System Configuration This section describes the following program examples Control mode Overview of the program example Reference This is a program example for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code Page 307 read Section 7 2 1 Standard control This is a program example where the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous Page 319 temperature rise function are used for the control Section 7 2 2 ane 334 Heating cooling control This is a program example for the heating cooling control Section 7 2 3 7 2 1 Standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read This section describes the program example for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code read 1 System configuration The follo
290. ection Alert set val Alert set value 72 48 CH2 Alert set value 3 etn Ser NUE 3 7 0 R W Bee 18 Alert set val Alert set value 73 49y CH2 Alert set value 4 See ee 0 R W ek Heating upper Heating upper Upper limit limit output 74 4Ay CH2 limit output imit outpu 1000 R W x 110 output limiter RM C limiter limiter Section 3 4 2 19 limit 75 4By CH2 lower System area System area 0 R W x output limiter m Output Output Page 112 76 4C CH2 m Ion variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section in imiter setting setting setting 7 3 4 2 20 Page 113 77 4Dy CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 j Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 1 uie Page 113 78 4E CH2 sensitivity dead 918 5 R W x Section H y dead band dead band band setting uu 3 4 2 22 setting setting 63 JSI yu wu isse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal CUNT Standard 7 iol value Write setting b Reference T ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Heating control Heating control Page 114 Control output 79 CH2 ein
291. ed gt 253 Section 4 22 detection b14 CHO Output off time current Output off time current error has been detected 7 7 Page 269 Section error 4 29 b15 fixed to 0 Unused 4 For the temperature measurement range refer to Page 88 Section 3 4 2 3 a 87 Jejnq ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t a Temperature measurement range The temperature measurement range is as follows Input range lower limit 5 of full scale to Input range upper limit 5 of full scale Ex A calculation example when Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C Input range lower limit 5 of full scale 200 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 230 0 Input range upper limit 5 of full scale 400 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 430 0 Therefore the temperature measurement range is 230 0 to 430 0 C The Q64TCN checks whether the input temperature is in temperature measurement range of the input range When the input temperature is out of the temperature measurement range CHLI Input range upper limit bO of Un G5 to Un G8 or Input range lower limit b1 of Un G5 to Un G8 become 1 ON The conditions which the Q64TCN uses to judge whether the measured temperature is within the temperature measurement range differ depending on the following settings e Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 s Page 5
292. ed stop instruction instruction instruction vaD CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction mE CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop instruction instruction 1 instruction PID control forced stop PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction 1 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to 3 Page 164 Section 4 1 3 2 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to 3 Page 164 Point The functions of the Q64TCN cannot be guaranteed if any of the unavailable areas is turned on off in a sequence program Section 4 1 3 49 3911 jeuDis BINPOW peuejsue1 sjeuBls 3 3 2 Details of input signals 1 Module READY flag Xn0 This flag turns on to indicate that the preparation for the Q64TCN is completed when the module is turned on from off or when the CPU module s reset is released Make sure that this flag is on when reading writing data from in the buffer memory of the Q64TCN from the CPU module The following shows an example of a program In the following example the start 1 O number of the Q64TCN is set to 10 Write instruction 10 1 ToP 22 K
293. ed value 60 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 143 Section 3 4 2 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 gain value corrected value 61 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 144 Section 3 4 2 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 offset latch request 62 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 144 Section 3 4 2 i Un G581 Un G613 Un G645 offset latch completion 63 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 144 Section 3 4 2 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 gain latch request 64 CHO Sensor two point correction Page 145 Section 3 4 2 f Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 gain latch completion 65 Sensor correction function Page 159 Section 3 4 2 Un G785 selection 87 Temperature conversion Page 159 Section 3 4 2 Un G786 completion flag 88 Temperature conversion Page 150 Section 3 4 2 Un G695 Un G696 Un G697 setting 71 263 pesnu uonounJ UOISJ AUOD eJnjejeduie 3 Setting method Set whether using this function in the following buffer memory area Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 gt Page 150 Section 3 4 2 71 Point P When heating cooling control expanded mode or mix control expanded mode is selected the setting in CHO Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 is ignored 264 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 28 Heater Disconnection Detection Function Common When transistor output is on whether a heater is disconnected or not can be chec
294. em 2 Thermocouplek 2 Thermocouplek 2 Thermocouplek 2 Thermocouplek Input range Measured Temperature Measured Temperature Measured Temperature Measured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Range 0 to 1300 C Range 0 to 1300 C Range D to 1300 C Set value SV setting D oc oc oc Unused channel setti Control basic paramete Proportional band P P Used O Used O Used Hortional band P integral time I derivative time D and Pull down list type setting Heating control 0 3 0 3 0 proportional band setting Cooling proportional band Pc setting 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 2405 2405 Derivative time D setting 605 60s 60s 60s Control output cycle setting Heating control 30s 30s 30s 30s output cycle setting Control response parameter 0 Slow O Slow O Slow 0 Slow Stop Mode Setting 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor PID continuation flag 0 Stop Control detail parameter Set temperature measurement ranges such as upper lower limit for temperature setting adjustment control Forward reverse action l Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action Upper limit setting limiter 1300 C 1300 C 1300 1300 Text box type Lower limit setting limiter gt aoc Dc oc oc Setting change rate limiter C Used to specify as unused the channels where temperature control will not be performed and temperature sensors will not be connected 2 Click Clear Value for Gra
295. ent by the Q64TCN differ among the following timings Setting mode at power ON Operation mode in operation Setting mode after operation For each detail on the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgment refer to the following Temperature gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 PID control Page 170 Section 4 3 6 Alert judgment gt Page 203 Section 4 12 5 3 Write error flag Xn2 The write data error occurs in the Q64TCN when the data is set to the buffer memory in the area where data cannot be written or the timing when data cannot be written After a write data error occurs and the error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO this flag turns on A write data error occurs under the following conditions When data is set in the buffer memory of the system area When the setting of the area which can be written only during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF is changed during the operation mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 ON gt Page 50 Section 3 3 2 2 When the data which cannot be set is set e When the setting of the buffer memory is changed during the default setting registration Page 58 Section 3 3 3 5 When the current control mode and the control mode backed up in the E PROM are different due to the change of the control mode selection OFF Write error flag Xn2 j Write data error code OH Error code
296. er Moving Averaging Process Setting a When using the Q64TCN that does not support this function Because the module does not support Moving Averaging Process Setting setting contents of Moving Averaging Process Setting cannot be checked 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Whether to perform the moving averaging process can be selected in the intelligent function module switch setting a When using the Q64TCN that does not support this function The moving averaging process setting cannot be configured in the intelligent function module switch setting 374 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Comparison of the Q64TCN with the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW The Q64TCN has several new functions in addition to the functions of the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW hereafter abbreviated as the Q64TC This section describes the comparison of functions I O signals and buffer memory between the Q64TCN and Q64TC in accordance with the addition of the new functions Precautions on replacing modules are also explained 1 Comparison of the functions between the Q64TCN and the Q64TC The following table lists the functions supported by the Q64TCN and the Q64TC Q Usable A Partially usable x Unusable Function Q64TC Q64TCN Remarks Control mode selection function x O Control output setting at CPU stop error Control metho
297. er the error occurrence address Only one error code as dictated by error priority is stored in Write data error code Un GO For that reason when multiple errors occur the next error code is stored even when the error of the stored error code is corrected Check for errors other than the stored error code in the parameters of other channels 369 ISI p09 JOU 98 8 7 The following table lists alarm codes Alarm Code List The alarm code is stored in all bits of Write data error code Un GO b15 to 612 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO M Y A v A Y 2 Alarm types Alarm occurrence error code is H channels 1 to 4H stored to Au when an alarm occurs If the lower 4 bits are 0001 14 to 1001 94 or 1011 to 1111 an error occurs When an error occurs refer to the error code list 7 gt Page 367 Section 8 6 Alarm code hexadecimal Cause Operation at alarm occurrence Action 1 The temperature process The ALM LED flashes When Error reset instruction Yn2 is value PV has exceeded the CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turned OFF ON OFF after the 01 temperature measurement turns on temperature process value PV has range that was set as the input CHLI Input range upper limit b0 of Un G5 to returned to the value within the range Un G8 turns on temperature measurement range Write data error code U
298. er to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Number of parameters of the Q64TCN The following table lists the number of parameters that can be set for one Q64TCN Auto refresh setting Target module Initial setting Normal mode Setting item reduction mode Q64TCTTN 54 103 Max 35 Max Q64TCRTN 53 Q64TCTTBWN 55 115 Max 36 Max Q64TCRTBWN 54 Number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by changing the normal mode to the setting item reduction mode For the setting item reduction mode refer to the following gt Page 303 Section 6 4 le S 0 JjequinN L eoueuuope 43 2 Checking method The current number and maximum number of the set parameters in the intelligent function module can be checked by the following operation Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Status No Description 1 Total number of the parameters of the initial setting that is checked on the window 2 Maximum number of parameters of the initial setting 3 Total number of the parameters of the auto refresh setting that is checked on the window 4 Maximum number of parameters of the auto refresh sett
299. eration about 15 minutes before starting operation Operation Point When using the Q64TCTTN and the Q64TCTTBWN which use the thermocouples as the temperature sensors temperature compensation must be executed properly Perform warm up operation about 15 minutes before starting operation 277 uoneJjedo e40Jeq eunpeooJg eui pue sBumes Z S 5 3 Part Names The following table shows part names of the Q64TCN 1 SN 3 1
300. eration mode instruction Yn1 E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB Point P When PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even if Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off 392 APPENDICES 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor Installed status Base 5 Base Module 1 Diagnostics gt Online module change ra Jerr um ea 2 5 aes 9 o c Select Online module change under the Mode Exi 59 field and double click the module to be changed Em online p Parameter status p Mode C System monitor 0 2 Online module change None Intelli None None None rsu QOBPHCPU 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt p Status Bl Module system enor Module eror Module warning Bl Module change t Close 3 Click Execulion to enable a module
301. eration of the simultaneous temperature rise function OE EE ECC EN 239 Operation on completion of auto tuning 186 Operation with starting ST 226 Operation with vibration ST 228 Outline 5 5 39 Output off time current error detection 269 Output setting at CPU stop error 165 299 Output 51 5 49 Output signals 56 Overlapiz si esa e neci eed Ele 259 P control ick Oe 107 168 173 Parameter 5 300 names 278 PD Cohttol 5 arua a dats 169 173 Peak current suppression 233 Peak current suppression control group setting 784 158 241 oi 0 00 cee eee 107 169 PID actioni y eu 28 PID auto correction status 147 PID constants wb 16 PID constants range 38 PID continuation flag Un G169 131 PID control ee ERI mr et 169 Points e ast sant a agen geo halen 378 Procedure for the self tuning control 225 Procedure of auto tuning 179 Process CPU uie Rehd 387 Processing of the error history function 272 Product information list 36 Programming procedure
302. ere data is written D51 to D54 CHLI Temperature process value PV by auto refresh D55 to D58 CHO Alert definition M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag 323 uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM esu eunjejeduie snoeuej nuuis uonounj uoisseJddns xeed piepuejs ZZ b Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 2 3 Open the Parameter window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter Click Clear value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 Set the parameter 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Item Basic setting Control basic parameter setting E Control detail parameter setting Input range 1300 C 200 C O Used Set value SV setting Unused channel setting Proportional band P setting Heating 3 0 control proportional band setting Ph 3 0 95 Integral time 1 setting 240 s Derivative time D setting 60 s Cooling proportional band Pc setting Control output cycle setting Heating 30s control output cycle setting 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 Stop Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag control Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter 1300 C Lower limit set
303. erence junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block j Reference junction of the Ambient temperature difference thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor 5 MV O A 290 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION b In the heating cooling control 5 Q64TCTTBWN T Or m E Internal circuit A A L1 Internal circuit 2 a A u L2H Internal circuit 2 P L2C Internal circuit Current Hon CT Cooling 24VDC 1 elm 1 Filter Heating D CH1 Controlled Internal object circuit L Nec gner Filter JW d 2 onnector j CT CT1 CT2 CT2 CT input circuit CT8 CT8 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example s
304. erivation 4 33 cau ead tate Rex 23 ALM LED 278 362 Applicable CPU modules and base units 29 Applicable software 31 Applicable solderless terminal 39 Applicable wire 5 39 AT teens dit Rata 120 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion 2 2414 due eda aha ty 146 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error statis vce POG siue aa ut 146 Auto refresh iz i da teats Gea ates ees 303 Auto t ning a gae EAT d 176 Auto setting at input range change ius choc PX TT 101 102 160 220 299 Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto een ree durs 178 Base nit 387 402 Batch individual setting for temperature rise temperature drop 190 Buffer memory llle 16 Buffer memory address by control mode 59 Buffer memory address for error history 83 Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning 177 Buffer memory areas related to control method 171 Buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored uus arn aay aid Live Nai npe 387 Buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting MOdE foe hia suere BEG cade Ra UM Mak E QURE 56 Buffer memory assignmentlist 59 Buffer memory data backup
305. ermocouple 9 CT4 CT input 4 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 CT5 CT input 5 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 5 CT input 5 NC NC Unused NC Unused e a om creme os cs We MR 13 CT6 CT input 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused ED a Deere m punc a oe 15 CT7 CT input 7 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple 16 CT8 CT input 8 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple 17 a CT8 CT input 8 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple 18 NC NC Unused IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple SOWEN Hed E G 281 Terminal block for I O goce bd Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 1 CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L2H CH2 Heating output L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L2C CH2 Cooling output L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 L COM Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 T
306. ert with standby 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 200 4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Alert with standby second time A function to deactivate the alert function once again when the set value SV is changed is added to an alert with standby This is called an alert with standby second time When control needs the set value SV change the alert supposed to occur can be avoided when the set value is changed by selecting an alert with standby second time Ex When the temperature process value PV is on the position as below before the set value SV change Temperature process value PV Before set value SV change Alert region A H Alert set value Set value SV Set value Temperature process value PV SV change After set value gt SV change Alert MAN I _ Alert set value Set value SV 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 Page 195 Section 4 12 2 a For a deviation alert when the set value SV is changed the temperature process value PV goes into the alert area therefore the system goes into an alert status To prevent the case above the alert output is put on standby a Setting method Select one of the fol
307. es Add the model name of the Q64TCN to use on the project 1 Addition procedure Open the New Module window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Temperature Control Module Setting Item Reduction Mode Module Name z for Auto refresh Mount Position Y Mounted Slot No 1 Acknowledge I O Assignment IV Specify start address 0010 1 Slot Occupy 16 points Title setting Title Cancel Item Description Module Type Set Temperature Control Module Module Module Name Select the module model name to mount Selection Setting Item Select it to reduce the number of setting items for auto refresh Reduction Mode for Page 303 Section 6 4 Base No Set the base unit where the module is mounted Mount Mounted Slot No Set the slot No where the module is mounted Position Specify start XY The start I O number hexadecimal of the target module is set according to the slot address No An arbitrary start number be also set Title setting Title Set an arbitrary title 298 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS 6 2 Configure settings such as the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection which are used in each Switch Setting channel 1 Setting method Open the Switch Setting window D Project window g
308. ess value 29 The measured temperature of cold junction temperature compensation resistor is stored in this buffer memory area Values to be stored vary depending on the temperature unit set in CH1 Input range Un1G32 7 s Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 For other than F 10 to 100 For F 14 to 212 1 The operation of the Q64TCN is guaranteed in the ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C For the general specifications of the Q64TCN refer to the following 1 QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection a Usable modules e 64 Q64TCTTBWN 10 MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 C This flag is for checking completion of the mode shift when shifting AUTO auto mode to MAN manual mode The following values are stored in this buffer memory area 0 MAN mode shift uncompleted 1 MAN mode shift completed The following figure shows bits of the buffer memory area that correspond to each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 Bit data from 615 b4 are fixed to 0 When shift to MAN mode is completed bits corresponding to appropriate channel become MAN mode shift completed 1 a How to shift the mode Shift the mode in the following buffer memory area AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146
309. ession function is used This program is designed to suppress the peak current by automatically changing the values of the upper limit output limiter of CH1 to 4 and dividing the timing of the transistor output into four timing When the peak current suppression When the peak current suppression control function is not used control function is used 205 M le 20s gt k 5s 5s gt lt 5s gt 55 CH1 ERE CH1 Transistor Transistor i i i i output output CH2 B CH2 Transistor Transistor output 4 output CH4 CH4 Transistor Transistor i f oo output CH3 i CH3 Transistor Transistor output i output output 1 1 1 1 1 x 2 1 1 1 1 Since all the transistor outputs used Setting the transistor outputs to turn on at the same time the peak different ON timings can reduce current becomes high the peak current to that of one transistor output Peak current Peak current CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Program example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used This program is designed to classify the CH1 and CH2 into group 1 and CH3 and CH4 into group 2 so that the channels in each group reach the set values SV simultaneously Temperature process value PV Matches temperature rise completion time in each group Set value SV H gt CH3 Set value SV gt CH2 Se
310. et CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block B Reference junction of the thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Ambient temperature difference 291 r S z v S 292 3 Q64TCRTN a In the standard control Q64TCRTN U 1 Cl B L1 TUM Internal LI Y circuit L2 2 Ui N ry Internal X M RR circuit Fj 1 24VDC g CH1 Al B WT Filter Controlled ICH b object H2 A Filter Internal H2 B circuit 1 ICH2 b i HEA Filter H4 B ICH4 b 1 Use the shielded cable CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION b In the heating cooling control Q64TCRTN
311. et Project PRG MAIN i Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diaeno Menu bar XZ Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter CD PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment E Program Setting E POU 5 5 Program MAIN 8 5 Local Device Comment Device Memory Device Initial Value View selection area t I Connection Destination v Unlabeled 14 Pages describing buffer memory areas and functions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation 4 4 Manual Reset Function cT These icons indicate control modes The position of the stable condition in P control or PD control can be shifted manually using this function that can be used By shifting the proportional band P an offset remaining deviation is manually reset The offset is reset by determining and selling the amount to shift the value of the manipulated value MV in a stable condition from the reference value The reference value is 50 for standard c
312. etting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc setting 3 0 Integral time I setting 2405 Derivative time D setting 605 Control output cycle setting Heating control output 30s cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Made Setting PID continuation flag _ Control detail parameter setting Forwardjreverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter O Slow 1 Monitor O Stop control 1 Reverse Action 400 C Lower limit setting limiter ac Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter 0 0 Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop Sensor correction value setting 0 0 0 00 Set the temperature conversion system Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C oc 1 Unused 3 0 3 0 2405 605 305 O Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 0 00 1300 oc 1 Unused O Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 oc 0 0 0 0 0 00 Thermocouplek Measured Temperature Range D to Clear Value For Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items for control mode to 0 1300 C oc 1 Unused 3 0 3 0 2405 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor Set temperature measurement ranges such as upper lower limit for temperature adjustment 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 0 0 0 00 hermocoupleK Measured Temperature Range D to Set PID constants proportional band P integral time I derivative time D and temperatu
313. etting 3 4 2 23 Page 115 48 304 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 Page 116 49 314 CH1 Control response parameters 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 25 Page 117 50 324 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 26 Page 118 51 334 CH1 MAN output setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page 119 52 344 CH1 0 R W x Section limiter temperature rise 3 4 2 28 Page 120 53 354 CH1 AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse Pagerie 54 36 CH1 Saon sein System area System area 1 R W x Section 9 3 4 2 30 1300 T TT 55 374 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 6000 R W 122 Section O TT 3 4 2 31 56 38 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 2000 R W o RT 57 39 CH1 System area m 123 58 3 CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 32 Page 124 59 3By CH1 System area System area 480 R W x Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time 62 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel E PROM Address a men Default Read Automatic ik eating z gt write decimal Standard value Write setting Reference current cooling Mix control A B availability hexadecimal contro
314. etting using 26s Lii Sia ei 245 Software version 31 Solderless 276 Standard control 162 163 Standard mode 136 Start XY Lud dex bip b PS v 378 Starting ST esas uy hee RR 146 224 Storing the calculated value after auto tuning 177 System 36 422 Temperature control method 38 Temperature conversion 262 Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 tte 159 Temperature judgment 88 Temperature measurement range 40 87 Temperature process value PV scaling 192 Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 sat anny do eee ted ius E csi dS dee 91 130 Temperature rise completion soak time setting UD 91 131 Temperature 16 32 96 Temperature 96 Terminal block for 278 Terminal block for 278 Terminal block mounting screw 276 Terminal screw 276 doses ewubes 16 Thermocouple type 97 Thermocouple wiring resistance 366 Three phase
315. example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f nitial setting program X20 T PLS Mo SET 10 X13 AF TO Ui H3D Ul H5D TO Ul H7D KO TO ul H9D KO M1 M2 X10 X13 Yu _ i AF Ui H20 K2 TO Ui H40 K2 TO Ui H60 K2 U1 H80 K2 TO Ul H2F K20 TO Ul H4F K20 To Ul H6F K20 TO Ul H8F K20 TO u1 K1 To Ul KI TO Ut HOEO K1 TO Ui HOFO Ki M2 X10 X13 Yu _ I Vi AF TO Ui H2DA TO Ut H2EA K1 TO u1 H2FA K2 TO U1 H30A K2 TO Ul H2DD TO ul H2ED To Ul H2FD TO Ul H30D SET Vw VP f T 11 11 f LRST SET MO K1 Ld ta Flag 0 for setting value write ON Flag 1 for setting value write ON J CH1 Unused channel setting Used CH2 Unused channel setting Used J CH3 Unused channel setting Used 1 CH4 Unused channel setting Used J CH1 Input range 2 J CH2 Input range 2 J CH3 Input range 2 F CH4 Input range 2 1 CH1 Control output cycle setting 20s CH2 Control
316. fault value 2 times are set in all channels as default values 73 Cooling method setting Un G719 Set the method for the cooling control in the heating cooling control Select the suitable cooling method for cooling characteristics of devices The following figure shows the channel assignment of the buffer memory area b15 to b12 b11 b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the cooling method setting function refer to the following C gt Page 258 Section 4 25 a Setting range Air cooled 14 Water cooled 2 Linear b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng ye c Default value The default value is set to Air cooled 0p 151 74 CHO Overlap dead band function Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 Configure the overlap dead band setting For details on the overlap dead band function refer to the following L gt Page 259 Section 4 26 a Setting range Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 100 to 1 10 0 to 0 1 Overlap 0 0 0 None e 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 Dead band b Default value The default values are set to 0 0 096 in all ch
317. fer to gt Page 162 Section 4 1 Point Depending on the control mode some channels cannot be used for control The channels which cannot be used for control are the following For heating cooling control normal mode CH3 CH4 For mix control normal mode CH2 The channels which cannot be used for control can be used only for temperature measurement For details refer to gt 262 Section 4 27 jueuuuBissy yng t 1811 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre 99 Enable x Disable Target Setting contents channel 2 Address zr va Default Read Automatic EPROM eating i decimal current Standard fi Mi c value Write setting S Reference hexadecimal Control cooing IX CONIO 2 E availability sensor control id CT Page 86 0 0 All CHs Write data error code 0 R x x Section 3 42 1 1 10 CH1 Decimal point position 2 2 CH2 Decimal point position O TT Page 86 1 RT R x x Section CH3 Decimal point position 5 3 4 2 2 4 4 CH4 Decimal point position 5 5p CH1 Alert definition 6 64 CH2 Alert definition Page 87 0 R x x Section 8 8 CH4 Alert definition 9 9H CH1 Temperature process value PV 10 CH2 Temperature process value PV Page 89 0 R x x Section 11 Bu CH3 Temperature process value PV 3 4 2 4 12 Cy CH4 Temperature process val
318. fer to the following s Page 262 Section 4 27 a Setting range 0 Not use 1 Use b Default value The default values are set to Not use 0 in all channels Point When this setting is set from Not use 0 to Use 1 after completion of the first temperature conversion Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 is set to First temperature conversion completed 14 Before referring to the temperature process value PV of each channel check Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 has been set to First temperature conversion completed 14 When the following control mode is selected this setting is invalid Standard control Heating cooling control expanded mode Mix control expanded mode CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 72 CHO Number of moving averaging Un G698 to Un G701 3 For each channel set the number of moving averaging to be performed to temperature process values PV For details on the moving averaging process to temperature process values PV refer to the following C Page 191 Section 4 10 This setting is enabled only when Enable 0 is set to Moving Averaging Process Setting in the intelligent function module switch setting If Disable 1 is set to Moving Averaging Process Setting this setting is ignored For details on the intelligent function module switch setting refer to the following Page 299 Section 6 2 a Setting range 2 to 10 times b De
319. fied Proportional band P includes heating proportional band Ph and cooling proportional band Pc Manipulated value MV includes manipulated value for heating MVh and manipulated value for cooling MVc Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module includes manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module and manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Transistor output includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output Upper limit output limiter value includes heating upper limit output limiter value and cooling upper limit output limiter value Control output cycle includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle 4 1 Control Mode Selection Function Common A control mode can be selected using this function This section explains selectable control modes of the Q64TCN 1 Standard control and heating cooling control There are two types of control modes in the Q64TCN standard control and heating cooling control a Standard control The control method is either one of heating reverse action or cooling forward action When the control method is heating of a heater for example cooling is controlled by simply turning off the heating When the control method is cooling of cold water for example heating is controlled by simply turning off the cooling b Heating cooling control The control method is b
320. for thermocouples and platinum resistance thermometers Control method A generic term for two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control Control mode A generic term for the standard control heating cooling control normal mode heating cooling control expanded mode mix control normal mode and mix control expanded mode Fixed value action Full scale The operating status of when the set value SV is fixed A full input range For example when the selected input range is 200 0 C to 400 0 C the full scale is 600 0 Ramp action The operating status of when the set value SV is constantly changed Number of loops The number of feedback control systems closed loop control systems that can be configured using one module Under the standard control one loop consists of one input and one output Under the heating cooling control one loop consists of one input and two outputs QCPU Another term for the MELSEC Q series CPU module Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU External input The abbreviation for input from connectors for external devices External output The abbreviation for output to connectors for external devices Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer GX Works2 GX Developer The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers GX Configurato
321. g of each referto 7 7 Page 50 Section 3 3 2 2 Even though the conditions above are met PID control is not performed when Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 1 s Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 Point P The manipulated value MV and manipulated value MV for output with another analog module of when CHLI PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off are as follows Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Stored value Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 50 5 0 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 Manipulated value MV for Un G177 Un G178 UnG179 Un G180 0 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 47 output with another analog module CHLI Manipulated value for heating Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 50 5 0 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 MVh Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another Un G177 Un G178 Un G179 Un G180 0 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 47 analog module Manipulated value for cooling Un G704 Un G705 Un G706 Un G707 50 5 0 Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 Manipulated value of cooling for output with another Un G708 Un G709 Un G710 Un G711 0 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 47 analog module When CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned off from on the for
322. gital input value of the current voltage converted in another analog module such as A D conversion module connected to the system can be used as a temperature process value PV Store digital input values of current voltage converted by another analog module such as A D conversion module in this area For details refer to the following Page 221 Section 4 16 1 Point If a stored value is out of the set input range the value to be used in control is fixed to the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the input range 71 Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 3 In the heating cooling control normal mode or the mix control normal mode only the temperature measurement can be performed using temperature input terminals of unused channels The following table lists the settable buffer memory addresses for each control mode selection Control mode Heating cooling Heating cooling Channel Standard Mix control Mix control control control control normal mode expanded mode normal mode expanded mode CH1 CH2 Un G695 CH3 Un G696 CH4 Un G697 When the combination of control mode and the buffer memory address is not the setting target the above list the combination is invalid even if it is set For details on the temperature conversion function using unused channels re
323. gnals 8 4 1 When Module READY flag Xn0 does not turn on Check Item Action Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again Replace the Q64TCN Refer to the user s manual of the used CPU module and take corrective action Has a watchdog timer error occurred Has an error occurred in the programmable controller 8 4 2 When Write error flag Xn2 is on Check Item Action Check the error code list 7 367 Section 8 6 and take actions described Has a write data error occurred 8 4 3 When Hardware error flag Xn3 is on Check Item Action Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor disconnected or loose The Q64TCTTN and Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor Q64TCTTBWN only A hardware failure occurred in the Q64TCN Others ne Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 8 4 4 When the auto tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on Check Item Action Refer to the Auto tuning function section 7 gt 176 Section 4 6 Have the auto tuning start conditions been met and confirm that all conditions have been met Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for auto tuning Ls Page 185 Section 4 6 7 to see whether it has ended abnormally Has auto tuning ended abnormally If it has ended abnormally remove the cause Then exec
324. gt Page 54 Section 3 3 2 9 Check that Sensor two point correction offset latch completion Un G549 Un G581 Un G613 Un G645 is Latch completed 1 2 lt gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 63 Turn off Setting change instruction YnB L gt Page 58 Section 3 3 3 6 Set Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 to No request 0 lt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 62 Switch the module to the operation mode turn on Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 Is the ERR LED off Go back to 1 or 2 Enter a correction gain value End 1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 2 When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 gt 142 Section 3 4 2 58 3 When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 5 Page 143 Section 3 4 2 60 218 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Point 0 If awrite data error error code 0007 occurs during sensor two point correction correctly configure the setti
325. hannel setting is configured no alarm will occur for a channel where a temperature sensor is not connected To prevent faulty alert detection configure the unused channel setting 1 Setting method Set a value in unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 For details on the setting refer to the following C Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 The following table shows the relationship between the setting value and control status Control status Set value PID control Temperature judgment Alert judgment The controls are performed 0 Used However it depends on other setting status 1 Unused The controls are not performed Even if the unused channel setting is configured the sampling cycle does not change fumes pesnum S s 297 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting procedures of the Q64TCN Point To enable the contents of the new module parameter setting and auto refresh setting reset the CPU module switch STOP 5 RUN gt STOP RUN or turn off and on the power after writing the contents into the CPU module To enable the contents of the switch setting reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power after writing the contents into the CPU module 6 1 Addition of Modul
326. he initial setting program are correct a standard system configuration Use a sequence program to configure the initial settings when Module READY flag Xn0 in the Q64TCN turns on When the control is restarted Module READY flag Xn0 turns on and the initial settings are configured In a sequence program to configure the initial settings only for a single scan after RUN the initial settings are not configured When using the remote I O network In the sequence program install a user device initial setting request signal to configure the initial settings at any timing After the control is restarted turn on the initial setting request signal and configure the initial settings In a sequence program to configure the initial settings only for a single scan after the restart of the remote I O network data link the initial settings are not configured 414 5 Restarting control System Monitor Moni Channel Lat D Mode C System monitor Online module change Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB Operation to Selected Module Main Base se Module Information List Main Base Parameter Network No Master Type Point Address Station No PLC Power Power status BaSe series Base Mode Base Model Name Power Base sing Instaled ree Supply Type esed sss 02 Empty Empty l Pomt 0000 o SPontnteli l Pomt 0010
327. he simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be automatically calculated using the following two methods Simultaneous temperature rise AT gt Page 242 Section 4 20 5 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning Page 245 Section 4 20 6 Point If the setting in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 is changed after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated the intended control may not be performed If so calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter again For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following gt Page 233 Section 4 19 uonouny esr einjeJeduie snosueynwis OZ 241 5 Simultaneous temperature rise AT PID constants and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter are calculated The waveform upon execution is the same as that for the auto tuning function For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 176 Section 4 6 a How to execute the simultaneous temperature rise AT function Follow the instructions below 1 During the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 off set CHO Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un1G749 Un G765 Un G781 to Auto tuning for simultaneous temperature rise 1 7 Page 155 Section 3 4 2 83 2 Turn off and on CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 3 Setthe module to the operation mode
328. he temperature measurement range of the set input range 8 Lower limit input alert with standby Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby full scale to full scale 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 0 to full scale 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time full scale to full scale 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second 14 0 to full scale time 15 Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV full scale to full scale 16 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV 17 Upper lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV 0 to full scale 18 Within range alert using the set value SV 137 Set Alert mode Setting range of alert set value value 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV full scale to full scale 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the 21 0 to full scale set value SV 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV full scale to full scale 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second 24 0 to full scale time
329. here the initial settings are configured only for a single scan after restarting the remote I O network data link the initial settings are not configured 399 400 5 Restarting control Online module change peration p Target module 1 0 address Module 4 Module change execution Installation confirmation pStiu Change module installation completion f Module control restart Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel MELSOFT series GX Developer Ed e D Online module change completed 1 Open the Online module change window again 2 When the window appears click to restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns on 3 The online module change is complete APPENDICES Appendix D Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Works2 This section describes the online module change procedure of using GX Works2 When performing an online module change carefully read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 5 1 Precautions on online module change This section lists precautions on an online module change When an online module change is performed not all set values are inherited by the module after
330. hermocouple 10 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold juncion temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 282 Point Do not remove the cold junction temperature compensation resistor from the terminal block 3 For the Q64TCRTN CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Heating cooling control Heating cooling control Terminal Standard control a Indication normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output Lic CH1 Cooling output 1 CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output L2H CH2 Heating o
331. his setting is for using the alarm function For details on the alert function refer to the following C Page 194 Section 4 12 a Setting range Set the value within the range 0 to 100 0 0 to 10 0 of the full scale of the set input range 7 gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 2 temperature measurement range 0 to 1300 C Alert dead band setting Un G164 5 0 5 Full scale x Alert dead band 1300 C 0 C x 0 005 6 5 C The dead band is the alert set value SV 6 5 b Default value The default value is set to 5 0 5 39 Number of alert delay 165 Set the number of sampling for an alert judgment By setting number of sampling when the temperature process value PV stays within the alert area until the number of sampling exceeds the number of alert delay the alert status will be active For details on the alert function refer to the following C s Page 194 Section 4 12 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 255 times b Default value The default value is set to O times Under 0 times condition if the temperature process value PV enters the alert area the alert status becomes active instantly 129 Jang ey Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 40 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay c
332. i 0 RIW x Section 9 9 3 4 2 68 147 671 29 CH4 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 69 672 2A0 to System area 688 2B0 15 1811 juauubisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal current Standard 9 Mi trei value Write setting te ___ Reference hexadecimal cooing COD 2 3 availability sensor control 4 CT 689 2B1 Temperature process value PV for input with 0 RW X another analog module Temperature Temperature Temperature process value process walle process value PV for input 2B24 CH2 PV for input PV for input wih another 0 R W x x with another with another analog analog module analog module 7 module Temperature Temperature 3 Temperature Page 150 process value process value process value Section 691 2B3 CH3 PV for input PV for input 0 R W x x 3 4 2 70 b with another with another with another analog analog module 6 analog module module Temperature Temperature Temperature process value a PV for input process value 2B44 PV for input with another PV for input 0 R W x x with another with another analog analog module
333. i ied See ee hide nir wa RR Y Rs 303 6 5 Auto TURING RS rx ee ble ket wir eDlef bebe 305 6 6 Sensor Correction e n 305 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 306 7 1 Programming 306 7 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration 307 7 2 1 Standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 307 7 2 2 Standard control peak current suppression function simultaneous temperature rise f hetion y ecce equ Le ve e Re Ve e e ER V RR 319 7 2 3 When performing the heating cooling control 334 7 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O Net 344 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 359 8 1 Before Troubleshooting me 359 8 2 Troubleshooting Procedure ee 359 8 3 Checks Using EEDS e I CREER SUE HEBR ERAI HRS 361 8 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns 361 8 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on 361 8 3 3 When the ALM LED turns on 362 8 4 Checks Using Input Signals liis 363 8 4 4 When Module READY flag Xn0 does not turn on 363 8
334. ieedueedd eeu e eid Manual reset 100 p ee eee 7 5 The manipulated value MV Manipulated value be moved from 50 to 80 p MV i s to keep the set value SV stable i o a S T 0 Y i Set value SV 4 v 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 096 every 0 196 Set 1000 to 1000 Input range 173 2 Heating cooling control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc is 096 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 096 of manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the heating proportional band Ph cooling proportional band Pc can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 UnG740 Un G756 Un G772 800 80 The Q64TCN shifts the manipulated value for heating MVh by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 0 to 8096 Overlap dead band Heating proportional
335. ing 44 3 2 Function List This section lists the Q64TCN functions CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Enable Disable Enable or disable D Heating Item Description Standard Reference cooling control control The control mode can be selected from the following modes Standard control Control mode selection Heating cooling control normal mode 162 function Heating cooling control expanded mode Section 4 1 Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Whether to clear or hold the transistor output status when a CPU Control output setting at Page 165 stop error occurs or when a CPU module is turned from RUN to O O j CPU stop error Section 4 2 STOP can be selected The following control methods can be used with the settings of proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D Two position control Page 166 Control method P control O O Section 4 3 Pl control PD control PID control The stable status position in the P control or PD control can be Page 173 Manual reset function O moved manually Section 4 4 The manipulated value MV can be set manually by users without Page 175 Manual control automatic calculation by the PID control Section 4 5 176 Auto tuning function The Q64TCN sets the optimal PID constants automatically O O Section 4 6 In addition to the
336. ing carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s lo
337. ing change completion flag Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F Y1011 Setting operation mode instruction Y1012 Error reset instruction Y1014 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y1010 to Y101F Y1018 E PROM backup instruction Y101B Setting change instruction DO to D8 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for the initial setting D9 Read data storage device using Z P REMFR instruction for E2PROM s PID constants read D10 Write data storage device for Z P REMTO instruction for E7PROM s PID constants read D11 Read data storage device for the Z P instruction for E7PROM s PID constants read D50 Write data error code i D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV 5 D55 CH1 Alert definition c MO For writing set value 0 8 1 For writing set value 1 2 For writing set value 2 5 M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag 3 M100 Master module status check device for the MC and MCR instructions M101 M102 Initial setting auxiliary device 3 M200 to M217 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device 3 M224 to M227 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device g M300 to M305 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read flag 2 M310 M311 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M312 M313 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device M314 M315 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M316 M317 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device SB20 Module status SB47 Baton pass status of own stati
338. ing is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value om Item Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable 4 Write the set parameter to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module Online gt Write to PLC xL Press the switch for a while CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING b Devices used by a user Device Description X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X1010 Module READY flag X1011 Setting operation mode status X1012 Write error flag X1013 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X1010 to X101F X1014 CH1 Auto tuning status X1018 E2PROM write completion flag X101B Sett
339. ing on the front part bottom part of module The function version and serial number on the rating plate are also shown on the front part bottom part of the module Q64TCTTN RUN ALM j 2 sials s z se s 2 s8 f Function version Serial No JequinN eles pue uois19A uonoun J 94 YOSUD oi MOH EZ 35 3 Checking on the system monitor The function version and serial number can be checked on the Product Information List window D Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt _Product Information List Product Information List mE 9 130410000000000 Intelli po a Displaying production number For the Q64TCN is displayed since the production number display is not supported Point The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front part of the module The serial number on the rating plate and front part of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool indicates the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when a new func
340. ing operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 142 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 60 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 9 The measured value of temperature corresponding to the gain value of the sensor two point correction is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 stored as it is One decimal place 1 stored after a multiplication by 10 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Enablement of the stored value Turn Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON gt OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF to enable stored contents 61 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 CD Set temperature of gain value of the sensor two point correction For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following gt Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in
341. ing output signals that could cause a serious accident Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area R of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signal as an input or output signal from the intelligent function module to the programmable controller CPU Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfu
342. ing range The setting range differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area each full scale differs Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 s Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Also the setting range differs depending on alert mode to be set 7 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 a Alert mode Setting range of alert set value Remarks No alert rca OE Temperature measurement range of Upper limit input alert lower limit input alert Same as with standby the input range Upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation alert upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV lower limit full scale to full scale deviation alert using the set value SV Same as with standby and standby second time Upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert upper Same as with standby and lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV within O to full scale standby second time range alert using the set value SV When a value which is out of the setting range is set a write data error error code O00044 and the following situations occur Write error flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO 108 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 L gt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No
343. ing starts this window can be closed f Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 gt 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that stops the auto tuning when an alert is detected This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 s Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads an error code This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is used gt gt Page 328 Section 7 2 2 6 f 341 Burooo Buneeu eui Buiuuoued ueuM EZ uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojy eui BuisN ueuM 342 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X
344. ing whether the temperature process value PV is in the temperature rise completion range or not The following values are stored in this buffer memory area 0 Out of temperature rise completion range 1 Within temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV stays in the temperature rise completion range during the set temperature rise completion soak time 1 is stored in this buffer memory area which is within temperature rise completion range 1 Temperature process value PV CHO Temperature rise judgment flag turns to Within temperature Temperature rise rise completion range 1 at this point completion range Set value SV gt Time Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 Set the temperature rise completion range and temperature rise completion soak time in the following buffer memory areas Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 s Page 130 Section 3 4 2 41 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 gt Page 131 Section 3 4 2 42 Jayng ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 91 92 7 CHO Transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 8 Heating transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 Cooling transistor output flag Un G712 to UnG715 s ON OFF status of transistor output and ON delay output are stored in these flags In the heating cooling control
345. instruction X30 CH1 Set value SV change instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Write data error code Devices where data is written by D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV auto refresh D55 CH1 Alert definition M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING b Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 Open the Parameter window D Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter Click Clear value For Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 Set the parameter 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Clear Value for Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items For control mode to 0 Item 5 Basic setting Input range Set value SV setting Unused channel setting Control basic parameter setting Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc setting 3 0 Integral time setting Derivative time setting Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag Control detail parameter setting
346. intelligent function module a Setting on a remote I O station 1 Createa project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC series and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O for PLC Type Project gt New New Project Cancel PLC Series Q mode q372LP25 Q372BR15 Remotel O be 2 Add the Q64TCTTN to the project on GX Works2 X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Temperature Control Module M Setting Item Reduction Mode Module Name Q64TCTTN S Mount Position No Mounted Slot No 1 Acknowledge Assignment IV Specify start XY address 0010 15lot Occupy 16 points Title setting Tide 353 JON uo ueuw 354 3 Display the Q64TCTTN Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTTN Output Setting at CPLI Stop Error CH3 O CLEAR CH4 D CLEAR Control Made Selection O Standard Control x Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disable X Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting m Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable Moving Averaging Process Sett
347. ion 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Page 154 730 2DA CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W x Section group setting 3 4 2 80 Simultaneous Page 154 731 2DBy CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W O Section gradient data 3 4 2 81 Simultaneous Page 155 732 2DCy CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section dead time 3 4 2 82 Simult mu Page 155 733 2DDy CH1 p iie System area System area 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 83 selection Simultaneous Page 156 734 2 CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R x x Section status 3 4 2 84 Page 157 735 2DFy CH1 Setting change rate limiter unit time setting 0 R W Section 3 4 2 85 i Coolin 105 736 2 0 CH2 System area band Pc band Pc 30 R W x Section v 3 4 2 15 setting setting Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 110 737 2 1 CH2 System area limit output limit output 1000 R W x Section limiter limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Cooling control Page 114 738 2 2 CH2 System area output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section setting setting 3 4 2 23 Page 152 Overlap dead Overlap dead 739 2E3 CH2 System area e ne B M 0 R W x Section g band setting 3 4 2 74 Manual reset Page 152 wem oe em eme mem o m sem i k setting 3 4 2 75 Process value Process value Process value PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page
348. ion 3 4 2 32 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time CHLI Loop disconnection detection dead bend Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Page 125 Section 3 4 2 34 Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 2 CHEE PROMSIEID c nstantsiread Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 instruction Automatic backup setting after auto Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 tuning of PID constants Alert dead band setting Un G164 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 38 Number of alert delay Un G165 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 39 Heater disconnection output off Un G166 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 40 time current error detection delay count CHO Temperature rise completion range Un G167 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 41 setting Temperature rise completion soak Un G168 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 42 time setting PID continuation flag Un G169 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 Heater disconnection compensation Un G170 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 44 function selection CHO Transistor output monitor ON delay Un G175 Page 132 Section 3 4 2 45 time setting CHO CT monitor method switching Un G176 Page 132 Section 3 4 2 46 CHLI Resolution of the manipulated value Un G181 Page 134 Section 3 4 2 48 for output with another analog module
349. ion describes wiring precautions Use separate cables for the AC control circuit and the Q64TCN s external I O signals to avoid influence of AC side surges and induction Do not locate external wires near the main circuit line high voltage circuit lines and load circuit lines of devices other than programmable controllers such as an inverter Also do not bunch external wires with these lines Otherwise the external wires are more likely to be affected by noise surges and induction Ground shielded cables at one end on the programmable controller side However depending on the external noise condition it should be grounded on the other side To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit r S suogneoaud 287 5 4 2 External wiring 1 Q64TCTTN a In the standard control Q64TCTTN LL n L1 m Internal 2 circuit 2 d L Internal circuit Filter Controlled object 2 TE MCN Filter VJ V 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature
350. ion is used 312 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh 5 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All Item Fransfer to CPU Th Write data error code 050 Temperature process value PV 051 Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh Transistor output flag Heating side transistor output flag Alert definition 055 Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh For another analog module output Temperature rise judgment flag Set value SV monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Flag Self tuning Flag Temperature conversion completion flag Process value PV scaling value Simultaneous temperature rise status 7 The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Item Description An error code or alarm code is Write data error code D50 stored The detected temperature value where sensor correction D51 was performed is stored Temperature process value PV The value is stored depending on the detected alert Alert definition D55 2 The number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by using the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh
351. ional band P in this case 1 P ris 100 When the value of the proportional band P is increased the proportional gain Kp decreases Therefore the manipulated value MV for variation of the deviation E becomes small When the value of proportional band P is decreased the proportional gain Kp increases Therefore the manipulated value MV for variation of the deviation E becomes large The following figure shows the proportional band P in reverse action Manipulated value Mv Deviation E 100 Manipulated value MV to deviation E Temperature 0 gt process value PV Current temperature Set value process value PV SV lt Proportional band P 0606006006000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 106 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 16 Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 C Set integral time 1 to perform PID control a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s b In the P control or PD control Set this setting to O For details on control methods refer to the following s Page 166 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 240 240s in all channels 17 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 QAB Set derivative time D to perform PID control a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s b In the P con
352. ions where this flag turns off refer to the following gt Page 203 Section 4 12 6 The following table lists the particular flag and buffer memory addresses of alert definitions for each channel Alertoccurrence Alert definition buffer memory Channel ON OFF status flag address 7 gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 CH1 XnC Un G5 CH2 XnD OFF Alert does not occur Un G6 CH3 XnE ON Alert occurs Un G7 CH4 XnF Un G8 Ex Time chart for CH1 ON CH1 Alert occurrence flag OEE XnC i CH1 Alert definition M Un G5 0 X detected alert definition poss gt Executed by the Q64TCN sjeubis jndul jo sjiejeq BINPOW pauaysues sjeuBls 55 3 3 3 Details of output signals 1 Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Use this signal to select the setting mode or the operation mode OFF Setting mode ON Operation mode Some buffer memory areas can be set only in the setting mode a Buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting mode The following settings can be changed only when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is off If the settings are changed in the operation mode a write data error error code OOO occurs Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name I S S S E Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Resoluti
353. isable of the setting Enable Disable of the setting in Buffer memo the two position control Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 CHO Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 c Manual control 7 gt 175 Section 4 5 The following table lists Enable Disable of the setting Enable Disable of the Buffer memory setting in the manual Remarks control Upper limit output limiter When an output exceeds the upper limit output limiter value the Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 manipulated value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped Enable to the upper limit output limiter value that is set When an output Lower limit output limiter falls below the lower limit output limiter value the manipulated Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped to the lower limit output limiter value that is set Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Cooling upper limit output limiter Disable Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 AR d Default value The following table lists the default value of each buffer memory area S T Buffer memory Default value 5 CHO Upper
354. ise System area 0 R W Section gradient data data 3 4 2 81 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 155 780 30C CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R W Section dead time rise dead time 3 4 2 82 Simult Simult Biens ic Page 185 781 30Dy CH4 E System area B 0 R W x Section AT mode rise AT mode 3 4 2 83 selection selection Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 156 782 30 CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R x x Section status rise status 3 4 2 84 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 157 783 30F y CH4 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting 9 time setting 3 4 2 85 Peak current 7 Page 158 suppression 784 3104 All CHs System area System area 0 R W x Section control group 0 3 4 2 86 setting Page 159 785 311 All CHs Sensor correction function selection 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 87 Page 159 786 3124 All CHs Temperature conversion completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 88 Page 160 787 3134 All CHs Function extension bit monitor 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 89 81 1811 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Address decimal hexadecimal Target channel or current sensor Setting contents Standard control Heating cooling control Mix control Default value 1 Read Write 2 Automati
355. it Heating upper pper limi m pper limi 138 8A CH4 limit output 1000 RAN x output limiter MK output limiter o Page 110 limiter Section m 3 4 2 19 t 139 8 4 Lowerilimit System area 0 R W x output limiter output limiter Duc Output Output Page 112 140 8C CH4 ain variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section imiter setting setting setting 3 4 2 20 Page 113 141 8Dy CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 Adjustment Adjust t Adjustment 1 Pee cai Page 113 142 8E CH4 sensitivity dead Y piod 5 R W x Section H y dead band dead band band setting _ 4g i 3 4 2 22 setting setting Control gucu Heating control Page 114 143 8F y CH4 ro n PU output cycle Mp n 30 RW x Section cycle settin R C i 9 setting 9 3 4 2 23 Page 115 144 901 CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 Control Control Control Page 116 145 91 CH4 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 3 4 2 25 Page 117 AUTO MAN 146 92 BH Jd EE haat 0 RIW x Section mode shift mode shift 9 mode shift 3 4 2 26 Page 118 MAN output t 147 93 CH4 MAN output MAN 0 R W x o Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page us 148 941 CH4 Mon 0 R W x Section limiter temperature rise 3 4 2 28
356. ive tme D setting Loop disconnection detection judgment time Autotuning e Auto tuning start Auto tuning stop Result of automatic backup of PID constant 10 Click MELSOFT Series Works2 11 Check that Status has changed from Executing to Tuned and click cose Auto Tuning PID control Process value Set value 5 _ Manipulated value WV Heating side manipulated value MVh _ Cooling side manipulated value a _ 12 click K MELSOFT Series GX Works2 bad d 182 b Sequence program CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS The execution procedure of auto tuning is as follows Start Q64TCN data setting v Operation mode setting v Auto tuning start Y Auto tuning in progress Auto tuning completion PID constants set Temperature control using PID constants set End Set the buffer memory C Page 177 Section 4 6 2 Switch Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 from off to on Confirm that Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on Switch Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 from off to on Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off and the calculated values are set to the buffer memory addresses gt Page 177 Section 4 6 3 183 uonounJ Buiun 6 Conditions where auto tuning canno
357. ix contr ilabili hexadecimal UOI cooling e A 3 availability sensor control Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 240 F Ou CH4 Mu do 0 R W x setting setting setting 241 F1 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode RW H x setting setting 9 setting 137 Section Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 3 42 52 242 F24 CH4 ee a ne 0 R W x 42 52 setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 243 F 34 CH4 um 0 R W x setting setting setting 244 F4 to System area 255 FF 256 100 CT1 Heater current process value 11 257 1014 CT2 Heater current process value 1 258 102 CT3 Heater current process value 1 259 103 CT4 Heater current process 1 Page 138 n 0 R x x Section 260 104 CT5 Heater current process value 3 4 2 53 261 105 CT6 Heater current process value 262 106 CT Heater current process value 263 107 CT8 Heater current process value 264 108 CT1 CT input channel process setting 265 109 CT2 CT input channel process setting 266 10A4 CT3 CT input channel process setting 267 10By CT4 CT input channel process setting Page 139 0 R W x Section 268 10C CT5 CT input channel process setting 3 42 54 269 10Dy CT6 CT input channel process setting 270 10E CT input channel process setting 271 10F 4 CT8 CT input channel process setting 272 1104 CT1 CT selection 11 2
358. ked based on a reference heater current value load current value detected by a current sensor CT using this function A reference heater current value and heater disconnection alert current value are compared When the reference heater current value becomes lower than the heater disconnection alert current value the heater is regarded as disconnected Heater disconnection is detected every 500ms When transistor output is on for 500ms or less heater disconnection is not detected Heater disconnection detection 012 of Un G5 to Un G8 remains 0 OFF lt gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 The following is the timing output as an alert 500ms x Setting value in Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 If a heater is disconnected longer than the time described above Alarm code 04L1A 4 is stored in Write data error code UnYGO s Page 370 Section 8 7 1 Modules where this function can be used Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN 2 Setting method Follow the instructions below 1 Setthe current sensor CT to be used in CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 gt Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 2 When using a current sensor CT other than CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P H manufactured by U R D Co LTD set CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 7 gt Page 141 Section 3 4 2 57 3 Set the CT input assigned to each channel CT input channel assignment setting Un
359. l 1 2 3 sensor control sad 125 60 3C4 CH1 bx Mi System area System area 0 R W Section detection dead 3 4 2 34 band ii Page 126 61 30 CH1 Unused channel setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 35 Page 127 62 CH1 E2PROM s PID constants read instruction 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 36 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID 128 63 CH4 utomatic backup setting after auto tuning o 0 RW Section constants 3 4 2 37 Z TT Page 96 64 401 CH2 Input range 7 RT R W x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 103 Stop mode i 65 41 CH2 Stop mode Stop mode p 1 RW Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 13 Page 104 Set value SV a 66 42 Set value SV Set value SV SV R Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 14 Heating 105 Proportional proportional proportional 67 43 CH2 30 R W x Section 43H band P setting band Ph band Ph 34 2 15 setting setting d Page 107 i i Integral time I 68 44 Integral time 1 Integral time 1 g 1 RIN x setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 Derivative ti Derivative ti Derivative time Page 106 69 45 CH2 eriva ime eriva ime is 60 RW Section D setting D setting D setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value 70 46 CH2 Alert set value 1 set value 17 0 R W Alert set val Alert set value 71 47 CH2 Alert set value 2 Son ut 0 RW Page 108 S
360. l 2 loops X Heating cooling control 2 loops c 00044 Mix control expanded mode Standard control 2 loops S 2 o lo g 2 0 Y ILL I Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 b0 Auto setting at input range change 0 Disable 1 Enable Switch 3 b1 Setting change rate limiter setting 0 Temperature rise Temperature drop batch setting 1 Temperature rise Temperature drop individual setting 2 L 40jeunBijuo pue Jadojaneq X9 ueuM xipueddy b3 Moving averaging process setting 0 Enable 1 Disable Switch 4 0 Fixed empty Switch 5 0 Fixed empty 379 1 When a value other than 0 to 4 is set a switch setting error error code 000F p occurs In this case the Q64TCN does not operate properly Set the correct value Immediately after the control mode selection is changed a set value discrepancy error error code 001E occurs To clear the set value discrepancy error turn off on and off E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 2 Control in the expanded mode requires an external output module For the system configuration in expanded mode refer to Page 164 Section 4 1 3 380 Appendix 3 2 APPENDICES GX Configurator TC operation When the Q64TCN parameters are configured using GX Configurator TC the display method and contents on windows such
361. le b4 to b15 fixed to 0 Unused 160 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 90 Latest address of error history Un G1279 C22 The latest address of error history is stored The maximum of 16 errors and alarms occurred in the module are recorded C gt Page 272 Section 4 31 91 Error history 1 to 16 Un G1280 to Un G1407 Gig The maximum of 16 errors and alarms occurred in the module are recorded Ex For the error history 1 Buffer memory address p4s to b8 b7 to bO Un G1280 Error code Un G1281 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1282 Month Day Un G1283 Hour Minute Un G1284 Second Day of the week 2 Un G1285 to System area Un G1287 1 For error codes and alarm codes refer to the following Page 367 Section 8 6 Page 370 Section 8 7 2 The following table lists the stored value and corresponding each day of the week Stored value Day of the week 0 Sunday Co AR 1 Monday N w iw c 2 Tuesday oT a S 3 Wednesday a 93 4 Thursday 5 Ev 5 Friday gt co 0 6 Saturday gc 33 For details on the error history function refer to the following g lt C gt Page 272 Section 4 31 161 CHAPTER 4 ruNwcrioNs This chapter explains functions of the Q64TCN Point For the functions indicated with the icon the following terms are used unless otherwise speci
362. le change procedures 404 Appendix 5 5 When parameters were configured using GX Works2 405 Appendix 5 6 When the initial settings were configured using a sequence program 410 Appendix 6 External Dimensions 0 0 0 0 000 cc een een ence enn ene 416 INDEX 418 REVISIONS che bebe ee ve YR R3 v a ew e PER Pur 424 WARRANTY 2 2 facta PA retur eq v eod apt tec nn A TRE FLU 425 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for Screen names and items 7 1 1 Geman Setting method 1 fa 1 shows operating procedures XC shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and Settingparameters Qperatingiprocedure Open th PLC Parameter ialog box Project window gt Parameter Select the Assignment tab the project window Select the type of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 12 Select the model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Set the number of points assigned to each siot Page 74 Section 7 14 Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 15 Seinstra
363. ling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to gt Page 164 Section 4 1 3 2 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to 7 Page 164 48 Section 4 1 3 2 Output signal list CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Output signal signal direction CPU module Q64TCN Device No Standard control Heating cooling control Mix control YnO N A N A N A Yn1 Setting operation mode instruction Setting operation mode instruction Setting operation mode instruction Yn2 Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Yn3 N A N A N A Yn4 CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction Yn5 2 Auto tuning instruction CH2 Auto tuning instruction CH2 Auto tuning instruction 2 Yn6 CH3 Auto tuning instruction CH3 Auto tuning instruction CH3 Auto tuning instruction Yn7 CH4 Auto tuning instruction Auto tuning instruction CH4 Auto tuning instruction Yn8 E2PROM backup instruction E2PROM backup instruction E2PROM backup instruction Yn9 Default setting registration instruction Default setting registration instruction Default setting registration instruction YnA N A N A N A YnB Setting change instruction Setting change instruction Setting change instruction YnC CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forc
364. lled derivative time and is indicated as TD The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of TD derivative time Condition Derivative action is a small value The derivative effect gets small The derivative effect gets large is a large value Though the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value in short cycles The following figure shows a derivative action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E f Time T Manipulated ug value MV KP E e Manipulated value of the Proportional action 9c 22 v j o gt Time 59 20 A derivative action is used as a PD action in combination with a proportional action or PID action in combination with o a proportional and integral actions 2 A derivative action cannot be used by itself 27 1 3 6 28 PID action A PID action performs control using the manipulated value MV calculated by merging the proportional action integral action and derivative action The following figure shows a PID action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E ti Manipulated value MV x Time PID action eae PI action E SCOTUS i 12277777 D action gt Time CH
365. low Normal and Fast For details on the simple two degree of freedom refer to the following gt Page 188 Section 4 7 a Setting range Setting S Set value Description contents 0 Slo Set Slow when reducing an overshoot and undershoot to the change of the set value SV w However the settling time is the longest of the three settings 1 Normal has features between Slow and Fast 2 Fast Set Fast when speeding up the response to the change of the set value SV However an overshoot and undershoot is the largest of the three settings Temperature process value PV Set value SV 2 gt Change Set value SV 1 gt b Default value The default values are set to Slow 0 in all channels 116 Fast E Normal Slow gt Time Set value SV change point CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 26 CHO AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 C29 Select whether to calculate the manipulated value MV by PID operation or to set it manually by the user a Setting range Setting Set value Description contents 0 AUTO Activates the AUTO mode The manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation is used to calculate the ON time of the control cycle Activates the MAN mode The manipulated value MV written in MAN output setting 1 MAN Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 is used to calculate the ON time of the control output cycle
366. lowing alert modes Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 201 uonoun4 Haly ZLY 202 If a setting change rate limiter is specified an alert with standby second time is not active even though one of the following alert modes is selected Setting value Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 a Alert mode name 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time The standby second time is used to prevent alert occurrence when the set value SV is changed If a setting change rate limiter is specified the value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 gradually changes following the set value SV when the set value SV is changed Suppose that the standby second time function is activated under such occasion The alert standby would be alwa
367. m configuration refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System MELSECNET H remote I O module A module with function version D or later is required GX Works2 GX Works2 with the following version is required according to system configuration System configuration GX Works2 version Standard system Version 1 87R or later Remote O station Version 1 34L or later Base unit When a slim type main base unit Q3LISB is used an online module change cannot be performed When an extension base unit Q5L1B that does not require the power supply module is used an online module change cannot be performed for any modules on the base unit APPENDICES Appendix 5 3 Operations of when performing an online module change The following table shows the operations of when performing an online module change Executed x Not executed Operation of the CPU module User operation Operation of Initial settin the Q64TCN AN FROM TO Device test 9 refresh instructions parameters 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y signals turned The module is normally on by the sequence program operating Y Y 2 Remove the module The operation of the module Start the online module change has stopped using GX Work
368. mary delay filter on input from a derivative action and eliminate high frequency noise component in order to perform a PID operation on the deviation E 1 Algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete derivation The algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete derivation is shown below Disturbance D Q64TCN Control response Control object parameters Set value SV Slow 1 Manipulated i Normal value MV 1 Fast 1 1 1 1 1 1 KP TD S 1 0 5 1 1 Temperature Kp Proportional gain Derivative process value PV Ti Integral time S Laplace transform conversion Tp Derivative time 2 Formula The formula used for the Q64TCN is shown below uoneJedo Aid eurinoqy e e nuuoj pue uogeJjedo Ib T EE EN MVn MVn 1 fev PVn TD Me t Sampling cycle MV Incomplete derivative output PV Temperature process value PV Derivative time 7 Derivative The PID control in process value derivation is an operation method which uses the process value PV for the derivation section in order to perform a PID operation Not using deviation for the derivation section drastic output change due to a derivative action is reduced when deviation varies along with the setting value change 23 1 3 2 The Q64TCN actions The Q64TCN performs PID operations i
369. mation N Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History 0285 Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid Error Clear Display Format HEX Solution Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value C DEC uonounj Jea JOJJ3 in old error The latest error is displayed at he bottom line error history is sequentially displayed from Stop Monitor 275 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure prior to the Q64TCN operation the name and setting of each part of the Q64TCN and wiring method 5 1 Handling Precautions This section describes the precautions for handling the Q64TCN Do not drop the module case or do not subject it to strong impact Do not remove the printed circuit board from the case Doing so can cause module failure Tighten the screws such as a module fixing screw within the following torque ranges Undertightening the screws can cause short circuit failure or malfunction Screw Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48N m Terminal screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recomme
370. mbient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG A Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block B A Reference junction of the thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Ambient temperature difference 289 r S z v S 2 Q64TCTTBWN a In the standard control Q64TCTTBWN Internal circuit Internal circuit Filter Controlled object ICH2 Internal Filter circuit 1 Filter Connector Connector CT input circuit 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Ref
371. ment setting Un G264 295 5 4 3 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three phase heater The following figure shows a wiring and setting example to detect a three phase heater disconnection by using the heater disconnection detection function Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN L1 L2 L3 14 L Controlled 77 CH1 object To three phase heater used in CH2 loop To single phase heater used in CH3 loop 4 To single phase heater used in CH4 loop Unused Three phase heater disconnection detection is executed by measuring the currents of two of the three cables In the above wiring example set CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un1G271 as indicated below CT input Buffer memory address Set value CT1 Un G264 1 CT2 Un G265 1 CT3 Un G266 2 CT4 Un G267 2 CT5 Un G268 3 CT6 Un G269 4 CT7 Un G270 0 CT8 Un G271 0 296 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 5 Unused Channel Setting When no temperature sensor is connected to a channel the Q64TCN performs upscale processing for the channel Therefore when a temperature sensor is not connected to a channel where no temperature control is performed the module determines that the temperature process value PV has exceeded the temperature measurement range for the input range and the ALM LED blinks Once the unused c
372. mitted For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 176 Section 4 6 a Buffer memory areas whose set value is backed up to the E PROM The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose setting is backed up Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Heating proportional band Ph Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 setting Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 CHLI Cooling proportional band Pc Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 setting Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time 128 b Setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable c Default value The default values are set to Disable 0 in all channels d Precautions When Enable 1 is set do not perform the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the E PROM Changing the set value of the buffer memory 2 back up s 270 Section 4 30 Default setting registration 7 s Page 58 Section 3 3 3 5 Change to Disable 0 during the auto tuning CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 38 Alert dead band setting 164 T
373. module change cannot be performed for modules on all the base units connected Buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored The following table lists the buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 17 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 20 387 Suljuo 104 suonipuoo xipueddy 1edoje eq Bulsp
374. module operates according to the previous setting when the user does not perform any operation 403 Appendix 5 4 Online module change procedures This section describes two online module change procedures setting parameters using GX Works2 and the setting parameters using a sequence program 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the online module change procedure Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F 16 empty points 2 Procedure The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 405 Appendix 5 5 1 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 410 Appendix 5 6 1 Stoptheoperation g c When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 406 Appendix 5 5 2 When parameters are set on the sequence program gt Page 411 Appendix 5 6 2 When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 407 Appendix 5 5 3 Mount a new module f gt Pag ii 3 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 412 Appendix 5 6 3 Check the operation Remove the module When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 407 Appendix 5 5 4 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 412 Appendix 5 6 4 When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 409 Appendix 5 5 5 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 415 Appendix 5 6 5
375. mperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G1 2 Gai The detected temperature value where sensor correction is performed is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Stored as it is One decimal place 1 Stored after a multiplication by 10 Point When value measured by a temperature sensor exceeds the temperature measurement range the following value is stored When measured value exceeds temperature measurement range Input range upper limit 596 of full scale When measured value falls below temperature measurement range Input range lower limit 596 of full scale 5 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un G707 The result of PID operation based on temperature process value PV is stored in these buffer memory areas The area Un G13 to Un G16 are used for heating in the case of the heating cooling control The following table lists the range of value to be stored Store description Store range in control Stored value when control stops Manipulated value MV 50 to 1050 5 to 105 0 50 5 0 Manipulated value for heating MVh 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 50 5 0 Manipulated value for cooling MVc
376. n Check the baton pass status of the remote I O station Check the cyclic transmission status of the remote I O station Check the parameter communication status of the remote I O station Check the status of the master module Change to the setting mode or operation mode J Flag 0 for setting value write ON 1 Flag 1 for setting value write ON CH2 to 4 Unused channel setting Unused CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING M1 M2 X1010 X1013 Xt K2 D3 J CH1 Input range 2 ki ba CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Upper input alert KO gt K1 gt SET Y101B J Setting change instruction ON Ko T zP REMTO K2 Ki H1 H20 D3 Ki M206 gt 2 2 Ki Hi D4 Ki M208 M M2 X1010 1011 Y101B 2 AF Ar Ar RST Yi01B 4 Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X1010 X1013 101 4 5 1 AF 250 D5 J CH1 Alert set value 1 250 C MoV K200 D6 J CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C MOVP K400 D7 J CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 400 C MOVP KO D8 F CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 0 C KO gt M210 M211 K1 gt M212 M213 K2 gt M214 M215 A K3 gt M216 M217 RST M1 J Flag 1 for setting value write OFF RST M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write OFF KO
377. n G100 Un G132 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 107 Section 3 4 2 17 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 19 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 20 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 A CHLI Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Qo Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 24 T c AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 Q CHO Setting change rate limiter Setting on Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 5 change rate limiter temperature rise a CHLI Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 3 CHLI Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 temperature drop 1 Only during starting 231 232 9 Precautions Before starting the temperature control using the Q64TCN power on a controlled object such as a heater If the temperature control is star
378. n G128 38 resolution 0 1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 50 Loop disconnection detection dead band set value x resolution 50 x 0 1 5 0 C Within the range of the set value SV 5 0 C Loop disconnection is not detected b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 125 Jang ey Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 35 CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 C Set this buffer memory area when treating channels that do not control temperature or are not connected with temperature sensors as Unused Setting them as unused channels stops detection of an alert For details on the unused channel setting refer to the following Page 297 Section 5 5 a Setting range 0 Use 1 Unused b Default value The default values are set to Use 0 in all channels c ON of Default setting registration instruction Yn9 7 gt Page 58 Section 3 3 3 5 When Default setting registration instruction Yn9 is turned on from off Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un1G157
379. n GO is cleared to 0 The following flags and buffer memory bits that turn on when an The temperature process The ALM LED flashes alarm occurs turn off automatically value PV is below the Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF When the temperature process value 020 temperature measurement turns on PV has returned to the value within range that was set as the input Input range lower limit 61 of Un G5 to the temperature measurement range range Un G8 turns on CHD Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF The applicable bit 7 5 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 of Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 The ALM LED flashes When Error reset instruction Yn2 is CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turned OFF ON OFF after a A loop disconnection has been detected turns on current error due to a disconnection CHO Loop disconnection detection b13 of or output off is restored Write data Un G5 to Un G8 turns on error code Un G0 is cleared to 0 The HBA LED turns on The following flags and buffer Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF memory bits that turn on when an 040A A heater disconnection has t rns n alarm occurs turn off automatically neen detected CHO Heater disconnection detection b12 When the current error due to of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on disconnection or output off is restored The HBA LED turns on CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to 05DA A c
380. n ST With vibration ST PID constants are automatically corrected to settle a vibration when a control response becomes oscillatory due to reasons such as the change in the characteristic of a controlled object and conditions for operation The following table lists the operations of the module with vibration ST The listed operations are those under the state where temperature is being controlled with the PID constants set Operation with vibration ST CHO PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 0 OFF In addition Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on 2 PID constants are calculated based on a response waveform PID constants are set in the buffer memory and PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un1G671 is turned 1 ON 4 CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off Temperature process value PV Set value SV Oscillation detected PID constants calculated r r gt Time i Response measured i 4 Self tuning in execution i 14 gt ON i i CHO Auto tuning status A T Xn4 to Xn7 OFF NE ON CHLI PID auto correction status EET E oe bO of Un G575 Un G607 Sr ras euh OFF Un G639 Un G671 i PID constants Before change After change sexuel gt Executed by the Q64TCN a Conditions for vibration ST Vibration ST is executed when the temper
381. n alert status Alert set value x Deviation E x Alert set value Temperature process value PV 7 a Set value SV M E Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 Alert set value a ES 0 ae z Time Alert set value r r Be A Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting gt Page 195 Section 4 12 2 a 198 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS f Setting method alert mode and the set value SV to be referred Select one of the two types of set value SV described in gt 195 Section 4 12 2 a by specifying an alert mode When the alert judgment requires the value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 set one of the following values Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 3 Upper limit deviation alert 4 Lower limit deviation alert 5 Upper lower limit deviation alert 6 Within range alert 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time
382. n forward actions and reverse actions 1 Forward action In a forward action the manipulated value MV is increased when the temperature process value PV increases from the set value SV A forward action is used for cooling control Manipulated value A Temperature 2 Reverse action Set value Starting temperature Manipulated value Temperature Set value Set value gt Starting temperature In a reverse action the manipulated value is increased when the temperature process value PV decreases from the set value SV A reverse action is used for heating control A Manipulated value A Temperature Set value 24 Set value gt Starting temperature A Manipulated value A Temperature Set value lt Starting temperature CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 3 Proportional action P action A proportional action is an action to obtain the manipulated value MV proportional to the deviation difference between the set value SV and the process value PV 1 Proportional gain In a proportional action the relationship between changes in the deviation E and the manipulated value can be expressed in the following formula MV KP E where Kp is a proportional constant and is called proportional gain The manipulated value MV varies in the range from 5 0 to 105 0 The following table describes the difference of actions depen
383. n on and off Error reset instruction Yn2 to clear the value in Write data error code Un GO CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 24 Proportional Band Setting Function Proportional band P values can be set for heating and cooling separately using this function Different gradients can be set by using different proportional band P values in a heating and cooling area Heating proportional Cooling proportional Manipulated value E band Pc for heating MVh band Ph gt 100 A Manipulated value for heating MVh 100 Only cooling proportional band Pc can be narrowed Heating Manipulated value 096 for heating MVh 0 Manipulated value Set value SV for cooling MVc 0 Cooling Manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 100 1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc 1 Setting method a For heating Set the value in Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un1G 131 gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 b For cooling Set the value in CHO Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 C gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 uonouny Bunes pueg pz p 257 4 25 Cooling Method Setting Function An auto tuning calculation formula is automatically selected according to the selected cooling method during auto tuning and the operation is started using this function Select one of the following charac
384. n the simultaneous temperature rise function is used 2 Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used 325 5 e ui BjNpOY eui ueuM uonouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuej nuuis uonounj uoisseJddns xeed ZZ ZL c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed 75 0010 06 Display Filter Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh 4TCTTN Auto Refresh Display All x Item E Fransfer fo PU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value value Transistor output flag Heating side transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value value module output Temperature rise judgment flag Set val AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Flag Self tuning flag Temperature conversion comple Process value PV scaling value Simultat status Cooling side manipulated value Cooling side transistor output flag leating side manipulated leating side manipulated MWh For another analog lue SV monitor tion Flag neous temperature rise The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device d Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 A d dei Write data erro
385. nalog modules such as an A D converter module also set these values Ex When the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCTTBWN is used and the following thermocouple is selected Thermocouple type R Temperature measurement range 0 to 1700 C Resolution 1 Set 1 in CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 When using the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCTTBWN refer to gt Page 97 Section 3 4 2 12 a When using the Q64TCRTN or Q64TCRTBWN refer to gt Page 100 Section 3 4 2 12 b a Setting range of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN The following table lists set values of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 and the corresponding thermocouple types The relationship between temperature unit and setting values is as follows CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Setting of Input range Un1G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Item 1 to 99 Thermocouple is used No input from Output temperature unit is Celsius C other analog modules such as an A D 100 to 199 converter module 1 to 199 Output temperature unit is Fahrenheit F 200 to 299 Other analog modules such as an A D Unit is digit converter module are used 200 to 299 Auto setting at input range change 1 Celsius Input range imi imi Thermocouple po C ee a measurement Resolution type range Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 Un G55 Un G87
386. nce program Executed by the Q64TCN 1 Buffer memory automatically set Refer to 7 5 Page 101 Section 3 4 2 12 220 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 16 Input output with Another Analog Module Function Input and output can be processed using other analog modules such as an A D converter module or D A converter module in the system 1 Input In general a temperature control module uses the temperature measured through thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connected to the module as a temperature process value PV In the Q64TCN the digital input value of current or voltage converted by other analog modules such as an A D converter module in the system can also be used as a temperature process value PV a Setting method Follow the procedure below 1 Seta value within the range of 200 to 299 in Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un1G 128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 2 Store the value of another analog module such as an A D converter module into CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 Ls Page 150 Section 3 4 2 70 Point f the second procedure above is executed ahead of the first procedure a write data error error code 00044 occurs When this function is used the value in the following buffer memory area is used for the temperature process value PV scaling function CHO Temperature process value PV for in
387. nction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NCAUTION Individually ground the shielded cables of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 1000 or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire
388. nded to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration The following table shows the applicable solderless terminal installed to the terminal block For wiring use the cable applicable to the following wire and mount with the applicable tightening torque Use a UL approved solderless terminal and tools recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal The sleeve solderless terminal cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Applicable Temperature Model name Wire diameter Type Material tightening torque rating R1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58N m 22 to 18 AWG Stranded wire Copper wire 75 C or more To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection into the hole in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use For the mounting direction of the module the mounting surface the combination with other devices and the distance from other devices refer to the following LL QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 276 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 2 Settings and the Procedure before Operation The following figure shows the procedure before
389. nding 0 0A to 100 0A 2 on the current sensor CT specification turns is 600 to 9999 can be used For the URL of U R D Co LTD refer to the following L gt Page 32 Section 2 1 6 d Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF e Occurrence of write data error In the following case a write data error error code O00044 occurs as when the setting is out of the setting value Write error flag Xn2 turns on and the error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO When the set value of CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 is out of the setting when Setting change instruction YnB is turned OFF ON gt OFF f Default value The default values are set to When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 0 for all terminals 140 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 is selected the setting of CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 is enabled In advance set CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 corresponding to the sensor to be connected After that select When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 56 Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 C3 Set the reference value of Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 of when the heater is turned on s Page
390. next 270 backup function startup of the module an initial setting program is not required Section 4 30 once this function is executed Up to 16 errors and alarms that occur the Q64TCN are stored Page 272 Error history function the buffer memory as history Section 4 31 Error contents can be notified to the CPU module when errors and Module error history M 274 alarms occur on the Q64TCN Error information is held in the O O collection function OP Section 4 32 memory inside of the CPU module as module error history When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system Page 275 Error clear function O O monitor Section 4 33 47 1517 uonoun4 Z 3 3 This section describes the I O signals of the Q64TCN 3 3 1 I O signal list I O Signals Transferred to from the CPU Module This section describes the assignment and applications of the Q64TCN input signals When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used the device numbers of the I O signals increase by 16 points depending how many empty points the left hand side slots have Therefore I O signals are given as indicated below in this manual Read them according to the module used Ex When 0 is set as the start I O number 1 is assigned as follows When the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCRTN is used Y1 When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used Y11 1 Input signal list Input signal Signal di
391. ng If this instruction is turned off from on during auto tuning the auto tuning stops If the auto tuning stops PID constants in the buffer memory do not change Point f proportional band P heating proportional band Ph is set to 0 auto tuning cannot be performed gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 If Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on and the operation status shifts to the setting mode during auto tuning the auto tuning stops After that even if Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned on from off and the operation status shifts back to the operation mode the auto tuning does not resume To resume the auto tuning turn Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 off from on and turn it on from off again For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following s Page 176 Section 4 6 4 2 backup instruction Yn8 Use this signal to write the buffer memory data to the 2 Turning this instruction from off starts the data writing to the 2 For the buffer memory areas whose data is to be backed up refer to the following Page 59 Section 3 4 1 a When data writing to the E PROM has completed normally E PROM write completion flag Xn8 turns on sjeuBis yndjno jo sjed BINPOW peuejsue1 sjeuBIs b When data writing to the EPROM has not completed normally E PROM write fail
392. ng for sensor two point correction again The value set for sensor two point correction of when an error occurred is not written in the Q64TCN To use the value set for sensor two point correction even after the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled back up the value with the following method Turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 Page 57 Section 3 3 3 4 4 JOSUSS 219 4 15 Auto setting at Input Range Change When the input range is changed using this function automatically changes related buffer memory data to prevent an error outside the setting range Set the function on the Switch Setting window For details on the setting method refer to the following L gt Page 299 Section 6 2 The following is the setting timing Reflects an output signal and buffer After buffer memory values set automatically at the end memory values when the processing of the processing by 500ms are changed turn on and starts by 500ms then off Setting change instruction YnB Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Before change X After change ON Setting change instruction YnB OFF Buffer memory set automaticall ry y User setting s ON Setting change completion flag XnB A Sampling cycle 500ms 500ms 500ms Reflect Reflect Executed in a seque
393. ng side proportional band Pc setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Loop disconnection detection judgment time Auto tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start i _ Auto tuning stop g 7 Status Result of automatic backup of PID constant uiejs s puepuels e y ueuM ZZ uonoun esu eunjejeduje snoeuejnuuis uonounj uorsseuddns jueuno eed piepuelsS ZZ 327 f Program example where the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read L gt Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that stops the auto tuning when an alert is detected D55 8 X10 14 14 qM RST Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF D56 8 X10 Y15 X15 z ae RST Yi5 CH2 Auto tuning instruction OFF D57 8 X10 Y16 X16 _ d RST Y16 CH3 Auto tuning instruction OFF D58 8 X10 Y17 X17 Y RST Yi Auto tuning instruction OFF Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM X24 X10 YIB Yi8 r CH1 E PROWMss PID constants read LAS At LTOP Ui H3E Ki Ki instruction Requested CH2 E PROM s PID constants read T
394. nge Fix the Fix the Page 107 CHO Integral The setting 1 to 1 to time I settin Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 settingto settingto 3600 s 3600 s Section i i t 0 3 4 2 16 NN 7 Fix the Fix the Page 107 CHO Derivative The setting 1 to 1 to time D settin UmG37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 a setting to 3600 s setting to 3600 s Section i i g is ignored 0 3 4 2 17 CHLI Upper limit HN Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 output limiter 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Lower limit Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 UnG139 output limiter Page 110 CHO Heating The setting upper limit output Un G42 UnG74 Un1G106 Un G138 is ignored 3 42 19 limiter e 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 CHLI Cooling upper limit output Un G721 Un G737 UnG753 Un G769 limiter CHLI Output The setting Page 112 variation limiter Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 1 1 to 1000 0 1 s to 100 0 s Section setting is ignored 3 4 2 20 Configure the setting in the range from 1 to CHO Adjustment 100 0 1 Page 113 sensitivity dead Un G46 Un G78 UnG110 Un G142 tos 09 The setting is ignored Section band setting P 3 4 2 22 toward the full scale of the set input range 171 Pours jonuo Buffer memory address Setting range Buffer Two memory area n P PD PI PID Reference
395. nipulated value for heating MVh 0 10096 i i Heati Cooling starts at 215 0 C eating 0 gt process value PV i Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling 100 i i 260 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Dead band setting in two position control three position control Set the dead band in two position control Three position control can be achieved by setting a dead band area in addition to areas for the manipulated value for heating MVh 10096 and the manipulated value for cooling MVc 10096 Manipulated value i for heating MVh 0 i Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only i manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 for cooling 0 manipulated value for heating MVh 0 Heating proportional band Ph 0 Cooling proportional band Pc No setting required 100 i Heating Integral time I Temperature when 1 No setting required i i cooling starts i Derivative time D No setting required adi Temperature gt process value PV 0 1 Set value SV Cooling 100 Input range 4 Setting method Set the function in the following buffer memory area Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 s Page 152 Section 3 4 2 74 uonouny pueg peeg dejie Q 261 4 27 Temperature Conversion Function Using Un
396. normal sensor correction one point correction when using the program Follow the instructions below 1 Set Normal sensor correction one point correction 04 in Sensor correction function selection Un1G785 7 gt Page 159 Section 3 4 2 87 2 Set the correction value in Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 7 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 21 212 2 Sensor two point correction function CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS With this function the difference between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature between the two points selected in advance a corrected offset value and a corrected gain value is stored Based on this gradient the difference between a sensor and the actual temperature is corrected Sensor two point correction is performed in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 off In addition set Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 to Monitor 1 CH Temperature process value PV Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 correction CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G64
397. nstallation Confirmation Module Control Restart Status Guidance Target Module I O Address 0010 Module Q64TCTTN Status Ire Module Selection Completed hen you change the intelligent Function module lease turn off Y signal of the changed module lease press next button when you are ready Point Open the System Monitor Window Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module to be changed online Click Execution to enable a module change When the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 407 Appendix 5 5 3 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on 406 3 Mounting a new module Online Module Change
398. nt function Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X14 CH1 Auto tuning status X18 E PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction At a Ime X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X30 CH1 Set value SV change instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Write data error code D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV D55 CH1 Alert definition MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING b Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used LF Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20
399. ntrol output 38 42 Control output setting at CPU stop error 165 Control switching monitor UnG183 135 Cooling method 258 Cooling method setting Un G719 151 CT monitor method switching UnG176 132 CT ratio setting 141 12 536 10 32 GTL 12 9536 8 5 nes oe iE 32 CTL 12 856 10 32 CTE 6 P sic oe thea Be Oa Sie Ged eRe ERR EA eg 32 GTL 6 P H ia ute ok ea In 32 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to UMG 2715 20 bile PA eee ae 138 139 CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 UTC 140 141 CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 140 Heater current process value Un G256 to UniG263 5 dE 2 eae a 138 Reference heater current value Un G280 to UniG287 e Re EE 138 141 Current sensor for heater disconnection detection 32 Data read from 2 271 Data write to 2 270 Dead tts e aet er 260 Dead band setting 38 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 58 126 Default value write completion flag Xn9 53 Derivative action 27 Derivative action selection 189 Deviation 195 Dielectric withstand volt
400. number of alert delay the system is not put in the alert status if the number of sampling is 4 or less Temperature process value PV A Alert set value Set value SV P gt Time Sampling count 3 times 5 times Alert status Non alert status Alert status 10 Alert mode and settings The following table shows the alert modes and validity availability of related settings CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Active Yes O Inactive No Alert with Alert dead band Number of alert Alert with standby second setting delay standby i ARR 205 Page 206 Page 200 Section 4 12 8 Section 4 12 9 Section 4 12 3 701 Section 4 12 4 Upper limit input alert _ Input 194 Section 4 12 1 alert Lower limit input alert gt S 194 Section 4 12 1 Upper limit deviation alert gt Page 196 Section 4 12 2 b Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV gt Page 196 Section 4 12 2 b Lower limit deviation alert Page 197 Section 4 12 2 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV L gt Page 197 Deviation Section 4 12 2 c alert Upper lower limit deviation alert Page 197 Section 4 12 2 d Upper lower limit deviation
401. o 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1 0 to 1200 0 to 2100 J 0 003 0 006 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 800 0 200 to 400 200 to 200 0 to 700 1 to 200 300 to 400 T 0 to 400 0 004 0 008 200 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 to 1700 1 0 030 0 to 3000 1 0 054 0 to 1800 2 1 0 038 0 to 3000 2 1 0 068 0 to 400 1 0 to 1800 1 0 005 E 0 to 1000 0 003 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 N 0 to 1300 1 0 006 0 to 2300 1 0 011 0 to 400 0 to 700 1 1 0 009 U 200 to 200 0 004 300 to 400 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 0 to 400 0 to 800 1 1 0 006 0 to 900 0 to 1600 L 0 003 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 900 0 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS JF Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring type measurement Resolution resistance of 12 measurement Resolution resistance of 10 range cio range CF O PLII 0 to 1200 1 0 005 0 to 2300 1 0 010 W5Re W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 017 0 to 3000 1 0 021 1 Means temperature error per Q of wiring resistance of the thermocouple The error varies depending on measured temperature or ambient temperature The temperature error can be corrected by the sensor correction function Page 209 Section 4 14 2 While temperature can be measured within less than 400 C 800 F the accuracy cannot be guaranteed 2 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN The following table lists the types of platinum resistance
402. o off in Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 186 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 10 Adjustment after auto tuning To change the control response toward the PID constants calculated by auto tuning change the setting in the following buffer memory area Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un1G 145 s Page 116 Section 3 4 2 25 Point In the system where the temperature rise rapidly auto tuning may not be performed properly due to the excessive temperature rise during the auto tuning Therefore for a sequence program to perform auto tuning incorporate the alert function so that the auto tuning will be stopped if an alert occurs For details on the sequence program refer to the following Page 359 CHAPTER 8 11 During auto tuning loop disconnection detection function For details on the during AT loop disconnection detection function refer to the following gt 255 Section 4 23 uonounJ Buiun ony 187 4 7 Simple Two degree of freedom This is the simplified control form of the two degree of freedom PID control In this form of PID control the Q64TCN controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also the control response parameter The response speed toward the change of the set value SV can be selected from three levels General PID control is called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to
403. ode instruction Yn1 or Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on When Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 turns on and off and PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 5 Ex When an error occurs in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Un1G192 and CH1 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 0CO 368 hex in the buffer memory address with the smallest number Un G192 is stored in Error code UnYGO CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING When a value outside the setting range is written in the following buffer memory areas while in setting mode the error code 00014 is stored Switching to operation mode without error reset changes the error code to LILILI3 If this happens take the corrective action for error code O00034 Buffer memory area Buffer memory address Reference name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 Error code priorities are as described below Priority 663667 5H 24 When error codes are in the same priority level Higher Lower the lower error addresses are prioritized When a high priority error occurs during a low priority error the error code of the high priority error is written ov
404. ogram v Execution history Force OFF Force OFF Force OFF Force OFF 3 Ifthe buffer memory data to be saved beforehand is not recorded monitor the data in Buffer memory batch monitor and record it D Online gt Monitor gt Buffer memory batch Point If PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off CPU continuation error such as SP UNIT DOWN and UNIT VERIFY ERR is occurring due to an error in the module to be changed the buffer memory data cannot be saved 396 APPENDICES 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor Installed status Base 5 Base Module Wee EE 3i Man bes Diagnostics gt Online module iti ant s 2 T 9 o c Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module to be changed Es online r Parameter status r Mode C System moni
405. ol normal mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a system area Available only when the mix control normal mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a System area 2 Buffer memory address for error history CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS _ E PROM Address Default Read Automatic 2 3 Target 2 write decimal h i Setting contents value Write setting Reference cnanne HY hexadecimal 4 2 availability 4 Page 161 1279 4FFH All CHs Latest address of error history 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 90 1280 5004 Error code 1281 501 Upper 2 Lower digits of year digits of year Page 161 1282 5024 All CHs History 1 Error Month Day 0 R x x Section occurrence 3 4 2 91 1283 503 time Hour Minute 81 1284 504 Second Dayne week 1285 505 to System area 1287 507 1288 508 Page 161 to All CHs History 2 Error code error occurrence time Data 0 R se Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1292 50C 42 91 1293 50D to System area 1295 50F 1296 5104 Page 161 Error code error occurrence time Data i to All CHs History 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 91 1300 514 42 91 1301 5154 to System area 1303 517 1304 5184 Page 161 p
406. on For details on the derivative action selection function refer to the following gt Page 189 Section 4 8 a Setting range 0 Measured value derivation 1 Deviation derivation b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value All channels are set to Measured value derivation 0 153 154 80 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 Set a group to perform the simultaneous temperature rise function for each channel The simultaneous temperature rise function enables channels in the same group to complete the rise of temperature simultaneously When the control mode is the heating cooling control this setting is invalid For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following 5 Page 238 Section 4 20 a Setting range of the standard control 0 No simultaneous temperature rise 1 Group 1 selection 2 Group 2 selection b Setting range of the mix control 0 No simultaneous temperature rise 1 Simultaneous temperature rise The setting range in the mix control does not include group selection because the mix control has only two channels for the standard control c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB
407. on SB49 Data link status own station SW70 0 Baton pass status of each station station number 1 SW74 0 Cyclic transmission status of each station station number 1 SW78 0 Parameter communication status of each station station number 1 T100 to T104 Interlock for own station and other stations 355 NO 356 c Program example Write the program to the CPU module on the master station Program that checks the operation status of the remote I O station SB47 H T100 SB49 H K3 T101 SW70 0 H K4 T102 SW74 0 H K3 T103 SW78 0 H K3 EM X SB20 T102 T104 z t YF CAR r g YF Mc NO Mio SET M101 1 __ M100 M101 XiO10 _ t H SET Mi02 M101 XiQ10 1 Add the following MCR instruction to the end of the program LMCR NO Program that changes the setting operation mode x23 Y101B 1 1 CY1011 Initial setting program X20 M102 _ 1 PLS MO MO E LSET M1 MI M2 X1010 X1013 LAS 1 r FMOVP Ki DO K3 gt M200 M201 E i Ki gt M202 M203 h gt gt 7 K Ki Ht H5D Ki M200 2 zPREMTO Uu Kd Ki H1 H7D Di K1 M202 k2 9 12 IO K Ki H1 H9D D2 K1 M204 Check the baton pass status of the master station Check the data link status of the master statio
408. on of the manipulated value for Un G181 Page 134 Section 3 4 2 48 output with another analog module Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 set for each current sensor CT Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 Sensor two point correction offset Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 58 value measured value Sensor two point correction offset Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 59 value corrected value Sensor two point correction gain Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 Page 143 Section 3 4 2 60 value measured value Sensor two point correction gain Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 Page 143 Section 3 4 2 61 value corrected value Sensor two point correction offset Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 Page 144 Section 3 4 2 62 latch request Sensor two point correction gain Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 Page 144 Section 3 4 2 64 latch request Number of moving averaging Un G698 Un G699 Un G700 Un G701 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 72 Cooling method setting Un G719 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 73 Process value PV scaling function
409. on value setting x 0 01 CHLI alert set value 1 CHLI primary delay digital filter setting Unit s CHLI alert 2 mode setting CHLI upper output limiter x 0 196 CHO alert set value 2 CHLI lower output limiter x 0 196 Initial setting CHLI alert 3 mode setting CHLI output variation limiter x 0 196 adjustment sensitivity dead band setting alert set value 0 196 CHLI alert 4 mode setting AT bias alert set value 4 CHLI auto tuning mode selection Alert dead band setting x 0 196 unused channel setting Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Alert delay count 10ms CHLI loop disconnection detection judgment time os Manipulated value resolution switching Unit s Temperature rise completion range setting Unit CHLI loop disconnection detection dead band deg Temperature rise completion soak time setting heater disconnection alert setting 96 DN Unit min Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count uoneJedo 5 1 z xipueddy The initial settings are written in the CPU module Turning the CPU module to RUN automatically writes the setting data into the Q64TCN and the settings become enabled 2 L J0jeun ijuo pue X9 Burs ueuM xipueddy 383 Function Description Auto refresh setting Set
410. onnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 23 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function This function detects loop disconnections during auto tuning AT With this function a channel that is not controlled can be detected during auto tuning thus the error channel is detected more than two hours before the auto tuning error occurs The auto tuning continues even if an alert is output for the loop disconnection detection For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following s Page 253 Section 4 22 Point This function is enabled even when the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is used The loop disconnection detection dead band setting is disabled in loop disconnection detection during AT The dead band is not set 1 Conditions to start the during AT loop disconnection detection function Enable 1 is set to During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable setting UnXG57 1 A value other than 0 is set to Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 The standard control is set for the control mode The function can be used for CH3 or CH4 where the mix control is set The during AT loop disconnection detection function does not operate if the above conditions are not met An error or alarm does not occur even though the conditions
411. ons Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedures system configuration parameter settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the Q series temperature control module Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN hereafter abbreviated as Q64TCN Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems B Relevant modules Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer or GX Configurator CT refer to the following gt Page 378 Appendix 3 Inthe Temperature Con
412. ontrol anc 0 for heating cooling control Point ctive only in contra and PD control This function is inactive wher integral time I is other than jaunt setting UnG724 Un G740 Unt ignored even if itis set Note that a write data error error code CIDEI4y occurs if it is outside the setting range 1 Standard control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value MV is 50 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 50 of manipulated value an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the proportional band P can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manus reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 300 20 The QS4TCN shifts the manipulated value MV by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 50 to 80 onfigu e the fellows Proportional band eee Manual rese Manual reset range 100 0 t Set 1000 to Input range The following table describes the meaning of each icon Icon Meaning This icon means that the buffer memory area or function be used in all control modes Standard This icon means that the buffer memory area or function for temperature c
413. ontrol can be used in the standard control The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels CH1 to in the standard control CH3 and CH4 in the mix control normal mode CH3 and CH4 in the mix control expanded mode Heating cooling This icon means that the buffer memory or function for temperature control can be used in the heating cooling control The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels CH1 and CH2 in the heating cooling control normal mode CH1 to CH4 in the heating cooling control expanded mode CH1 in the mix control normal mode CH1 and CH2 in the mix control expanded mode 15 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description Q64TCTTN The abbreviation for the Q64TCTTN temperature control module The abbreviation for the Q644TCTTBWN temperature control module with the Q64TCTTBWN disconnection detection function Q64TCRTN The abbreviation for the Q64TCRTN temperature control module The abbreviation for the Q64TCRTBWN temperature control module with the Q64TCRTBWN disconnection detection function Q64TCN A generic term for the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN PID constants A generic term for the proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D Temperature sensor A generic term
414. operating the Q64TCN Start Mounting the module Mount the Q64TCN in a slot Wiring Wire external devices to the Q64TCN L gt Page 287 Section 5 4 Switch setting Configure settings using GX Works2 L gt Page 299 Section 6 2 Configure the initial setting NO and the auto refresh setting using GX Works2 Configure the initial setting Initial setting Configure the initial setting using GX Works2 lt gt Page 300 Section 6 3 Configure NO Configure the initial setting Initial setting Create a sequence program for writing initial values using the FROM TO instructions gt Page 306 CHAPTER 7 the auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting Configure the auto refresh setting using GX Works2 lt gt Page 303 Section 6 4 Execution of auto tuning Configure auto tuning to set PID constants s Page 179 Section 4 6 5 a Programming Create and check a program without using the FROM TO instructions 57 Page 306 CHAPTER 7 Warmup operation when the Q64TCTTN or the Q64TCTTBWIN is used v Execution of auto tuning Configure auto tuning to set PID constants gt Page 183 Section 4 6 5 b Programming Create and check a program without using the FROM TO instructions lt gt Page 306 CHAPTER 7 Configure warmup op
415. ormal Check Item Action Is the thermocouple wiring resistance value too high Check the thermocouple wiring resistance value and check whether a difference in the temperatures was caused by the wiring resistance gt Page 40 Section 3 1 1 Use the sensor correction function to correct the difference in the temperatures caused by the wiring resistance 7 Page 209 Section 4 14 366 8 6 Error Code List CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING When an error occurs in the Q64TCN during data write to the CPU module or data read from the CPU module one of the following error codes is stored in Write data error code UnYGO In addition the error occurred is notified to the CPU module Error code hexadecimal Cause Operation at error occurrence Action The operation varies depending on Check that the terminal block or the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is not ISI p09 JOU 98 0001 Hardware error disconnected or loose the symptom Replace the Q64TCN Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The data written is retained When data is written to multiple ee ae Van SH O on and off Error reset instruction 4 Data other than 0 is being written to system areas the address with the 00024 th t 2 smallest number of the buffer Yn2 Delete the program that is writing memory area wher
416. ormally When the data writing fails perform auto tuning again by turning Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 ON OFF ON If the data writing fails even after executing auto tuning again a hardware error can be the reason Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Point P By referring to this flag at the completion of auto tuning whether the automatic data backup is completed normally or not can be checked After confirming that the following flags are on set Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 to Disable 0 Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 when automatic backup is completed normally Write failure flag 612 to 615 of Un G31 when automatic backup fails If auto tuning is executed under Enable 1 although PID constants are stored after auto tuning is complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn off For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following s Page 176 Section 4 6 95 Jejnq ey siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t 96 12 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 QB Select the set value according to temperature sensor temperature measurement range output temperature unit Celsius C Fahrenheit F digit and resolution 1 0 1 which are used with the Q64TCN 1 In the case of input from other a
417. oth heating and cooling To heat up the target subject its heating mean is turned on and its cooling mean is turned off To cool down the target subject its heating mean is turned off and its cooling mean is turned on 162 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Selectable control mode A control mode can be selected from five modes Select the control mode on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following gt Page 299 Section 6 2 Control mode Contents Number of controllable loops Standard control Performs the standard control of four channels Standard control 4 loops Heating cooling control Performs the heating cooling control CH3 and CH4 cannot be used Heating cooling control 2 loops normal mode Performs the heating cooling control The number of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the system Heating cooling control Heating cooling control 4 loops expanded mode Standard control 2 loops Heating cooling control 1 loop Performs the standard control and the heating cooling control CH2 cannot be used Mix control normal mode Standard control 2 loops Heating cooling control 2 loops Performs the standard control and the heating cooling control The number of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the system Mix control expanded mode Control for each channel is as follows
418. ount Un c166 8 Set the limit value for consecutive heater disconnection detections and output off time current error detections so that the errors exceeding the limit value triggers an alert judgment For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following Page 265 Section 4 28 For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to the following Page 269 Section 4 29 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is 3 to 255 times c Default value The default value is set to 3 times 41 Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 CJ Set the vertical range of the temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV meets the following conditions the temperature rise is completed Set value SV Temperature rise completion range x Temperature process value PV x Set value SV Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise Set value SV judgment range Temperature rise completion range 777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777 When Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 enters the temperature rise judgment range CHLI Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 is set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 Set the time from the temperature rise completion to Within temperature
419. out any partial heat exaggeration This function saves energy and cost Suppression of peak current Current flows into a heater can be suppressed by controlling output so that each channel s output does not turn on at the same time as other channels This function saves energy and cost RFB limiter function The RFB Reset feed back limiter suppresses overshoot which is liable to occur at a startup or when a temperature process value PV is increased Correction of temperature process value PV The difference between the temperature process value PV and actual temperature can be corrected easily using the following functions Normal sensor correction one point correction function Corrects the difference by setting the rate of correction value to the full scale of the input range Sensor two point correction function Corrects the difference based on the inclination of the line on the two points set in advance Primary delay digital filter setting Smoothens transient noise and absorbs drastic change EPROM for backing up set values The set values in the buffer memory such as the setting related to PID control can be stored into E2PROM for data backup The values do not need to be reset after turning the power on from off or releasing the CPU module from its reset status Using the test function of the programming tool to write data directly to the buffer memory the minimum sequence program required is LD OUT Yn1
420. p or more have elapsed from the start of instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off self tuning When CHLI Self tuning setting Un G574 b10 Self tuning error When the change rate of the process Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do value PV during self tuning is less than not run the ST 0 1 125 C minute This flag is also set to 0 OFF in the following When the temperature process value PV cases is out of the temperature measurement When the self tuning starts by changing the range set value SV When required measurement data is not When the vibration ST starts by vibration obtained because the manipulated value caused by disturbance of the process value MV does not reach the upper limit output PV limiter value or the lower limit output limiter value until the measurement is completed When the temperature process value PV decreases by 1 C F or more though it should increase after the self tuning is started as the starting ST When temperature process value PV increases by 1 C F or more though it should decrease after the self tuning is started as the starting ST b11tob15 fixed to 0 Unused 1 2 148 Indicates the values of CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the
421. ponse to the change of the set value SV degrades n the two degree of freedom PID control a manipulated value MV is determined considering the set value SV or variations In this form of PID control response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other b Two degree of freedom PID control and simple two degree of freedom PID control The following figure is a block diagram of the two degree of freedom PID control Added function for two degree of freedom PID control Object to be controlled Disturbance D Set value i m 1 G e I H gt gt SV Ti s Manipulated 5 d value MV 1 3 ar 1 BTi s Temperature process value PV By setting a and above properly optimum control can be achieved Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of freedom PID control Therefore the Q64TCN operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified 22 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 About the PID Operation The Q64TCN can perform PID control in process value incomplete derivation 1 3 1 Operation method and formula The PID control in process value incomplete derivation is an operation method which puts a pri
422. process value PV circuit Internal 1 1 1 Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block Ambient B A Reference junction of the thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor temperature difference 288 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION b In the heating cooling control Q64TCTTN Internal circuit 4 L1H Internal circuit 2 A n L2H C lj Internal A V circuit 2 4 L2C E lj Internal JF J circuit des COM b 24VDC Heating Cooling Controlled 1 Ne ne u hn CH1 Filter CH1 Internal circuit 1 C 5 R CH2 CH2 Filter 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the a
423. put with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following gt Page 194 Section 4 12 2 Output Instead of the transistor output from the temperature control module analog output values from other analog modules such as a D A converter module can be used as the manipulated value MV a Setting method Follow the procedure below for the standard control 1 Setavalue in Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un1G181 gt Page 134 Section 3 4 2 48 2 Store the value in CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 into the buffer memory in other analog module such as a D A converter module Page 133 Section 3 4 2 47 uoun Bojeuy 1eujouy uiv Poi oint When the manipulated value MV is 5 0 to 0 0 0 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module When the manipulated value MV is 100 096 to 105 096 4000 12000 16000 20000 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module The manipulated value MV in a percentage value is stored into Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module digital output value in real time 221 4 17 on Delay Output Function This function allows the user to set the delay response scan time delay of t
424. r Version 8 620 or later Version 8 68W or later Version 8 76E or later Version 1 23Z or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used N A N A Version 6 or later SWOD5C QTCU 10B or later 1 For the function available in GX Configurator TC refer to the following gt Page 383 Appendix 3 2 2 31 suieis S ejqeouddy 2 32 5 6 Point Depending on the version of GX Configurator TC available systems and CPU modules are different Temperature sensor For usable temperature sensors refer to the following gt Page 40 Section 3 1 1 Current sensor for heater disconnection detection The following table lists current sensors for heater disconnection detection available with the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN Model name Remarks Manufacturer CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 1 CTL 12 S36 10 0 0 to 100 0A CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A U R D Co LTD www u rd com english CTL 6 P 0 00 to 20 00A 1 CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 The CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P be used although they have been discontinued For how to select current sensors for heater disconnection detection refer to the following Page 140 Section 3 4 2 55 s Page 141 Section 3 4 2 57 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 Using the Q64TCN with Redundant CPU This section describes the use of the Q64TCN with the redundant CPU 1
425. r Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 g Other conditions In addition to the conditions described up until here if any of the following conditions applies auto tuning ends in fail CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF has been turned on from off 7 5 Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 Hardware failure has occurred n standard control Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 has been set to 0 has been set to two position control 7 s Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 In heating cooling control Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 has been set to 0 has been set to two position control Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 8 Operation on completion of auto tuning a Normal completion The Q64TCN operates as follows Turns off Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Stores the PID constants in the buffer memory lt gt Page 177 Section 4 6 3 Stores a value in Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 If this was set to 0 s at the start of auto tuning the setting remains unchanged b Abnormal completion The Q64TCN operates as follows Turns off CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Does not store the PID constants in the buffer memory gt Page 177 Section 4 6 3 9 Checking the completion of auto tuning The completion of auto tuning can be checked by the status change from on t
426. r TC A setting and monitoring tool added in GX Developer for temperature control modules Buffer memory The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data such as setting values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Model Item name Quantity Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTN temperature control module 1 Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCTTBWN temperature control module with the disconnection detection function 1 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTN temperature control module 1 Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCRTBWN temperature control module with the disconnection detection function 1 Q64TCTTN RTN U HW Before Using the Product 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview This chapter describes the overview of the Q64TCN 1 The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN perform PID operation to reach the target temperature based on input from an external temperature sensor The modules control temperature by transistor output The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN possess the auto tuning function by which proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D for PID operation are automatically set The Q64TCTTN accepts type J S R N L PL Il and W5Re W26Re thermocouples The Q64TCRTN accepts type Pt100 and JPt100 platinum resistance thermometers Programmable controller CPU Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Buffer memory
427. r code ai e D50 stored The detected temperature Temperature value where sensor correction 051 D52 D53 D54 process value PV was performed is stored us The value is stored depending Alert definition D55 D56 D57 D58 on the detected alert The number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by using the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh When the setting item reduction mode is set consecutive devices are automatically set to the grouped setting items For details on the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh refer to the following 3 Page 303 Section 6 4 d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the p rogrammable controller XZ Online gt Write to PLC 326 ui or Power OFF ON CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning X Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt ak Auto Tuning Weg Process value PV Set value 5V _ Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh Cooling side manipulated value PID constant Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooli
428. r disconnection alert current value are compared If the heater current process value is larger than the heater disconnection alert current value an output off time current error occurs Output off time current errors are detected every 500ms When transistor output is off for 500ms or less output off time current errors are not detected Output off time current error b14 of Un G5 to Un G8 stays 0 OFF Ls Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 The following is the timing output as an alert 500ms x Setting value for Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 If an output off time current error status lasts longer than the time described above Alarm code 05 is stored Write data error code UnXGO Page 370 Section 8 7 1 Modules where this function can be used Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN 2 Setting method The setting method is the same as that for the heater disconnection detection function 5 Page 265 Section 4 28 4 uonoejeq 20229 1ueunz 1ndino 6z v 269 4 30 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 270 This function allows buffer memory data to be stored in E PROM and backed up The backed up data is transferred from E PROM to the buffer memory when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled Therefore temperature can be controlled without writing data when the power is
429. r lower limit value Set the value where the upper limit 00054 value output limiter or the upper lower When data is written to multiple value is greater than the lower limit limit setting limiter is invalid system areas the address with the value smallest number of the buffer memory area where an error was detected is stored 5 The data written is ignored The setting cannot be changed until The setting value is being changed After turning off on and off Error reset 00064 while Default setting registration OMM AUN instruction Yn2 change the setting h The content of Write data error instruction Yn9 was on value code Un GO does not change even if another write error occurs The data written is retained E h When data is written to multiple system areas the address with the Hacia TOO smallest number of the buffer point sensor compensation offset value memory area where an error was 5 measured value is smaller than the F detected is stored 1 2 point sensor compensation setting 2 point sensor compensation gain 00074 When both the offset value and is invalid value measured value and the 2 gain value are within the input F point sensor compensation offset range and the offset value is value compensation value is greater than or equal ie the gain smaller than the 2 point sensor value the gain value address is
430. ransistor output By setting a delay and monitoring the ON delay output flag and external output on the program disconnection of external output can be determined The following figure is an example using the ON delay flag Scan time delay CPU module Disconnection is determined based on the ON OFF status K p of the contact of the input module Q64TCN Input module 1 Setting method and ON delay output flag Response delay Sensor ON OFF status Transistor output External current sensor Heater Set a value in the following buffer memory area Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 1 Page 132 Section 3 4 2 45 222 4 18 Self tuning Function CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Standard The Q64TCN constantly monitors the control state When the control system is oscillatory this function allows PID constants to be automatically changed under the following situations such as After the control has been just started When the set value SV is changed When the characteristics of a controlled object fluctuates Unlike the auto tuning function a normal control response waveform is monitored and PID constants are automatically calculated and set This allows an object to be controlled with the most suitable PID constants all the time without disturbance 1 Differences between auto tuning and self tuning
431. rd control such as auto tuning self 5 D tuning and error code read gt Page 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f 3 Program that reads an error code e 8 X10 S FROM Ut HO D50 K1 1 Read a write data error code to D50 Mow 058 Kive 1 Output data read from a write data z error code to Y60 to Y6F O SET Y12 1 Error reset instruction ON TE Up D50 HO RST Y12 Error reset instruction OFF X10 xi Read CH1 Temperature process Lt 1 FROM H9 D51 K1 value PV to D51 343 7 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O Net This section describes the program example of when the module is used on a remote I O network Point P For details on the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the following 1 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the module is used on the remote I O network Remote master station Station No 0 Remote I O station Station No 1 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 X Y00 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F QJ72LP25 25 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y 1010 to X Y101F Heater Network No 1 gt Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 to 1300 C Point P When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the
432. re process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 The scaling value can be calculated as follows Process value PV scaling value 100 0 x 3600 2000 Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 4000 2000 0 93 333 93 All decimal places are rounded off to an integer 3 Setting method Set buffer memory areas in the following procedure 1 Enable or disable the temperature process value PV scaling function in the following buffer memory area Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 57 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 76 2 Seta scaling upper limit value and lower limit value in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Process value PV scaling lower Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 limit value Page 153 Section 3 4 2 77 Process value PV scaling upper Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 limit value Point An error does not occur even though the areas above are set as follows Lower limit value gt Upper limit value The scaling is processed according to the calculation method described on 3 Page 192 Section 4 11 2 lf a value outside the temperature measurement range is measured the value set as a upper limit or lower limit is stored into the following buffer memory area Process value PV scaling value
433. re rise function The channel with the temperature rise reaching the set value SV last among channels satisfying the condition for start up in the same group is used as a standard when the simultaneous temperature rise function is started up The temperature of other channels rises following the temperature of the standard channel The standard channel is determined based on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and the deviation E Ex When all channels are selected for Group 1 Temperature process value PV A Matches temperature rise completion time CH1 Set value SV CH2 Set value SV CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV r Temperature rise start Arrival point Time ON Setting operation OFF poe mode instruction Yn1 1 gt CHO Simultaneous P4 temperature rise status UN I Un G734 Un G750 0 X 1 XO Un G766 UnG782 i 1 This becomes Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 when the temperature rise starts however it becomes Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 before the temperature rise starts uonouny esr eunjejeduie snosueynwis OZ 239 When channels are divided as following CH1 and CH2 Group 1 CH3 and CH4 Group 2 Temperature process value PV A Matches temperature rise completion time in each group CH1 Set value SV 72 CH2 Set value SV 70 22 CH3 Set value SV
434. re set DET Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple Set the temperature sensor K Measured K Measured K Measured K Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range Range Range Range 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature value 200 0 0 C 0 C setting of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused channel temperature control is not Say 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused limit setti Set th limit of th t Upper imit setting et the upper limit of the se 400 C 4300 C 4300 C 400 C limiter value SV Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the set D 0 0 0 0 C limiter value SV 1 Upper Limit Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert set value 1 CHO Alert 1 68 of Un G5 to 250 C Un G8 turns on 349 JON uo Burst ueuw oh Display the Q64TCTTN auto refresh setting window and configure the setting as follows 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh x Project windo
435. rea The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 lt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 stored as it is One decimal place 1 stored after a multiplication by 10 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following gt Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Enablement of the stored value Turn Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF to enable stored contents 59 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 CD Set the temperature of the offset value of the sensor two point correction For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit e One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Sett
436. rection CPU module lt Q64TCN Device No Standard control Heating cooling control Mix control XnO Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag Xn1 Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Xn2 Write error flag Write error flag Write error flag Xn3 Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Xn4 CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status Xn5 CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status 2 Xn6 CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status Xn7 CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status Xn8 E PROM write completion flag E PROM write completion flag E PROM write completion flag Xn9 Default value write completion flag Default value write completion flag Default value write completion flag XnA E PROM write failure flag E PROM write failure flag E PROM write failure flag XnB Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag XnC CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag XnD CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag XnE CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag XnF CHA Alert occurrence flag CHA Alert occurrence flag CHA Alert occurrence flag 1 Available only under the heating coo
437. requested Read a write data error code to D50 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F Error reset instruction ON Error reset instruction OFF Read CH1 Temperature process value PV to D51 X24 Xi010 101 1018 1 M AF MOVP ki D9 SET M300 M300 ZP REMTO E K1 Ki H1 H3E D9 Ki M310 M310 M311 4 r A M301 M301 M302 M303 304 At AF AF SET M302 M302 M303 LZ REMFR J1 K2 Ki H1 HIF D10 K1 M312 SET M303 M312 M313 At RST M302 RST M303 D10 0 SET M304 M304 MOV D11 SET M305 M305 ih ZP REMTO Ki H1 H3E D11 Ki M314 Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV X1010 2 REMFR J1 K5 K1 Hi HO D50 K1 M224 M224 M225 AF MOV 050 K4Y60 X22 SET Y1012 Y1012 X1012 AF D50 HO i RST Y1012 X1010 1011 1 LZ REMFR J1 K6 Ki H1 H9 D51 Ki M226 MCR NO CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the causes and corrective actions to take when a problem occurs in the Q64TCN 8 1 Before Troubleshooting Check whether the POWER LED on the power supply module and the MODE LED on the CPU module are on If both are off proceed with CPU module troubleshooting QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 8 2 Troubleshooting Procedure This section describes how to find problem causes and take corrective action Use GX Works2 to
438. rialPort PLC Module Connection USB System Image Mode System monitor Online module change p Main Base Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Operation to Selected Module 2 Main Base Haas VO Adr 0000 0010 020 0030 0040 esas Legend Base oe paso a name status BaSe Senes Model Name Parameter Yo Eel Master Type Point Address Station No PLC Power Power CPU lg 9 0 H Empty Empty 16Point 0000 Empty l Pont 0020 Empty Empty l Pom 0020 __ L6Point 0040 Error Minor Error Module Changing Major ror Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Stet Mentor 3 Online Module Change r Operation 4 j Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Installation Module Name 64 Confirmation Module Control Restart Status E Module Installation Completion r Status Guidance controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and tomatic refresh for the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton 4 MELSOFT Application Online module change completed APPENDICES Open the System Monitor window again Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Double click the
439. rite completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 is on Page 94 Section 3 4 2 11 184 a When one of the conditions 1 to 5 applies Auto tuning starts when the condition no longer applies b When the condition 7 applies Even though the temperature process value PV goes back within the temperature measurement range auto tuning does not start until Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 is turned on from off once again c When the condition 8 or 9 applies Even though the internal processing of auto tuning is completed and PID constants are stored Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn off therefore the auto tuning is not completed CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 7 Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail The conditions are described below a Shift from the operation mode to the setting mode Shifting from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on ends auto tuning in fail Note that an exception is when PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 5 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 b Setting change of the buffer memory during the execution of auto tuning If a setting in the following buffer memory areas is changed during the execution of auto tuning the processing ends in fail Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set value
440. rms heating or cooling can receive only the analog input use other analog modules such as D A converter module to convert the digital output to the analog input Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t 133 134 48 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Unc181 8 Set the resolution of the following buffer memory areas lt gt Page 89 Section 3 4 2 5 CHO Manipulated value MV UnG13 to Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un G707 For details refer to the following s Page 221 Section 4 16 2 a Setting range 0 0 to 4000 1 0 to 12000 2 0 to 16000 3 0 to 20000 The manipulated value MV reflecting the resolution is stored in the following buffer memory areas L gt Page 133 Section 3 4 2 47 CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 CHO Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G708 to Un G7 11 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to O to 4000 0 CHAPTER 3
441. rn on Bumes jeniui y JO pesn sem urejBoud eouenbes e ueuM 9p xipueddy 1edoje eq X9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy uuo xipueddy 397 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mounta new module in the same slot and connect Online module change the external cable 2 When the module is mounted click check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 To check the operation click to cancel the control start Online module change 2 Click to stop the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer ld 3 Click 1 Ces toclose the System Monitor window To the next page 398 APPENDICES From the previous page 4 4 Setthe data pre recorded in the device test to the Device test Bit device buffer memory Device Close na D EER Online gt Debug gt Device test FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force _Hide rison 5 To back up the data in E PROM turn off and on Word device buffer memory zi E PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the C Device Buflermemoy Module start 0 10 v Hex buffer memory data to E PROM Address 33 v DEC Setling value 1 DEC 16 bit integer v Set set Program Label reference program M Execution history Device Setting condition Module start 10 Address 33 D 1 1 19 Forc
442. ror b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHLIAT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion bO of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF i 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF Pn eme pee benedi e ee 251 4 21 Forward Reverse Action Selection Function Standard Whether PID operation is performed with forward action or reverse action can be selected using this function This function can be used in all the control methods two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control 7 gt Page 166 Section 4 3 For details on the operation refer to the following gt Page 24 Section 1 3 2 1 Setting method Set the function in the following buffer memory area Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 s Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 252 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 22 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Standard Using this function detects an error occurring within a control system control loop due to reasons such as a
443. rrection offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 is set to No request 0 0 is stored in this buffer memory area which is No request 0 7 Page 144 Section 3 4 2 62 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following Page 213 Section 4 14 2 64 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 646 9 This is a request for storing temperature process value PV as sensor two point correction gain value to the following buffer memory area CHO Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 gt Page 143 Section 3 4 2 60 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following s Page 213 Section 4 14 2 a Setting range 0 No request 1 Latch request b Default value The default values are set to No request 0 in all channels 144 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 65 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion Un G551 Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 CER When sensor two point correction gain value is stored 1 is stored in this buffer memory area which is Latch completed 1 When Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 is set to No request 0 0 is stored in this buffer memory area which is No request 0 lt s Page 144 Section 3 4 2 64 3 For details on the sensor two point
444. rsal model QCPU 29 Applicable CPU module Number of modules 1 Applicable base unit 2 CPU type CPU model Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Main base unit Extension base unit QOSUDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Universal model Programmable QCPU controller CPU Up to 64 Up to 32 Safety CPU QS001CPU N A N A x x 3 QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V C Controller module Up to 64 Up to 32 Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 8 Connection of an extension base unit is not available with any safety CPU To use a C controller module with the Q64TCN refer to the C Controller Module User s Manual a When mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station The following table lists the network modules and base units applicable to the Q64TCN and the number of mountable Q64TCN Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Number of modules Applicable base unit Applicable
445. ry 1 342 91 1388 56 42 91 84 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Address Default Read Automatic ESEROM i Target i write decimal hannel Setting contents value Write setting rite Reference hexadecimal 4 12 13 availability 4 1389 56D to System area 1391 56 1392 5704 Page 161 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 91 History Error code error occurrence time Data t All CH 2 15 structure is the same as that of History 1 1396 574 1397 5754 to System area 1399 5774 1400 578 er 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 91 History Error code error occurrence time Data t All CH a 5 16 structure is the same as that of History 1 1404 57 1405 57Dy to System area 4095 FFFp 1 This default value is set after the module is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs R Reading enabled W Writing enabled 3 This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is changed Enable disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting For details refer to Page 220 Section 4 15 4 Whether writing to the E2PROM by
446. ry automatically when the input range is changed 0 Disable Page 220 u so that an error which is out of the setting does not 1 Enable Section 4 15 Change 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Setting Change Select batch setting or individual setting for the Batch Setting Page 190 Rate Limiter setting change rate limiter at temperature rise and drop 1 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Section 4 9 Individual Setting Moving FOREN Set whether to enable or disable the moving averaging 0 Enable Page 191 V i emg process 1 Disable Section 4 10 Process Setting 1 Immediately after the control mode selection is changed a set value discrepancy error error code 001E 4 occurs To clear the set value discrepancy error turn off on and off E PROM backup instruction Yn8 299 6 3 Parameter Setting Set the parameter for each channel By setting parameters here the parameter setting is not required on a program 1 Setting method Open the Parameter window 1 Start up Parameter on the Project window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter 0010 064 Paramete LJ Mode l lear Value f lis Set the value of unnecessary items For control mode to 0 Clear Value for Control Mode Standard Control gt Clear Value for Gray Cells y Gray Cells button Item cH2 CH3 CH4 Basic setting Set the temperature conversion syst
447. s Self tuning completion 225 4 Operation with starting ST This section explains the operation of when the temperature control is started or the set value SV is changed starting ST With starting ST the module monitors the response waveform of the temperature process value PV of when the temperature control is started or when the set value SV is changed Then PID constants are automatically corrected The following table lists the operations of the module with starting ST Operation with starting ST PID auto correction status 60 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 0 OFF In addition CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on 2 Temperature is controlled using the PID constants set When a control response is poor PID constants are calculated based on the response waveform and are set in the buffer memory In addition PID auto correction status 60 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 1 ON When a control response is good PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 remains 0 OFF and PID constants are not changed 4 Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Control start Un G639 Un G671 PID constants Before change Only for poor response After change Time Response measurement evaluation i gt
448. s al Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Control status pip contro C Auto tuning X PID control CHO Simultaneous temperature rise ON AT disable status gt N b2 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF Executed in a sequence program Sedes gt Executed by the Q64TCN The Q64TCN turns Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status b2 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 to 1 ON With CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 on the module performs the same processing as normal auto tuning 243 uonouny esr einjejeduie snosueynwis Oz d When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions When the maximum gradient is not determined When the saturation time for output is short The Q64TCN turns AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un1G573 Un G605 Un G637 UnG669 to 1 ON CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 1 1 1 1 Control status pip control A Auto tuning x PID control Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 a and 0 i Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 i CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter OFF E calculation error status b1 of Un
449. s Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handl
450. s area is handled as a system area Available only when the mix control expanded mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a system area Available only when the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCTTBWN is used With other models this area is handled as a system area Available only in the setting mode To enable the setting contents turn off on and on Setting change instruction YnB when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is off during setting mode Note that a write data error error code 0003 occurs if the setting is changed during the operation mode By using the setting change rate limiter whether to set temperature rise temperature drop in a batch or individually can be selected on Switch Setting In the batch setting the target of setting change rate limiter is only this area In the individual setting this area is the setting target for the temperature rise For details refer to 3 Page 190 Section 4 9 Available only when the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used With other models this area is handled as a system area By using the setting change rate limiter whether to set temperature rise temperature drop in a batch or individually can be selected on Switch Setting In the batch setting this area is handled as a system area In the individual setting this area is the setting target for the temperature drop For details refer to gt Page 190 Section 4 9 Available only when the heating cooling contr
451. s flag turns off when E PROM backup instruction Yn8 is turned on from off again to complete the data writing to the EPROM For details on the data writing to the E PROM refer to the following gt Page 270 Section 4 30 Point When an error of the data read from E2PROM is detected at power on E2PROM write failure flag XnA turns on and the Q64TCN operates by default In this case turn E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 on from off to write data to the 2 If the data writing to the E2PROM fails hardware failure is a likely cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 9 Setting change completion flag XnB Turning Setting change instruction YnB on from off during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF reflects the set contents of each buffer memory to the control After the data is reflected this flag turns on Turning Setting change instruction YnB off from on also turns off this flag ON Setting change instruction OFF YnB X Setting change completion flag XnB Executed in a sequence program eumd gt Executed by the Q64TCN OFF This flag can be used as an interlock condition for Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 54 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 10 CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF When an alert occurs the alert definition is stored in Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and this flag turns on For condit
452. s performed When the operation mode shifts to the setting mode by turning off from on Setting operation PID auto correction This flag is set to 1 ON when PID bO mode instruction Yn1 status constants are corrected by the self tuning When CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 When CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off When CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do not run the ST 0 Simultaneous This flag is set to 1 ON when simultaneous This flag is also set to 0 OFF in the following temperature rise M cases b1 t ti temperature rise parameter is corrected by parameter corregon self tuning When the self tuning starts by changing the status set value SV When the vibration ST starts by vibration caused by disturbance of the process value PV jueuuuBissy yng t b2 to b7 fixed to 0 Unused Jang ay Sed This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the following operation is performed When the operation mode shifts to the setting mode by turning off from on Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 When Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 When CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off When Self tuning setting Un G574
453. s set to Lower limit deviation alert with standby 10 The alert function is inactive until the deviation E exceeds the alert set value right figure below Lower limit deviation alert gt Page 197 Section Lower limit deviation alert with standby 4 12 2 c Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 A 0 Time M Time Alert set value r Alert set value gt Wait operation region Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting gt Page 195 Section 4 12 2 a Point When the system goes into the non alert status even once after an alert judgment started following the setting of the alert mode the alert with standby will be inactive even if the mode is changed to the one with standby a Setting method Select one of the following alert modes Alert mode setting gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 7 Upper limit input alert with standby 8 Lower limit input alert with standby 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation al
454. s2 The RUN LED turns off y Click the button on x x x x GX Works2 to enable the module to be removed Y Remove the selected module Y 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The refresh restarts and x the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation After mounting the module Hr add flag Xn0 click Bea on GX Works2 i When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting gt gt parameters at this point gg Check the operation before the control starts a amp lt 4 Check the operation an Click the Cancel button on oO GX Works2 to turn off the online mode E 2 X y z 8 On Modify Value on Works2 test the operation of O x To the module after replacement y SB The module operates based 5 on the test operation Ja g V 23 22 ac Operation check is completed p oO E 5 Restart the control i Module READY flag Xn0 3g Restart the online module change 2 E using GX Works2 Click the The module o c usin perates based on O O x 39 button to restart the initial setting sequence 5 program started when Module a READY flag Xn0 is started Q Zs i i uncti vi is included 5 1 The access to the intelligent function module device is included 3o r 2 The intelligent function
455. sation function or not For details on the heater disconnection compensation function refer to the following 3 Page 266 Section 4 28 3 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range 0 Not use the heater disconnection compensation function 1 Use the heater disconnection compensation function c Default value The default value is set to Not use the heater disconnection compensation function 0 131 Aiowaw Jejnq ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 45 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 Set the delay time of the ON delay output flag Set this buffer memory area to perform the heater disconnection detection with other input modules provided on the system For ON delay output flag refer to the following gt Page 92 Section 3 4 2 7 For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following Page 222 Section 4 17 a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 50 10 to 500ms When 0 is set ON delay output flag is not set to 1 ON b Default value The default value is set to O 46 CT monitor method switching Un G176 Gi Set the method for performing the heater current measurement a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range 0 ON OFF current 1 ON current When ON OFF current 0 is set the present current value of the current sensor CT is measured Selecting ON
456. set value SV Temperature process value PV A X Adjustment sensitivity x dead band Set value SV gt Time Transistor output OFF For details on the two position control refer to the following 3 Page 166 Section 4 3 1 a Setting range Set the value within the range 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 of the full scale of the set input range 7 gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 UnG 128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 10 1 0 Full scale x Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 01 6 0 C The dead band is the set value SV 6 0 C b Default value The default values are set to 5 0 5 in all channels 113 Jejnq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 23 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 9 CHO Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Heating cooling Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 3 Set the pulse cycle ON OFF cycle of the transistor output In the heating cooling control the output cycle of the heating control and cooling control can be set individually Additionally Un G47 Un G7
457. setting registration start command YOB Setting change command YOC CH1 forced PID control stop command YOD CH2 forced PID control stop command YOE CH3 forced PID control stop command YOF CH4 forced PID control stop command CHLI proportional band P setting x 0 196 integral time 1 setting Unit s CHLI derivative time D setting Unit s CHLI PID constants read command from EEPROM CHO EEPROM PID constant read completion flag CHO EEPROM PID constant read abnormal completion flag CHLI control output period setting Unit s CHLI control response parameter CHLI stop mode setting PID continuation flag CHLI alert definition Temperature process value PV upper limit cross alert Temperature process value PV lower limit cross alert CHLI Alert 1 CHO manipulated value 0 4000 0 12000 0 16000 manipulated value resolution Change switching CHLI temperature rise judgment flag Temperature rise completion range setting Unit deg Temperature rise completion soak time setting Unit min input range upper setting limiter CHLI lower setting limiter CHLI forward reverse action setting setting change rate limiter x 0 1 min CHLI sensor compensation value setting x 0 0196 CHLI primary delay digital filter setting Unit s upper output limiter x 0 1 CHLI lower output limiter x 0 196
458. sh 2 Click the item to set and enter the auto refresh target device it 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All m li Item E Fransfer to CPU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh Transistor output flag Heating side transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh For another analog eni The data of the buffer memory is transmitted the specified device 6 5 Auto Tuning For how to execute auto tuning refer to the following Page 179 Section 4 6 5 6 6 Sensor Correction Buiun 9 For how to execute sensor correction refer to the following gt Page 209 Section 4 14 305 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the programs of the Q64TCN When applying any of the program examples introduced in this chapter to the actual system verify that the control of the target system has no problem thoroughly 7 1 Programming Procedure Create a program that performs temperature control in the Q64TCN using the following procedure Configure the initial setting using GX Works2 Create a sequence program to configure initial data such as input range and set value SV Configure initial data such as input range and set value SV using GX Works2 Use specific PID constants Us
459. sistance thermometer b thermometer b 284 4 For the Q64TCRTBWN CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Terminal block for CT Terminal block for I O Terminal Common to the all control Heating cooling control Standard control number Indication modes Indication normal mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 NC NC Unused OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 CT1 CT input 1 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output CT1 3 CT1 CT input 1 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 CT2 CT input 2 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output CT2 5 CT2 CT input 2 Ard COM Output common COM Output common 6 CT3 CT input 3 NC NC Unused NC Unused CT3 i i 7 CT3 CT input 3 IN1A1 CH1A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A 8 CT input 4 IN2 A2 CH2A CH2 Resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A CT4 9 CT input 4 IN1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B CH2 Resi CH2 Resi 10 CT5 CT input 5 IN2 B2 CH2B CH2B Lipi thermometer B thermometer B CT5 11 CT5 CT input 5 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1b thermometer b thermometer b CH2 Resi CH2 Resi 12 CT6 CT input 6 IN2 b2 CH2b 539008 CH2b S WX thermometer b thermometer b CT6 CH3 Resist Monitor 3 resist 13 CT6 CT input 6 IN3 A3 CH3A MDC MT3 A thermometer thermometer
460. struction Yn1 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label Y1B E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 Data Type Default setting registration instruction Yn9 ON Switch ONJOFF Setting change instruction YnB Settable Range This operation stops the operation of the Q64TCN Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Bit OFF 19 Bit OFF 18 Bit OFF Y11 Bit OFF Reflect to Input Column Point If PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off CPU continuation error such as SP UNIT DOWN and UNIT VERIFY ERR is occurring due to an error in the module to be changed the buffer memory data cannot be saved APPENDICES 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor p Monitor Status Connection Channel List pee Diagnostics gt Online Module Change monitor Onine module change 2 Select Online module change under the Mode Slot CPU field and double click the module to be changed online Base Informa
461. t 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Alert set value 1 250 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 6 Setting on the master station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select the CPU module to be used for PLC Type D Project gt New New Project Project Type Simple Project PLC Series QCPU Q mode PLC Type Use Label Q10UDH Language Ladder 345 19N uo Burst ueuw 2 Display the network parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 1 Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set the network configuration settings in CC IE Field configuration window Pre encre Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Setifitisneeded No Setting Already Set Valid Module During Other Station Access fi z Interlink Transmission Parameters Start I O No Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted EREA vr EET mm Group Setting Check 3 Display the network range assignment setting window and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Ne
462. t Temperature rise judgment flag Set value SV monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Flag Self tuning flag Temperature conversion completion flag Process value PV scaling value Simultaneous temperature rise status Cooling side manipulated value Cooling side transistor output flag Cooling side manipulated value IN ES CE SS DE The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 An error code or alarm code is Write data error code D50 stored The detected temperature value where sensor correction D51 is performed is stored Temperature process value PV The value is stored depending Alert definition x on the detected alert D55 The number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by using the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh When the setting item reduction mode is set consecutive devices are automatically set to the grouped setting items For details on the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh refer to the following Page 303 Section 6 4 340 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online gt Wri
463. t Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPLI Stop Error Output Setting at CPLI Stop Error CH3 O CLEAR CH4 O CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disable s Setting Change Rate Limiter D Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting v Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable Moving Averaging Process Setting is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value o OK Cancel n Item Description Set value Reference o 7 Set whether to hold or clear the transistor output status B Output Setting at 0 CLEAR default value Page 165 when a CPU stop error occurs or when a CPU module is CPU Stop Error 1 Section 4 2 Switched from RUN to STOP 0 Standard Control 1 Heating Cooling Control Normal Mode Control Mode 2 Heating Cooling Control Expanded Page 162 Set the control mode Selection Mode Section 4 1 3 Mix Control Normal Mode 4 Mix Control Expanded Mode Set this item to change data of the related buffer Auto setting at memo
464. t 0 R W x x Section LT 3 4 2 64 az zo Page 145 se 583 247 CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 R x x Section EN 3 4 2 65 32 584 248 4 29 to System area m lt 0 o 595 2534 9 e Page 119 3 596 2544 CH2 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W X Section 3 4 2 28 s 597 2554 to D System area 604 25 Page 145 605 25 CH2 P System area System area 0 R x x Section parameter 3 4 2 67 calculation flag Self tunin 606 25 CH2 settin 9 System area System area 0 R W x Section 9 3 4 2 68 Page 147 607 25F 4 CH2 Self tuning flag System area System area 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 69 73 Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal current Standard 7 E trei value Write setting b Reference ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro A 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Sensor two point correction offset value measured Page 142 608 2604 CH3 49 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected Page 142 609 2614 CH3 49 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 59 143 Sensor two point correction gain value measured 610 262 CH3 9 0 R W
465. t pius channe emperature control is no 0 Used 0 Used 0 Used Used setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle tting Heati tth N OFF setting Heating Set the pulse cycle ON O 20s 205 20s 20s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output setting 324 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING UR Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Simultaneous Set a group to perform the temperature rise simultaneous temperature rise 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 group setting 1 function for each channel Set the target channels for the Peak current peak current suppression suppression control function and the gap of the 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 group setting 2 control output cycle between channels Simultaneous 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for temperature rise AT Set the mode of the auto Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous tuning mode selection 1 d Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise 1 Upper Limit 1 Upper Limit 1 Upper Limit 1 Upper Limit Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode PPer amI PRESIN pper im PEER EN Input Alert Input Alert Input Alert Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert set value 1 CHO Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to 250 C 300 C 350 C 400 C Un G8 turns on 1 Configure this setting only whe
466. t a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels d Precautions For CHLI AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 set the range where PID operation fluctuates slightly and the control result get no effect Depending on the controlled object accurate PID constants may not be obtained 120 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 30 CHLI Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Standard Select whether to use channels in the forward action or reverse action Select the forward action for the cooling control Select the reverse action for the heating control For details on the forward reverse action selection function refer to the following gt 252 Section 4 21 a Setting range 0 Forward action 1 Reverse action b Default value The default values are set to Reverse action 1 in all channels Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng pe 121 31 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 151 CHO Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 152 8 Upper lower limit value of the set value SV can be set a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range 7 Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 The setting should meet
467. t be executed If one of the following conditions applies auto tuning cannot be executed Conditions to start auto tuning Reference The module is in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF Page 50 Section 3 3 2 2 In standard control Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 is set to 0 operating in two position control 2 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 In heating cooling control Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un1G99 Un G131 is set to 0 operating in two position control 3 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 is set to MAN 1 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 26 Toward the corresponding channel Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 4 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 5 CHLI PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 6 Hardware failure has occurred The ERR LED is on Page 361 Section 8 3 2 CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 has exceeded the temperature 7 measurement range Input range upper limit 60 of Un G5 to Un G8 or Input range Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 lower limit b1 of Un G5 to Un G8 is 1 ON 2 8 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 is set to Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 Requested 1 9 CHO W
468. t status a Setting method Set the alert mode gt Page 204 Section 4 12 7 Upper limit input alert Set the alert mode to Upper limit input alert 1 Lower limit input alert Set the alert mode to Lower limit input alert 2 194 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Deviation alert With the deviation alert when the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV meets a particular condition the system is put in an alert status The set value SV to be referred is either set value SV monitor or set value SV setting depending on the alert mode When a setting change rate limiter is specified set value SV monitor follows the set value SV by the specified change rate For details on the setting change rate limiter setting refer to gt Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 The following table describes the use of each set value SV of when a setting change rate limiter is specified and can be referred to use a deviation alert Reference area of the set S Use when the set value SV is changed value SV This value is used when the temperature process value PV needs to follow the CHLI Set value SV monitor changing set value SV within a consistent deviation E If the temperature process Un G25 to Un G28 value PV does not follow the set value SV and strays out of the set deviation range an alert occurs This value is used for the alert occurrence to be determine
469. t stops the auto tuning when an alert is detected RST Y14 Jom Auto tuning instruction OFF Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM X24 X10 Y1B Y18 2 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read TF TF LTOP ui KI instruction Requested _ Read bit data from b7 to b0 of EPPROM s FROM U1 2 20 K1 PID constants read write completion flag to M20 to M27 M20 X Prob Jus Ko CH1 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Not requested Program that reads an error code X10 MOV D50 KAY60 Output a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F X22 SET Y12 Error reset instruction ON 12 X12 _ D50 HO RST Y12 Error reset instruction OFF Program that changes the set values SV and the alert set value 1 X10 Pop PF iau Ki Change CH1 Alert set value 1 to E 300 C oul ia TE ic Change CH1 Set value SV setting T to 250 C Xe X10 op i ion ki Return CH1 Set value SV setting E to 200 C TOP Ul H26 K250 Ki 1 Return CH1 Alert set value 1 to 250 C F uoneunBijuo 5 e ejnpojy eui BuisN ueuM peas epoo 1 pue se yons LZ 7 315 316 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of module a Devices used by a user intellige
470. t value SV amp CH1 Set value SV MAE Temperature rise start Group 2 Group 1 arrival point arrival point Time 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example Heater CH1 1 Operation input d i ON ALM Heater CH2 1 a Operation input LE dE ENS Heater CH3 Li Operation input 12 gt OUT L3 OUT2 i L4 Mia CH4 OUT3 peration inpu E y Oe 24VDCI 1 m CH2 IN1 1 CH1 Input l chi RE CH2 Input po Cold junction CJ Ne temperature Gi compensation CJ Ne resistor cH3 16 e Chis Input l CH3 M 4 Input 1 CHA Le N3 uoneunBijuo 5 e ui ejnpoyy eui Buis ueuM uonouni esu snoeuejnuuis uoisseJddns uano xeed pjepuels ZZ 321 322 4 Switch Setting Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTTN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error CH CH1
471. te to PLC nuu or Power OFF gt ON e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt 64 gt Auto Tuning Monitor Status Executes auto tuning Mode Monitoring 5 Start Monitor Setting Mode Change Mode SIE d Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN nang j Error Code HEX Auto Tuning Execution Auto Tuning Setting Item CH1 20 control Jro control operation status Process value PV 32c Set value 5V 200 Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh 5 0 Cooling side manipulated value 5 0 PID constant PID constant current value Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph 3 0 3 0 Cooling side proportional band Pc setting 3 0 3 0 Integral time I setting 240s 240s Derivative time D setting 60s 60s Loop disconnection detection judgment time 05 05 Auto tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start Start Start Start Auto tuning stop p Stop top Status Not executed Not executed Result of automatic backup of PID constant Not executed Not executed The time between the start and completion of auto tuning depends on the object to be controlled After auto tun
472. ted In addition Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un1G67 1 turns 1 ON e g Values other than 0 0 0 have been set for the setting change rate limiter C gt Page 119 Section 3 4 2 28 If the values other than 0 0 096 have been set to the following buffer memory areas CHLI Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate AN Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 limiter temperature rise CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 230 h The heating cooling control has been selected for the control mode gt Page 299 Section 6 2 The self tuning is not executed 7 Discontinuation of self tuning The following operation during self tuning discontinues the self tuning operation The setting Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 has been changed to Do not run the ST 0 The self tuning operation in process is discontinued and self tuning is not performed anymore after that An error does not occur Whether self tuning is being executed can be checked in Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 gt Page 52 Section 3 3 2 5 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 8 Conditions where self tuning does not complete due to errors Under the following
473. ted with a heater powered off PID constants are calculated based on a response that differs from the original characteristics using self tuning Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Original response Response of when a heater is powered on after the Q64TCN starts temperature control ni wet Time PX Do not use the self tuning function for controlled objects where a great disturbance uncontrollable disturbance occurs periodically Doing so may cause improper PID constants to be determined by self tuning If the function is used for such objects improper PID constants are set and the response for the set value SV change or disturbance becomes slow Control start d Heater powered ON Ex Temperature control for an injection mold temperature control for a hot plate for a semiconductor manufacturing equipment CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 19 Peak Current Suppression Function Standard The upper limit output limiter value for each channel is changed automatically and the peak current is suppressed by dividing timing for transistor outputs using this function The timing can be divided into two to four intervals CH1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current When the peak current suppression control function is not used 20s Since all the transistor outputs used turn on at the same time the peak current
474. temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on XH ueuM ejnpoyy xipueddy ueJ60Jd eouenbes e Buisn jegu ay ueuM 9G xipueddy 411 412 3 Mounting a new module Online Module Change To the next page 1 Mount anew module in the same slot and connect the external cable 2 After the module is mounted click Execution and check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 To check the operation click cel to cancel the control start 2 Click 6 to stop the Online module change mode APPENDICES From the previous page 4 enti 5 Click Close to close the ene System Monitor window Mode System monitor Online module change Main Base p Operation to Selected Module Main Base Man Base o a VO Ad 0000 0010 1040 Slot 1 Inteli B ponies Enor Hitoy Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Base Installed B
475. teristics Air cooled The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is low Water cooled The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is high Linear The cooling characteristic is close to the linear shape Cooling characteristics rate of when the manipulated value Cooling System and cooling characteristics for cooling MVc 100 is 1 1 T 1 Water cooling Devices such as cooling water piping y 4 Complete linear characteristics r 1 T 1 1 1 1 i 1 0 8 r d PNE 4 8 ence i i 1 1 i 1 1 ji 1 1 1 1 1 1 T Air cooling Ft es ft es hs i et lp m n J i i 1 Devices such as 1 1 1 1 1 cooling fans 1 1 1 1 1 i PAM i 1 i 14 1 1 I 0 4 rp f Trece gine er puse AME deccm Linear 1 1 1 1 1 i i i i i Devices such as i electron coolers i i i 1 02 ar aaa ea esos uae RED Gi A ae 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Manipulated value for cooling MVc e 100 PID constants calculated and executed based on this setting during auto tuning therefore more appropriate PID constants can be found by setting more applica
476. that can be set only in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF 7 s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 a Reflection of set value Even though the set values are written into the buffer memory they cannot be reflected to the Q64TCN s operation immediately To confirm the set values turn this instruction OFF ON OFF after the set values are written into the buffer memory Doing so lets the Q64TCN operate according to the setting in each buffer memory area 7 PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF Use this signal to temporarily stop PID control forcibly a Mode when PID control stops The mode depends on the setting of Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 For details on Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 UnG97 Un G129 refer to the following C gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory Assignment This section describes the Q64TCN buffer memory assignment 3 4 1 Q64TCN buffer memory assignment list This section lists the Q64TCN buffer memory areas For details on the buffer memory refer to 7 7 Page 86 Section 3 4 2 Point Do not write data in the system area or the write protect area in a sequence program in the buffer memory Doing so may cause malfunction 1 Buffer memory address by control mode This section describes the buffer memory assignments by control mode For details on the control mode re
477. the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used Y 11 For the noise immunity dielectric withstand voltage insulation resistance and others of the programmable controller system which uses the Q64TCN refer to the following T QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 39 3 1 1 Type of usable temperature sensors temperature measurement range resolution and effect from wiring resistance of 1 ohm This section describes types of temperature sensors that can be used with the Q64TCN the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from wiring resistance of 10 Set the used temperature sensor in the following buffer memory area Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un1G 128 gt Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 1 Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN The following table lists the types of thermocouples that can be used with the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from wiring resistance of 10 C F Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring type measurement Resolution resistance of 19 measurement Resolution resistance of 10 range c o range CFI R 0 to 1700 1 0 030 0 to 3000 1 0 054 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 1 0 to 2400 0 to 1300 K 200 0 to 400 0 0 005 0 008 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 800 0 0 t
478. the buffer memory for each channel in the Q64TCN where auto refresh is performed Write data error code alert definition CHLI temperature process value PV CHLI alert set value 1 manipulated value MV CHLI alert set value 2 CHLI set value SV setting CHLI alert set value 3 CHLI proportional band P setting CHLI alert set value 4 integral time I setting CTLI heater disconnection alert setting CHLI derivative time D setting CTLI heater current process value CHLI loop disconnection detection judgment time CHLI manipulated value 0 4000 0 12000 0 16000 CHLI transistor output flag CHLI temperature rise judgment flag Values stored in the buffer memory in the Q64TCN where the auto refresh setting is configured are automatically read when the CPU module executes END instruction Monitor test Monitor test the buffer memory and I O signals of the Q64TCN Also the auto tuning function can be executed Write data error code Alert 2 CHLI decimal point position CHLI Alert 3 CHLI temperature process value PV CHLI Alert 4 CHLI manipulated value MV CHLI Heater disconnection alert CHLI set value SV setting CHLI Loop disconnection alert CHLI transistor output flag CHLI Output off time current error alert CHLI ON delay output CHLI alert 1 mode setting Cold junction temperature process value CHLI alert set value 1 X00 Module ready fl
479. the following setting values Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 L gt Page 146 Section 3 4 2 68 Starting ST Simultaneous temperature rise parameter only 2 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameter 1 3 uonouny esr einjeJeduie snosueynwis OZ 247 7 Operation when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning and auto tuning a When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started before the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated neither with self tuning nor auto tuning PID constants are changed Temperature process value PV Auto tuning waveform Maximum gradient Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning lt gt Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start temperature rise AT start ON Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xnz OFF 5 2 a CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 CHO PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671
480. ting in the intelligent function module switch setting if the value out of the setting range is set to Number of moving averaging Un G698 to Un G701 a write data error error code O00044 occurs For the module the moving averaging process is enabled and the number of moving averaging is 2 times as default Change the settings if necessary Ad enieA sseooJg 0 sseooug Buibejeay BUON 191 4 11 192 Temperature Process Value PV Scaling Function Common The temperature process value PV is scaled up or down to the value in a set range and can be stored into the buffer memory using this function For example the range of 100 C to 100 C can be scaled into the value range of 0 to 4000 1 Objects for scaling 2 Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 is scaled in general but setting CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 into the 200s allows scaling for the values of other analog modules such as A D converter modules on the system 7 gt 96 Section 3 4 2 12 For details refer to the following Page 221 Section 4 16 1 Point P This section describes objects for scaling as Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 When scaling input values from other analog modules such as A D converter modules substitute Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 for Temperature process value PV
481. ting 1 295 127 CT8 CT ratio setting 296 128 to System area 543 21Fy Sensor two point correction offset value measured Page 142 544 220 CH1 49 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected Page 142 545 2214 CH1 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 59 j 143 Sensor two point correction gain value measured 546 2224 CH1 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected Pags 143 547 2234 CH1 g 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 61 Page 144 548 2244 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 R W Section 3 4 2 62 Page 144 549 225 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 144 550 2264 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 145 551 227 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 552 228 to System area 563 2334 Page 119 564 2344 CH1 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 565 2354 to System area m 570 23Ay During AT loop During AT loop a i Page 145 571 23By All CHs System area 0 R W x Section function function 3 4 2 66 enable disable enable disable UU setting setting 572 23Cy System area m 72
482. ting 3 4 2 13 66 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel E PROM Address a men Default Read Automatic ik 5 eating z gt write decimal Standard value Write setting Reference cooling Mix control 5 R availability hexadecimal control 1 2 3 sensor control 4 CT Page 104 Set value SV 130 82 Bud Set value SV ia SV Set value SV BN B Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 14 Heating Proportional proportional Proportional Page 105 131 83 CH4 band P settin band Ph band P 30 R W x Section is 9 6 setting 3 4 2 15 setting 107 Integral time 1 Iti 132 84 Bus Integral time 1 g i 1 Integra ime 1 T aT setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 Derivative ti Derivative time Derivative ti 107 133 85 CHA eriva ive ime eriva ive ime 60 RIN x Section D setting D setting D setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value Alert set 134 86 CH4 Alert set value 1 se j 0 R W Alert set value Alert set 135 87 CH4 Alert set value 2 y 2 SES 0 R W 108 Section Alert set value Alert set 136 88 CH4 Alert set value 3 0 R W 3 4 2 18 Alert set value Alert set 137 89 CH4 Alert set value 4 s A teen eee 0 R W T im
483. ting limiter aoc 1 Reverse Action Setting change rate limiter or Setting 0 0 change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop 0 0 Set the temperature conversion system emperature Range 0 to emperature Range 0 to 1300 C 250 C 0 Used 3 0 95 3 0 2405 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 0 0 1300 C 300 C O Used 3 0 3 0 2405 605 305 0 510 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 oc 0 0 0 0 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 350 O Used Set PID constants proportional band P integral time I derivative time D and temperature 3 0 95 30s O Slow 1 Monitor Set temperature measurement ranges such as upper lower limit for temperature adjustment 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 0 0 Temperature Range 0 to ox Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple Set the temperature sensor K Measured K Measured K Measured K Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature eee et 200 C 250 C 300 C 350 C setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the d ch t t trol i
484. tion the difference can be corrected using this function The following two types are available e Normal sensor correction one point correction function gt Page 209 Section 4 14 1 e Sensor two point correction function 7 5 Page 213 Section 4 14 2 1 Normal sensor correction one point correction function This function corrects a temperature correction value the proportion of the temperature difference to the fullscale set input range Set a correction value to Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Ex When the temperature measurement range of input range is set to 200 0 C to 200 0 C with the actual temperature being 60 and the temperature process value PV being 58 Actual temperature Temperature process value PV Full scale Sensor compensation value setting 100 x 100 x 0 5 96 2 400 Based on the above formula set 50 0 50 to Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 UnG141 Temperature process value PV p Ag pr Valls t After correction Before correction 4 JOSUSS gt Input temperature 209 a How to execute normal sensor correction one point correction when using GX Works2 Set this function on the Sensor Correction Function window XZ Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Sensor Correction Fun
485. tion 4 3 1 The setting is invalid c Manual control gt gt 175 Section 4 5 The setting is enabled d Auto tuning function execution gt 176 Section 4 6 The setting is enabled but some change in Output variation limiter setting during auto tuning does not lead to a calculation of the appropriate PID constants During auto tuning therefore no adjustment for output variation is recommended e Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 21 CHO Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un1G109 Un G141 Common Set the correction value when measured temperature and actual temperature are different For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following gt 209 Section 4 14 a Setting range Set the value within the range 5000 to 5000 50 00 to 50 00 of the full scale of the set input range Ls Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 b Enablement of setting contents When Normal sensor correction one point correction is set in Sensor correction function selection Un G785 the setting content is enabled 7 s Page 159 Section 3 4 2 87 c Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0096 in all channels 22 CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un1G110 Un G142 To prevent a chattering in the two position control set the adjustment sensitivity dead band for the
486. tion List Module Information List Main Base Power Base Installed Base Parameter Network No Master for E33 Seis 590 Senes ModelName cos aint Address Station No Power Power Extension Basel Extension Base2 Empty Empty Extension Base3 2 QeMTCTIN Pont Intel Extension Based 2 Empty Empty l Pok Extension Bases Empty Empty l Poi Extension Bases Empty _ Empty l Pont 0040 Extension Base A Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect 3 Click xecuion to enable a module change Online Module Change Operation _ p Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Installation Module Name Q64TCTTN Confirmation Module Control Restart Status pem Module Selection Completed Status Guidance lease turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent Function module press next button when you are ready 4 Ifthe following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after gt Page 412 Appendix 5 6 3 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point P f the terminal block is removed the
487. tion is added 36 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration The Q64TCN measures temperature based on the temperature of the terminal block Therefore depending on the system configuration temperature distribution of the terminal block can be uneven due to the effect of heat generated from modules and the measured temperature may differ from actual temperature especially when two or more Q64TCN modules are mounted next to each other or the Q64TCN is mounted next to the power supply module or CPU module In this case the difference between measured value and actual temperature can be reduced by the following methods 1 Using the sensor correction function The measured temperature can be corrected to the actual temperature by this function For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following s Page 209 Section 4 14 uiejs S J0J suonneoeJd rz 37 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the performance specifications of the Q64TCN I O signals transferred to from the CPU module and the specifications of the buffer memory For the general specifications of the Q64TCN refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications The following table lists the performance specifications of the Q64TCN Specifications Item Q64
488. to 32000 2 d 2 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to the default value 0 Page 101 Section 3 4 2 12 d Same as the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN For the following control mode and channel Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 cannot be set to 201 to 205 If these values are set a write data error error code 0004p occurs CH3 in heating cooling control normal mode CH2 in mix control normal mode 99 ay syieleq jueuuuBissy yng t b Setting range of the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN The following table lists setting values of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 UnG128 and the corresponding platinum resistance thermometer types Auto setting at input range change Platinum Celsius Input range imi imi Temperature 9 Upper limit Lower limit resistance Un G32 setting limiter setting limiter measurement Resolution thermometer range Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 type F idigit Un G128 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 7 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 6000 2000 Default value Pt100 20
489. tor 0 2 Online module change None Intelli None None rsu QOBPHCPU gent pply 16pt 16pt 15pt 16pt 16pt p Status Bl Module system enor Module eror Module warning Module change t it Close 3 Click xsc ion to enable a module change Online module change Operation r Target module f Module change execution 1 0 address 5 NES Module name Q64TCTTN Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please tur off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 Ifthe following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 398 Appendix 4 6 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 Check that the RUN LED the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not tu
490. tory No 3 3rd error 1400 Error history No 16 16th error Point The same processing is performed for an alarm When the storage area for error histories is full data is overwritten starting from Error history No 1 Un G1280 to Un G1284 and error history recording is continued The history before data overwritten is deleted Recorded error histories are cleared to 0 by turning off and on the power supply or by resetting the CPU module and canceling the reset 273 4 J0 SIH JOJJ3 Ley 4 32 Module Error History Collection Function The errors and alarms occurred with the Q64TCN are collected into the CPU module The CPU module keeps the error information collected from the Q64TCN as a module error history in the memory where data is maintained even at the time of the power failure Therefore the information of the errors occurred with the Q64TCN can be kept even if the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 1 Example of the operation of the module error history collection function Error history CPU module and error log intelligent function module are displayed in one screen l Errors that occurred in the entire system base units can be monitored in chronological order Module A Module B CPU 1 19 29 Error A1 occurred 19 34 Error B1 occurred
491. tput with EN i i g 3 4 2 48 Page 135 182 B64 All CHs Cold junction temperature compensation selection 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 49 Page 135 183 B7 All CHs Control switching monitor 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 50 69 1811 oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pun Default Read Automatic EPROM n eating wri decimal current Standard Mi trei value Write setting b Reference Ix nitri i ili hexadecimal control cooing coniro 12 availability sensor control 4 CT 184 8 CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 0 R W x di P Auto tuning 185 B9 CH2 uto tuning uto tuning mode 0 R W mode selection mode selection uu selection Page 136 Auto tuning Secti Auto tuning Auto tuning 186 mode selection Nu mode selection 0 RAN 5 o 3 42 51 selection Auto tuning F 187 BBy CH4 uto tuning mode uto tuning 0 RW mode selection 46 mode selection selection 188 BC4 to System area 191 BFp 192 0 CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 0 R W x 193 C1 CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 0 page el Section 194 C24 CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 0 R W x 3 4 2 52 195 C3y CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 0 R W x 196 C
492. trol Module User s Manual SH 080121 for the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT Q64TCRTBW buffer memory addresses are written in hexadecimal In this manual the addresses are written in decimal using Intelligent function module device Un GD SH 080121 Temperature process value PV buffer memory address 9 to Cp SH 080989ENG Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Although differently expressed the buffer memory areas have the same address as long as they are used for the same functions 0e 06000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000009909 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name manual number model code Description QCPU User s Manual
493. trol or PI control Set this setting to O For details on control methods refer to the following Page 166 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 60 60s in all channels Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t 107 18 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 C2 Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 CR Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CR Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 CR Set temperature values where Alert 1 Un G5 to Un G8 of b8 to Alert 4 Un G5 to Un G8 of b11 turn on according to selected alert mode of alert 1 to 4 For Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 refer to the following s Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 For details on the alert function refer to the following Page 194 Section 4 12 a Alert mode Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4 in the following buffer memory areas Alert mode of alert 1 to 4 respectively correspond to alert set value 1 to 4 Buffer memory area Buffer memory address Reference name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 137 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 b Sett
494. tting change rate limiter temperature rise change 2 Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Set value SV 1 Time Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 b Upper limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or greater than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E 5 Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value 1 Temperature process value PV set value SVY A Alert set value 0 gt Time 0 gt Time Alert set value Alert status Alert status LL Non alert status 2 Alert status L Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting gt Page 195 Section 4 12 2 a 196 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Lower limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or less than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negati
495. tting range changes according to the change of the input range the set value before the change can turn out of the range In this case a write data error error code 0004 occurs in the buffer memory area where the value turns out of the setting range Change the input range after setting each buffer memory area with values within the setting range after the input range change f Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF g Precautions Soon after the input range is changed input temperature may be unstable Do not start the control until Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 becomes First temperature conversion completed 1 102 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 13 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Gi Set the mode activated at PID control stop a Setting range and action of Q64TCN The following table lists the relationship O Executed x Not executed Action Mode which can Set value of Stop mode setting Temperature Alert be set Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 PID control _ judgment judgment Stop 0 x x x Monitor 1 x Alert 2 x 1 Means that the Q64TCN checks whether the input temperature is in the temperature measurement range set in the input range However action of the Q64T
496. tuning Page 231 Section 4 18 8 to see whether it has ended abnormally If it has ended abnormally remove the cause If the buffer memory setting was changed during self tuning restore the value to the one prior to change 8 4 7 When E PROM write failure flag XnA is on Check Item Action Has a backup to E2PROM failed Has the reading of data from E PROM failed Turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the setting to the E7PROM If writing fails again a hardware is in failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 364 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 4 8 When CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF is on Check Item Action Has the temperature process value PV exceeded the alert set value range Check Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate corrective action 7 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 Correct the alert set value gt Page 108 Section 3 4 2 18 Has a disconnection been detected Check Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate corrective action gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 3 365 sjeuBis syoeyD pg uo s 4UX 2ux eoueunooo v 8 8 5 Troubleshooting by Symptom This section describes troubleshooting using the wiring resistance values of thermocouples 8 5 1 When the temperature process value PV is abn
497. tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction 7 Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 to Y17 CHLI Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Error code D51 to D54 Temperature process value PV D55 to D58 CHLI Alert definition MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 to M13 CHLI Auto tuning completion flag M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM uonouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuej nuuis uonounj uoisseJddns xeed ZZ 7 329 b Program example where the peak current suppression function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt 315 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20 PLS MO 1 Flag 0 for setting value write ON M J Flag 1 for setting v
498. ture CJ compensation CJ a c resistor IN3 3 INA 4 IN3 3 INA 4 Q amp 4TC TIN 308 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 4 Switch Setting Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection as follows X Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error Output Setting at Stop Error D CLEAR D CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable x Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting x Moving Averaging Process Setting o Enable zl Moving Averaging Process Setting is available For Product Information 140620000000000 C or later Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Set value Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Error Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Moving Averaging Process Setting 0 Enable uoneunBijuo 5 e eui BuisN ueuM peas epoo 10119 p
499. turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 1 Applicable buffer memory areas Refer to the buffer memory assignment list Page 59 Section 3 4 1 2 Data write to E7PROM This function can be used to back up data directly written in the buffer memory using the PID constants set with the auto tuning function and the programming tool When data is written to E PROM and the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled the buffer memory setting value is not required to be set again Point For the function that allows PID constants to be automatically backed up after auto tuning refer to 5 178 Section 4 6 4 To write data to E7PROM turn off and on E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 When data write to E7PROM is completed E PROM write completion flag Xn8 turns on Q64TCN CPU module 1 EPROM backup gre ea ge were eas enn a gr Pee Oe wee 1 instruction Yn8 ON i Write instruction i OS i 1 1 E PROM 3 E7PROM write completion flag Xn8 completed 2 Write I 1 i Buffer memory i i nae Read 1 1 1 When the power is 1 i switched from off to i on or at reset 1 1 1 If data write to E7PROM does complete E PROM write failure flag XnA turns on a Setting change Change the settings for buffer memory areas when E PROM write completion flag Xn8 is off CHAPTER
500. twork Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method Points start Monitoring Time 200 10ms Parameter Name Start End Total sive Switch Screens Bw Setting gt Project window gt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt gt Switch Screens c XY Setting ENTIS Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method Monitoring Time 200 10ms Parameter Name Points Start Total Siye fi Switch Screens XY Setting Start End 346 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 4 Display the refresh parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Refresh Parameters E Network Parameter MNET 10H Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Assignment Method Points Start Start End Transient Transmission Error History Status gt Overwrite Hold ete M Sia or X L oe 0000 1FFF 1000 10FF 1000 10FF 5 Write the set parameter to the CPU module on the master station Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online
501. ue se yons pjepuels LZ 309 310 5 Contents of the initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple K Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused Control output cycle setting 30s 30s 30s 30s Upper limit setting limiter 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Lower limit setting limiter 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 1 Starting ST PID 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the Self tuning setting 1 Constant Only ST ST ST Alert 1 mode setting 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Alert set value 1 250 C 0 0 C 0 C 1 This setting is necessary only when the self tuning function is used a Devices used by a user 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module Device Description X10 Module READY flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X12 Write error flag X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X24 E PROM s PID constants read
502. ue PV Manipulated Manipulated M lated 13 Dy CH1 value for value for heating MVh heating MVh Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated value for 14 Ey CH2 value MV value for heating heating MVh 7 MVh Page 89 Manipulated 0 R x x Section 15 CH3 Manipulated value for Manipulated 3 4 2 5 value MV heating value MV MVh Manipulated 16 10 PHI Manipulated value for Manipulated value MV heating value MV MVh Temperature Temperature Temperature 17 114 CH1 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag flag Temperature Temperature Temperature 18 12 CH2 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag flag Page 91 0 R x x Section Temperature Temperature Temperature 3 42 6 19 13 CH3 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag 9 lag Temperature Temperature Temperature 20 14 CH4 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag 9 lag 60 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address a men Default Read Automatic FIPROM eating writ decimal unen Standard g e value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal CI cooling e A 3 availability sensor control Heating Heating 21 15 CH1 bw transistor transistor output flag outp
503. ure compensation accuracy ambient temperature 0 to 55 38 Cold junction temperature compensation resistor D uoc mue lite Quote aerae 278 282 Cold junction temperature compensation selection Un1G182 cese yu eS DESEE RS 135 Cold junction temperature process value Un G29 snis ee piod er E Wei d ead Ee 93 Comparison of the functions between the Q64TCN and the Qe4TC neva nee let Ripe ced 375 Compatibility 377 Compensation lead wire 288 289 290 291 Condition for alert judgment 203 Condition to be able to perform PID control 170 419 Condition where CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off zc oos Rs xe 203 Conditions for starting ST 227 Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise f nctionu 2s appdata Dated al detis 241 Conditions for vibration ST 228 Conditions where auto tuning cannot be executed PODER MURS 184 Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail 185 Conditions where self tuning does not complete due to SOTS sob us fri Ee OA He uu d ear usa 231 Conditions where self tuning is not executed 229 Connection 39 Control method 16 166 Control 16 162 Control mode 299 Control output 38 Co
504. ure flag XnA turns on When E PROM write failure flag XnA turns on turn E PROM write failure flag XnA on from off to write the data to the E2PROM again c Timings when this instruction cannot be received In the following timings this instruction cannot be received 1 While PID constants are written after auto tuning 2 While PID constants are read from the E7PROM 3 While a setting error is occurring 4 While a setting is being changed by Setting change instruction YnB For 1 to 3 above turn this instruction on from off after each condition is resolved For 4 data writing to the non volatile memory automatically starts if the factor is resolved For details on the data writing to the E PROM refer to Page 270 Section 4 30 57 58 5 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Turning Default setting registration instruction Yn9 on from off sets the data in the buffer memory areas back to the default values according to control mode selection After the data writing is completed Default value write completion flag Xn9 turns on a When Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on in operation mode Turning this instruction on from off does not set data back to the default value Turn on this instruction when Setting operation mode status Xn1 is off in the setting mode 6 Setting change instruction YnB Use this instruction to confirm the set value of the buffer memory the buffer memory areas
505. urrent error at an output BEGUN ene og XNE t XNE AnF off time has been detected CHO Output off time current error b14 of Bus p a Section 3 4 2 3 of CHO Alert PASS UMCA tums en definition Un G5 to Un G8 370 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Alarm code hexadecimal Cause Operation at alarm occurrence Action The ALM LED turns on CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF 06 Alert 1 has occurred turns on When Error reset instruction Yn2 is CHO Alert 1 68 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns turned OFF ON gt OFF after the on temperature process value PV is The ALM LED turns on restored after going into alert status CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF Write data error code Un GO is 070A Alert 2 has occurred turns on cleared to 0 CHO Alert 2 b9 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns The following flags and buffer on memory bits that turn on when an The ALM LED turns on alarm occurs turn off automatically CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF when the temperature process value 08 Alert 3 has occurred turns on PV is restored from alert status Alert b10 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to on XnF The ALM LED turns on The applicable bit gt Page 87 Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF Section 3 4 2 3 of CHO Alert 090A Alert 4 has occurred turns on definition Un G5 to Un G8 CHO Alert 4 b11 of Un G5 to Un
506. urrent value Un G280 to Un G287 gt Page 141 Section 3 4 2 56 If the both are set to 0 the heater current cannot be measured If either of them is not set the heater current cannot be measured precisely 138 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 54 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 C22 Set the assignment of each current sensor CT input to the channels a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Correspondence between CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT input terminal Buffer memory address CT1 Un G264 CT2 Un G265 CT3 Un G266 CT4 Un G267 CT5 Un G268 CT6 Un G269 CT7 Un G270 CT8 Un G271 c Setting range 0 Unused 1 CH1 2 CH2 3 CH3 4 CHA d Default value The default values are set to Unused 0 for all terminals Point f a three phase heater is used the same channel should be assigned to two current sensor CT inputs For setting examples refer to the following gt Page 296 Section 5 4 3 In the heating cooling control CH3 and CH4 cannot be assigned to this setting In the mix control CH2 cannot be assigned to this setting 139 Aiowaw Jejynq ay jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 55 CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 C3 Select the current sensor to be connected to each current sensor CT input a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b
507. us Page 270 Section 4 30 Write the value directly into the buffer memory through a sequence program CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 5 Procedure of auto tuning a GX Works2 Set this function on the Auto Tuning window X Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning 1 Selectthe module by which auto tuning is executed Module Selection Auto Tuning and click Module Selection 0010 2 Click the Auto Tuning Setting tab Monitor Status Executes auto tuning Made irt Mentor Target Module OLO QEATCTIN 2 1 morcos Auto Turing auto Turing Setting AR Tem ce os ca io control operation status gt Process value PV oc oc Set value 59 oc oc oc c Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh 50 50 50 5 0 8 Cooling side manipulated value 00 0 0 constant PID constant curent value 4 Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph 0 30 30 30 c Cooling side proportional band PC setting 00 00 0 0 0 0 5 Integral time 1 setting 2405 205 205 205 TA Derivative time D setting 605 60s 60s 605 2 Loop disconnection detection judgment time 4805 4305 4805 5805 tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start ELEC Sat
508. use an error to occur Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module For the QO4TCTTN or Q64TCRTN Select 16 points Points For the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN Use two slots Select Empty and 16 points for the first slot Select Intelli and 16 points for the second slot Start XY Enter an arbitrary start I O number of the Q64TCN 378 APPENDICES 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Configure the setting on Switch setting in PLC parameter Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O assignment gt Click Switch setting Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format x Select HEX Empty Inteli Function extension bit specification b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b2 b1 bO Item Setting item Control output HOLD CLEAR setting Set value Output setting Switch 1 H 0 CLEAR Cee haere Other thanO HOLD Control mode selection Set value Control mode Number of control loops 0000 Standard control Standard control 4 loops 0001 Heating cooling control normal mode Heating cooling control 2 loops Switch 2 0002 Heating cooling control expanded mode Heating cooling control 4 loops 2 Heating cooling control 1 loop 0003 Mix control normal mode Standard contro
509. used Channels 262 Heating cooling In heating cooling control normal mode and mix control normal mode only temperature measurement can be performed by using unused temperature input terminals When this function is used temperature control and alert judgment are not performed 1 Temperature input terminals that can be used Temperature input terminals that can be used for this function differ depending on the control mode Use the terminals indicating 20 Monitor CH2 Monitor CH3 and MTALI Monitor in the following table Terminal symbol Terminal Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN No Heating cooling MIX Conical Heating cooling normal mode normal mode normal mode normal mode 1 L1H L1H L1H L1H 2 L1C L1C L1C L1C 3 L2H L3 L2H L3 4 L2C L4 L2C L4 5 COM COM COM COM 6 Unused Unused Unused Unused 7 CH1 CH1 CH1A CH1A 8 CH2 MT2 CH2A MT2A 9 CH1 CH1 CH1B CH1B 10 CH2 MT2 CH2 B MT2B 11 Unused Unused CH1b CH1 b 12 CJ CJ CH2b MT2b 13 Unused Unused MT3A CH3A 14 CJ CJ MT4A CH4A 15 MT3 CH3 MT3B CH3 16 MT4 CH4 MT4B CH4 B 17 MT3 CH3 MT3b CH3 b 18 MT4 CH4 MT4b CH4 b 1 For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN the terminals in the table above are those on a terminal block for I O 2 Buffer memory areas that can be used with this function The following ta
510. ut flag output flag Transistor Heating neang 22 16 CH2 output fla transistor transistor output flag output flag Page 92 Hes 0 R x x Section eating 3 4 2 7 23 17 CH3 Transistor transistor Transistor 7 output flag output flag output flag Heating 24 184 Transistor traneistor Transistor output flag 6 output flag output flag 25 19 CH1 Set value SV monitor Set value SV 26 1Ays Set value SV Set value SV Se p SV monitor monitor monitor Page 93 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 R Section 27 1B 18 monitor monitor monitor 3 4 2 8 28 BH Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV monitor monitor 9 monitor Page 93 29 1Dy All CHs Cold junction temperature process value 8 0 R Section 3 4 2 9 Page 93 30 1E All CHs MAN mode shift completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 10 Page 94 31 1Fy AllCHs E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 11 Z TT Page 96 320204 CH1 Input range 7 RT R W x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 103 33 21 CH1 Stop mode setting 1 R W x Section 3 4 2 13 Page 104 34 224 CH1 Set value SV setting 0 R W Section 3 4 2 14 Proportional i m ius 105 35 23 CH1 30 R W Secti 239 band P setting band Ph band Ph o 3 4 2 15 setting setting Page 107 36 24 CH1 Integral time 1 setting 240 R W x Section 3 4 2 16 Page 107
511. ute auto tuning again 363 sjeuBis syoeyD pg uo un jou seop oux bey AWAY UUM 8 4 5 When the auto tuning does not complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 stays on and does not turn off Check Item Action Are b4 to b7 of the E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag Un G31 set to 1 ON Set Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Um G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 to Disable 0 gt Page 128 Section 3 4 2 37 To back up the setting turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 Is E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 set to Requested 1 Set E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 to Not requested 0 7 5 Page 127 Section 3 4 2 36 Has the set value SV been set correctly Is the manipulated value MV still 0 because the set value SV is small Set the set value SV to the desired value 8 4 6 When the self tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on Check Item Action Have the self tuning start conditions been met Refer to the Self tuning function section gt 223 Section 4 18 and confirm that all conditions have been met Has self tuning ended abnormally Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for self
512. utput 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 mr COM Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance T NEAL DIS thermometer A Ens thermometer A ens hermometer A 8 N2 2 CH2A CH2 Resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 9 N1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 10 N2 B2 CH2B CH2 Resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 12 IN2 b2 CH2b CH2 Resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 13 IN3 A3 CH3A CH3 Resistance MT3A Monitor 3 resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 44 INA A4 CHA A CH4 Resistance MT4 A Monitor 4 resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 45 IN3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance MT3B Monitor 3 resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 46 IN4 B4 CH4B CH4 Resistance MTAB Monitor 4 resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 17 IN3 b3 CH3b CH3 Resistance MT3 b Monitor 3 resistance CH3b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 18 IN4 b4 CH4 b CH4 Resistance MT4 b Monitor 4 resistanc
513. utput may be performed The temperature where the cooling control output starts can be shifted using this function therefore whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is prioritized can be selected 1 Overlap Overlap refers to the temperature area where both of heating control and cooling control are performed In the temperature area where both heating and cooling output overlap both of the output negate each other thus the control gain becomes moderate Consequently the change amount in the temperature process value PV for the output becomes small improving control stability Ex When buffer memory values are set as following CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CHO Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 2000 200 0 C Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 25 2 5 185 0 C to 200 0 C is the overlapping area Full scale x Overlap setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 025 15 0 C The temperature where cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 185 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the lower temperature side of the set value SV produces an overlapping area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Heating only Cooling only manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 Heating Cooling
514. utput with another analog module Un G708 to Un G711 133 CHLI Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 133 Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 772 152 CHO Number of moving averaging UnG698 to UnG701 ine aid reb el a Rc RR na 151 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 112 CHO Overlap dead band function Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 771 152 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF a MHD Cen aol hE ahd mico da doe ana a rera n 58 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 115 CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 152 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 153 Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 UnG775 153 CHO Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 153 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 131 105 CHO Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un GO071 e 147 CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 UniG070 eb uh eR er et ae
515. value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 CH Set the upper limit value lower limit value of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following 192 Section 4 11 a Setting range The setting range is 32000 to 32000 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Point The setting where the lower limit value is not less than the upper limit value does not cause an error The temperature process value PV is scaled according to the formula of lt gt Page 192 Section 4 11 2 78 CHO Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 3 When the temperature process value PV scaling function is enabled the scaled temperature process value PV is stored For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following gt Page 192 Section 4 11 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t 79 CHO Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 Select the type of derivative action Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable derivative action for the fixed value action and the ramp acti
516. value of the Q64TCN to the buffer memory After the data writing is completed this flag turns on Turning Default setting registration instruction Yn9 off from on also turns off this flag Default setting registration instruction Yn9 User setting Buffer memory value Default value write completion flag OFF Xn9 During default setting registration Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN a Unused channel For unused channels which temperature sensors are not connected to Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un1G157 must be set to Unused 1 after the completion of the writing of the default value If not the ALM LED blinks For details on the unused channel setting refer to the following s Page 297 Section 5 5 53 sjeubis ndut jo sjiejeq BINPOW pauaysues sjeuBls 8 E PROM write failure flag XnA Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the E PROM This flag turns on when the writing failed ON E2PROM backup instruction OFF Yn8 During write to 2 E2PROM write completion flag OFF Xn8 E2PROM write failure flag OFF XnA During write to E2PROM Error detection of write to E2PROM Executed a sequence program EL gt Executed by the Q64TCN Thi
517. ve Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A A Set value Sv gt Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value f i 0 gt Time 0 r r gt Time Alert set value f Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 5 195 Section 4 12 2 a d Upper lower limit deviation alert When one of the following conditions is satisfied the system is put in an alert status Deviation E 2 Alert set value Deviation E x Alert set value uonound ziv Temperature process value PV A 2 E Set value SV pl e ER m Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value M Time Alert set value 1 9 9 i Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 Page 195 Section 4 12 2 a 197 e Within range alert When the following condition is satisfied the system is put in a
518. w c Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Right click gt Auto Refresh oax Display Filter Display All Item E Fransfer to CPU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value M Heating side manipulated value Mvh Transistor output flag Heating side transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value MY Heating side manipulated value Mvh For another analog module output Temperature rise judgment flag Set value 5 monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Self tuning flag Temperature conversion completion flag Process value PV scaling value W1151 The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 An error code or alarm code is Write data error code i W1150 stored Detected temperature value Temperature M where Sensor Compensation is W1151 process value PV performed is stored The value is stored dependin Alert definition dani pending w1155 on the detected alert The number of parameters of the auto refresh setting can be reduced by using the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh When the setting item reduction mode is set consecutive devices are automatically set to the grouped setting items For details on the setting item reduction mode of auto refresh refer to the
519. w to check error history The start address of the error history where the latest error is stored can be checked in Latest address of error history Un1G1279 If the third error occurred The third error is stored in Error history No 3 and 1296 the start address of Error history No 3 is stored in Latest address of error history UnXG 1279 Latest address of error history The start address of the error history Un G1279 where the latest error is stored is stored Details of error history An error history consists of the following Address data 1280 Error history No 1 Error code First two digits Last two digits 1st error of the year of the year Error Month Day occurrence 1288 Hour Minute time Error ieee ee Second Day of the week 2nd error 1296 Error history No 3 XN Empty 1400 Error history No 16 Empty 272 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Ex If the 17th error occurred The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and 1280 the start address of Error history No 1 is overwritten in Latest address of error history Un G1279 Latest address of error history Un G1279 Address f 1280 Error history No 1 1288 Error history No 2 The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the 1st error history will be erased 2nd error 1296 Error his
520. when cold junction temperature compensation is executed for the Q64TCTTN and compensation resistor Q64TCTTBWN 278 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Number Name Description 8 Serial number plate Indicates the serial number of the Q64TCN 1 The terminal block layout differs depending on modules to be used For respective terminal block layouts refer to the following 7 5 Page 280 Section 5 3 1 to Page 285 Section 5 3 4 2 The error code and buffer memory address of the detected error can be checked in Write data error code Un GO For details refer to the following Page 86 Section 3 4 2 1 SOWEN Hed E G 279 1 For the Q64TCTTN Heating cooling control Heating cooling control Ln Indication Standard control normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output 1 CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8
521. wing figure shows the system configuration for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code read QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F Heater gt Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 to 1300 C 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui Buis ueuM Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points peas epoo 10119 pue se yons LZ 7 307 2 Programming condition This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple type 0 to 1300 C connected to CH1 An error code can be read and reset The self tuning function automatically sets the PID constants optimal to CH1 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example Q64TCTTN RUN ALM ERR L1 Heater operation 1 i input OUT OUT2 OUT3 COM OUT4 2 24vDC CH1 NC 18 I 1 INT 1 IN2 2 1 1 ES IN2 2 Cold junction CJ NC tempera
522. y Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 3 Double click the item to change the setting and enter the set value Items to select from a pull down list Double click the item to set to display the pull down list Select the item Items to enter in a text box Double click the item to set and enter the value If writing is performed without setting unnecessary items for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 a write data error error code O00024 may occur For details on set values refer to the following Setting item Reference Input range Page 96 Section 3 4 2 12 Set value SV setting Page 104 Section 3 4 2 14 Unused channel setting Page 126 Section 3 4 2 35 Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Page 105 Section 3 4 2 15 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 300 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS Setting item Reference Integral time 1 setting Page 107 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Page 107 Section 3 4 2 17 Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Page 114 Section 3 4 2 23 Control response parameter Page 116 Section 3 4 2 25 Stop Mode Setting Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 PID continuation flag Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 Forward reverse action setting Page 121 Section 3 4 2 30 Upper limit setting limiter
523. y determining and setting the amount to shift the value of the manipulated value MV in a stable condition from the reference value The reference value is 50 for standard control and 0 for heating cooling control Point P This function can be active only in P control and PD control This function is inactive when integral time 1 is other than 0 CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is ignored even if it is set Note that a write data error error code O00044 occurs if it is outside the setting range 1 Standard control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value MV is 50 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 5096 of manipulated value an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the proportional band P can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 300 30 The Q64TCN shifts the manipulated value MV by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 50 to 80 Proportional band yc i eee i Configure the settings Percentage to the full scale gs follows gt uonounj ese Integral time 1 0 Derivative time D 0 Saur
524. ys active therefore an alert would not be output even when the temperature process value PV is not following the value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 To prevent such cases the standby second time function is deactivated if a setting change rate limiter is used CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 5 Condition for alert judgment Whether alert occurrence is judged or not depends on the settings of the followings e Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 7 s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 1 gt Page 131 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF s Page 58 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un1G129 L gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 13 The following table shows the relationship between each setting above and the execution of alert judgment O Judged x Not judged Setting operation PID CHO PID control Stop mode setting NES mode instruction continuation forced stop instruction Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 ELE Yn1 flag Un G169 YnC to YnF Un G129 Med Stop 0 x Power ON Stop 0 Continue OFF ON Monitor 1 Setting mode 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode Stop 0 Continue Stop 0 1 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Stop 0 Monitor 1 x Alert 2 Setting mode OFF Stop

MELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents